Opportunities

View All & Sort By:

  • Commercial Roofing – 100% Recurring Clients – No Storm Chasing

     

    This commercial roofing business has nearly 100% repeat customer base – there is no storm chasing. In 2024, there is already $12M in backlog and $6.5M in work in progress. Most of their projects are completed in less than one year, services are varied including, covering membrane roofing, metal roofing, sheet metal, slate & tile steep slope roofing, waterproofing, plaza pavers, and solar installation and repairs. Their well-developed team of 51 is made up of 1 Controller, 1 HR Manager, 1 Superintendent, 2 Project Managers, 3 Estimators, 1 Accounting Assistant, and 42 Laborers. The owner coordinates with the Controller & Superintendent, along with overseeing banking. He is confident that the Controller & Superintendent are qualified and capable of operating the company. With the purchase of this company, a buyer would receive $3.3M in assets, which includes $630K in equipment (forklifts, air compressors, generators, safety equipment, boom lifts, anything needed for their jobs), 16 vehicles, computers, FF&E, office software, and working capital. The business operates out of a 16,000 sq. ft. facility with 4,000 sq. ft. of office space.

    Priced at $7,200,000, this company is poised for a seamless transition. The owner is willing to carry up to 10% of the price and has offered to stay on board for 1-2 years, showing a vested interest in the ongoing success of the company. Currently there is no marketing or outside sales taking place, and there is a lot of untapped potential on the solar side of the business, which will greatly improve revenues and profit margins.

     

     

    PRICE $7,200,000 CASH FLOW $1,795,945

  • Infrastructure Contracting Firm with a focus in Roadwork and Water Utilities

    Infrastructure development firm focused on roadways, underground utilities and water/sewer projects that have served all 5 boroughs of New York over the last 20 years. Though they do not have any sort of certification for MBE, WBE, or 8a etc. this firm has proved a successful track record working with various New York City agencies such as the Department of Design and Construction, Department of Environmental Protection, School Construction Authority and Port Authority of NY & NJ. They do not currently undertake private work. The business occupies a 25,000 square foot lot with a 4,000 square foot office space. There are 40-50 fulltime W2 employees, and the field staff are union. The seller is planning for retirement and has offered a training period of 1- 2 years to ensure a smooth handover – he already has 2 VPs in place to take over. In terms of growth opportunities, this business has the potential to take on larger projects. The equipment and vehicles included in the purchase price have been valued at $2,861,000 during a 2023 appraisal.

    Priced at $4,395,000, the seller has offered to carry 10% of the purchase price in addition to a 10% equity roll in order to show his vested interest in the continued success of the business moving forward. A down payment of $439,500 will return $661,918 in the first year after debt payments! With its extensive experience in public bid projects and established relationships with various New York City agencies, the company can leverage its reputation and expertise to secure larger contracts. Expanding their project portfolio can lead to increased revenue and further establish their presence in the construction industry.

     

     

    PRICE $4,395,000 CASH FLOW $1,227,903

  • Packaging & Wholesale of Holistic Goods: Owner will stay 5 years and carry 40%

    Boasting sales of $30MM, this B2B business has two primary client types: smaller wholesalers and direct to shop owners. Services include wholesale, coordinating manufacturing, packaged development with fulfillment, and arranging logistics through 3rd party freight. This team includes a CFO, General Manager, VP of Sales, Retail Lead, 2 Manufacturing Leads, Warehouse Lead, 4 Warehouse Associates, 5 In House Sales Reps, 24 Packagers, and 19 Outside Sales Reps. They do not have any drivers, all are outsourced. They focus mainly on Distribution and Logistics to other smaller wholesalers which make up 59% of their revenue, while 38% is sold Business to Business to multi location owners; less than 3% is sold direct to the consumer and this is intentional for research and development purposes. The current owner recently reinvested significant amounts of time and money into expanding operations, including moving to a distribution center twice the size to handle the growth. They operate out of a 12,000 sq. ft. distribution facility in Southern California. In 2023 they added another distribution center in Florida. The goal for selling is to expand with a Strategic Buyer or Equity Group who can bring strong business acumen. The owner will remain on board for 4-5 years and is willing to do a 40% carry or equity roll combo as a sign of a vested interest in the business’s success. Currently there are 36 States who have recognized these Low-Dose consumables as a legal product and there are projected to be another 7 states that will follow suit in the next 6-9 months. The business does not sell any traditional cannabis products but rather regulated hemp which allows them to legally sell across state lines.

    This business is priced at $49,000,000, producing a 30% profit margin! There are 43 well-known and respectably sized Private Equity Groups and dozens of publicly traded companies that own very similar businesses! Another growth area is in manufacturing, bringing it in house to boost productivity.

     

    PRICE $49,000,000 CASH FLOW $9,835,970

  • Parks, Roads Infrastructure with 62 million in Backlog

     

     

    This Civil based Infrastructure business performs Site Prep for Parks, Roads and School Districts with a focus in paving. Their repeat client base includes the DOT, Department of Parks & Rec and the Port Authorities. The proof is in the performance with this NYC business as they have never defaulted on a project in their 43-year history. This business currently has over $62M in backlog – the highest they have ever had! The assets are valued over 4 million, which include $2,350,000 in heavy equipment, $1.3 million in vehicles and they will leave $500,000 in Working Capital! This makes the loan over-collateralized plus there is a bank loan already pre-approved for a qualified buyer! The team consists of 20 core people, there is no shortage of trained professionals at hand, including office staff, project managers, and foremen plus 30-50 union laborers. The owner currently works about 25 hours a week and will provide transition for 2-3 years. The owner is ready to retire but has a vested interest in the continuing success of this business, to show good faith he is willing to finance and/or hold a 30% Equity Roll. The business utilizes a 12,000 sq. ft. building which includes an office, shop, machines, storage with 8,000 sq. ft. of unused space that could be used for expansion! Priced at $5,100,000, this business is primed and ready for a new owner to step in and enjoy a backlog that has surpassed their all time high. Their work falls under the municipal umbrella: meaning if there should be a recession, their workflow will not be impacted. In fact, due to the recently passed US Infrastructure Bill, this business will grow significantly as $66 Billion dollars has been set aside for public transportation infrastructure work. A new owner could add plumbing, precast, fencing and hardscaping to the list of services as these are all growth opportunities. A buyer must qualify for a Minority, Woman or Veteran designation to own majority of this business.

     

    PRICE $5,100,000 CASH FLOW $1,128,352

  • Upstate New York Environmental Services

     

    This upstate New York company provides environmental services regionally and has generally low inventory, as everything needed is purchase based on the job at hand.  This company provides asbestos removal, lead remediation, and fireproofing services.  They are consistently seeing year over year growth and hit over $8M in revenue in 2021!  They have been established in upstate New York since 2012.

     

    Most business is accomplished in Upstate New York (85%), with the remaining work completed in the New York City area.  Customers include government organizations, state agencies, general contractors, construction managers, property managers, and property owners.  Project timelines are from a few weeks to a several months long and most contracts (85%) are earned through a request for proposal process.  Rarely subcontractors are utilized for large projects or those at long distances.  Supporting this team are two supervisors, one accountant, and one team assistant. 

     

    The company operates from a small office and warehouse space.  Purchasing and storing large amounts of equipment is not necessary as this business rents any large items needed to complete projects and houses very few assets on site.  All inventory and materials are ordered by project and may be briefly stored by this business or drop-shipped to the work site. 

     

    Priced at $898,000, a 12.5% down payment returns $147,250 in the first year after debt payments – a 131% return on investment! Opportunities are plentiful for growth in the New York City Area as well as widening the service area to include New Jersey, Pennsylvania, or additional regions of New York.

    PRICE $898,000 CASH FLOW $262,089

  • Fire Protection Engineering Firm in Texas – 60% Profit Margin

    The current Senior Consultant for this fire protection engineering firm has over 20 years of experience and would be able to assume the role of CEO under new ownership! With a 60% profit margin and year-over-year growth in sales for 3 years, this Dallas company has a highly skilled team of employees already in place who run the day-to-day operations.  Established for over 25 years, this firm provides a wide array of services in all phases of fire protection engineering, including building & fire code consulting & engineering, fire alarm systems, automatic sprinkler systems, smoke exhaust systems, fire modeling, plan review, and systems testing. Their diverse client base consists of design professionals (55%), contractors (25%), federal government (10%), and private owners (10%), with their service area covering primarily Texas and surrounding states. The collaborative team of 7 includes the owner, a licensed Fire Protection Engineer, along with 1 Senior Consultant, 1 Senior Designer, 3 Engineers, and 1 Administrative Assistant. The team is based out of 2,300 sq. ft. office in Dallas, with a small 200 sq. ft. satellite office in San Antonio.

     

    Plan review customers are a portion of their ongoing client base; plan review services provide recurring monthly revenue, as it is a service in constant demand and yields steady cash flow for the company, accounting for approximately 20% of their total revenue per year. The average plan review fee ranges from $500-$1,000. Project sale sizes range anywhere from $2k-$200k, with an average sale size of around $10k. The firm uses state-of-the-art software packages such as AutoCAD, Revit, HydraCAD, AutoSPRINK, CFAST, FDS, Egress, and Intelligibility.

     

    Priced at $5,900,000, this firm has seen year-over-year growth in sales for 3 years and a 5-year average profit margin of 47%. A solid team is already in place; they run the day-to-day operations, handle clients regularly, and complete projects successfully. Over the years, this firm has gained a  reputation for providing some of the best services when it comes to fire protection and planning, giving them steady word-of-mouth referrals. Pursuing more projects in colleges & universities, school districts, and in the industrial sector would certainly lead to continued growth.

    PRICE $5,900,000 CASH FLOW $1,239,860

  • Environmental & Biological Firm with a 36% Profit Margin

    This full-service environmental advisory firm has 80% private clients & public agencies and 20% federal government contracts and over 25 years of experience! Specializing in the preparation of CEQA/NEPA documents, biological, regulatory and cultural services, they are known as intellectual leaders in the environmental community. This highly focused team of 23 professionals with decades of experience leads clients through complex local, state and federal agency processes with excellence and maintains their business year over year. The seller is also willing to remain on for 2-4 years. They have a 36% profit margin and $5M in the pipeline!

    They serve a myriad of clients, working on jobs ranging from smaller development projects to $1.8 billion transportation improvements. Clients include builders/developers, cities, counties, water districts, school districts, the State of California, Caltrans, and metropolitan planning organizations throughout Southern California.

    This firm is focused on providing superior service to existing clients, identifying new potential clients and participating in the Women Transportation Seminar, American Planning Association and Association of Environmental Professionals.

    The owner currently works on business development and project/ financial oversight. Growth opportunities include the expansion of cultural and CEQA services as they become leading divisions for the company. 

     

    PRICE $9,225,000 CASH FLOW $1,688,412

  • Environmental Based Services - Lead, Mold & Asbestos

     

    A 12.5% down payment of $681,250 returns $691,301 in the first year after debt payments!  The seller is willing to hold 15% of the note and is willing to do either a seller carry or equity hold for that amount.  With a team of 90+ employees, this company allows for passive ownership. The team of well-trained specialists provide exceptional asbestos abatement, lead and mold remediation services.   With most projects one to two weeks in duration, this company completes 800 jobs per year.   Annually, there are typically one or two very large projects that bring in over 10% of income, but the projects and customers vary from year-to-year.  The diverse customer base includes industrial businesses (<5%), commercial companies (90%) and homeowners (<10%).   

     

    Leveraging their $3,004,099 in assets as well as their team of 75 union workers, this well-established company is efficient, driven, and well-respected for their industry knowledge.  They are often called upon to successfully complete projects that others consider exceedingly technical, challenging, or too large.  Located in a large facility, the warehouse has storage space for all equipment and inventory, while the office can house the 17-member administrative team comfortably.  This location will be for sale outside the sale of the business.

     

    The owners are not involved in the day-to-day operations, rather lending their skills to business analysis, financial management, and process improvement. 

     

    PRICE $5,450,000 CASH FLOW $1,456,295

  • Commercial Roofing – 100% Recurring Clients – No Storm Chasing

     

    This commercial roofing business has nearly 100% repeat customer base – there is no storm chasing. In 2024, there is already $12M in backlog and $6.5M in work in progress. Most of their projects are completed in less than one year, services are varied including, covering membrane roofing, metal roofing, sheet metal, slate & tile steep slope roofing, waterproofing, plaza pavers, and solar installation and repairs. Their well-developed team of 51 is made up of 1 Controller, 1 HR Manager, 1 Superintendent, 2 Project Managers, 3 Estimators, 1 Accounting Assistant, and 42 Laborers. The owner coordinates with the Controller & Superintendent, along with overseeing banking. He is confident that the Controller & Superintendent are qualified and capable of operating the company. With the purchase of this company, a buyer would receive $3.3M in assets, which includes $630K in equipment (forklifts, air compressors, generators, safety equipment, boom lifts, anything needed for their jobs), 16 vehicles, computers, FF&E, office software, and working capital. The business operates out of a 16,000 sq. ft. facility with 4,000 sq. ft. of office space.

    Priced at $7,200,000, this company is poised for a seamless transition. The owner is willing to carry up to 10% of the price and has offered to stay on board for 1-2 years, showing a vested interest in the ongoing success of the company. Currently there is no marketing or outside sales taking place, and there is a lot of untapped potential on the solar side of the business, which will greatly improve revenues and profit margins.

     

     

    PRICE $7,200,000 CASH FLOW $1,795,945

  • Manufacturer of Racking Systems for IT and Servers

     

     

    This manufacturer designs and fabricates racking and cabinetry systems across Canada and the United States. Established in Toronto for over 50 years, this fabrication business has experienced significant growth and success in the industry. With over $1,000,000 in upcoming work, the company continues to expand its market presence and customer base. Their client base consists of IT companies, cabling contractors, distributors, data centers, and financial institutions – 70% is direct to the end user and 30 % is to distributors. They work with 40 to 50 clients annually. The company operates from a spacious 24,000 square foot facility that houses a design center, and production area. The company has 24 full-time staff members, including 16 skilled craftsmen in the shop and 6 administrative personnel in the office, and 2 in leadership. They do not do any installation or wiring of products. The owner is not involved in the business, providing minimal oversight as he has a team of experienced managers and employees who run the day-to-day operations. The seller has offered to carry 15% of the purchase price in addition to a 6-month training period in order to provide a seamless transition. Equipment and Inventory included is valued at $939,429, plus AR for the buyer’s working capital is $145,000. In addition, they boast a work in progress of $650,000 with a backlog of $700,000! Priced at $2,450,000, this business is primed and ready for a new owner to step in and enjoy a reputation that has been built over the past 50 years. A 20% down payment of $490,000 will return $128,602 in the first year after debt payments!

     

     

    PRICE $2,450,000 CASH FLOW $490,783

  • Manufacturing and Fabrication of Millwork – 100% B2B with $6M in Backlog

     

     

    Operating out of a 14,000 sq, ft. fabricating facility in Salt Lake City, which they recently moved to keep up with the year-over-year growth, in fact, they are experiencing a higher-than-normal backlog of over $6M! Over the last 3 decades, this fabrication & millwork operation has served a repeat base of commercial clients; ranging across schools/universities, hospitals, churches, detention centers and office buildings. Known for high quality, specialized manufacturing of cabinetry and related goods, there is a tenured team of 26, including 5 in Administration, 11 in the Shop, and 6 in the Field. They have an expert leadership team running the day-to-day operations, made up of a General Manager, Shop Foreman, Production Manager, and a Project Manager. The owner is removed from the daily roles, he is more of the “Big Vision” and general oversight of his key people. After 30 years, he is retiring, but is committed to a 2–3-year transition to ensure ongoing success of the business. He is also willing to finance 10- 15% of the purchase price. There is over $3 million in assets with the purchase, which includes CNC routers, horizontal boring machine, gliding saw, table & chip saw, timesaver sander, software, 1 pick-up, 2 trailers, 2 vans, 2 box trucks and all of the additional equipment and tools needed to operate the business. They have a focused service area in the Southwest US. There are no affiliations or special certifications associated with this business, meaning they are not MBE, WBE, veteran owned, union, etc.

    Priced at $3,825,000, this business comes with a proven history, a tenured staff, and reliable client base, allowing for a buyer to step in and continue operating and growing successfully from day one. A 12.5% down payment of $478,125 returns $518,603 in the first year after debt payments!

     

    PRICE $3,825,000 CASH FLOW $1,061,649

  • Renovations and Maintenance for Denver School Districts: Seller will carry 35%

     

     

    Their services revolve around maintenance and rehabilitation including renovations, drywall, light electrical system installation, plumbing, and demolition focusing on municipal work with over 50% of their revenue from the state school systems in the Denver Metro Area. The owner of this business is selling for retirement preparation but before stepping away from this operation, he is dedicated to ensuring the ongoing success and comfort of both the staff and clients which is why he has offered a transition period of up to 2-3 years. As an added demonstration of his vested interest in the ongoing success of the business, the owner has also offered to carry 35% of the purchase price - this is 3 times more than the average! This purchase includes $237,852 in equipment and vehicles as well as $377,424 in working capital, along with a 100% collateralized bank loan! Their small but mighty team includes a General Manager who assists with estimating, hiring and scheduling, 2 Field Superintendents plus 1 in billing, while the owner focuses on the estimating and management of the overall business.

    Priced at $795,000 and with sales of $2,698,493 in 2022, this business is primed and ready for a new owner to step in and continue operations. This business is a fantastic opportunity for a wide variety of buyers, it possesses exponential room for growth in almost every field as the owner has kept things small out of personal preference. Due to the recently passed infrastructure bill, this company is recession proof due to their municipality focus.

     

    PRICE $795,000 CASH FLOW $256,972

  • Professional PM Firm with over $120 Million in Contracted Work

     

    This professional PM and construction management firm plans and manages renovations and maintenance for military bases across the upper West Coast. Clients are 90% Federal/Government and 10% private hire, including the VA, Navy, US Coast Guard, Army, School Districts, and Apartments/Condos. There are typically 20-30 active jobs concurrently which represents a current WIP of $24,000,000 plus several multi-year contracts in backlog. A highly developed management team is in place where there are about 35 key employees, including a President, CFO, 4 Project Managers, 2 Engineers, 5 Superintendents, 2 Foreman, 5 Estimators, 4 Quality Control, plus Admin, IT, and Assistants. This allows the owner to work remotely, spending only 10 hours per week providing “strategic vision” to the leadership team. They have a 4+ year backlog with multi-year contracts with proprietary deal flow in over $120 Million in contracts. The Seller is willing to stay 2-3 years postclose and will also offer a promissory note and/or equity roll of 30% as a sign of good faith. With the purchase, a buyer would receive $2.9M in assets, including working capital and the vehicles and equipment needed to continue successfully. CapEx remains very low at less than $200K per year. Reoccurring clients are the VA, Federal Government, and the US Military. There will not be any impact on this business should there be a recession, Government shutdown or upcoming election. In fact, due to the passed US Infrastructure Bill, this business will have organic growth as the bill has billions of set asides for our military bases.

     

    PRICE $36,500,000 CASH FLOW $6,802,180

  • Maintenance in Commercial Roofing: Reoccurring

     

    Their client base is made up of 100% commercial clients including consultants, general contractors, private real estate owners, construction managers, and municipalities, 65% of whom are repeat clients. With 95 W2 Employees, this commercial roofing business is able to self-perform 100% of their labor. With $16M already lined up in backlog (committed contracts), they are on target to have the best year ever in 2023, and there is no sign of slowing down in 2023! Their services include reroofing/scheduled replacement (50%), new construction (40%), and general repair & maintenance (10%) and are able to service a wide service area including a 75-mile radius of Akron. The sale of this business includes $5M in assets, including 30+ trucks & trailers, and $2.6M in equipment. This means that new ownership would be able to easily build on current growth opportunities without needing to invest excessive resources to do so. Growth opportunities include going after more maintenance/service work, sheet metal projects, and the recently approved US Infrastructure Bill will also provide growth across the municipal clients they work with. The company is a mixture of union and non-union, with the union side making up 80% of their total sales and 60% of their current projects. Generally, they are the largest employer on a month-tomonth basis in the union, they employ an average of 44 roofers and 15 sheet metal workers per day with a fairly even split of new construction vs. renovation, and mostly in the public sector. There are a large number of institutions in the area that require union members to perform their projects. The non-union side is more in the private sector, with 80% of their revenue comprised of new construction. Priced at $14,950,000, this business is primed for new ownership with already long-standing client relationships in place, an excellent reputation, and a strong word of mouth job pipeline. The owners are looking forward to retiring out of state, but the two active owners are more than happy to stay on board post-close to ensure a smooth transition. Owner 1 handles the oversight and management, as well as review of estimates and would stay for 1 year, Owner 2 handles the day-to-day operations and would stay for 2 years, and Owner 3 (absentee) does not need replacing. They would be willing to retain equity or carry a note for 15%, showing their vested interest in the ongoing success on the company.

    PRICE $14,950,000 CASH FLOW $2,592,337

  • Mechanical Advisory Firm: Recurring Clients are 90% of Revenue

    With 90% of revenue coming from recurring clients, this mechanical advisory company subcontracts almost all their labor. They have been serving major commercial clients since 1992 in HVAC, mechanical, and plumbing and 80% of their business is from new construction with the remaining 20% coming from maintenance & repairs work. Deemed an essential business amid the pandemic, this company’s largest customers are food processing facilities and Amazon distribution centers, with a strong foothold in the logistical and institutional sectors. Their highly experienced team with 5+ year tenures, has over 100 years of combined experience; it consists of the owner, who acts as General Manager, plus 1 Project Manager, 1 Estimator, 1 Office Manager/Bookkeeper, and subcontractors as needed (3 of which are exclusive to this company).

    Using proprietary software that tracks the breakdown of all of their costs for each individual project has set them apart from the competition; it allows them to be exceptionally cost-conscious and pursue jobs that match their skill set, while being cost-effective. Clients know this company will always stay on budget. In addition, they have never lost money on a project due to their scientific approach to pricing.

    Established in 1992, they are a legacy company in the construction world; they receive invitations from the contracting and construction communities to bid a job and have a current win rate on bids of 50%!   This company does not market and advertising as 100% of their customers come from referrals from existing customers. With a current backlog of $6.5M, the team is committed to seeing a job through from beginning to end, from the bidding process to coordinating the resources and installation needed for the project. Services include plumbing, heating, ventilation, air conditioning, sprinklers, industrial gas fitting, steam fitting, process piping, and pneumatics.

    This would be a fantastic bolt-on opportunity for a control’s contractor, electrician, or civil contractor. Creating synergy between two companies would be an incredible opportunity to expand the market share and boost revenue.

     

    PRICE $11,750,000 CASH FLOW $2,416,800

  • General Contracting, Electrical & Mechanical Services in Growing Area

    This multi-trade service business has an 80% recurring client base and a 33% 3-Year average profit margin!  With an incredibly versatile team of employees in place, 90% of their work is self-performed. They offer complete mechanical, electrical, and automation design, installation, and maintenance, as well as steel erection, concrete foundations, design build, and heavy equipment installation. The team of employees is incredibly versatile, with the ability to transition from trade to trade very easily. They have 25+ recurring clients with most of them having an MSA in place. In other cases, even though there is no contract in place, this company is their contractor of choice.  The company started performing more mechanical services a few years ago, resulting in higher net income and profit margins. As they continue to do more on the mechanical side in the coming years, a new owner can expect to see profit margins and net income continue to increase, as profit margins from mechanical work is 35%, compared to 15% from general contracting services. There is tremendous room for expansion into the mechanical side, which currently accounts for only 9% of the business, but has a higher profit margin than the other services they provide. 

    Located near Charleston, South Carolina, the company operates from a two-acre property including four buildings. The seller owns the real estate and would rent it to the next owner for $3,500/month. The highly skilled and experienced team includes the Owner/President (who is willing to stay on as President or GM if desired by Buyer), 2 Project Managers, 3 Superintendents (2 of which are Assistant Project Managers), 1 Bookkeeper, and 1 Office Manager/Safety Coordinator.

    Work is steady throughout the year and most projects are completed within a 100-mile radius of the office; temperatures in the area are generally in the 40’s-80’s, so they rarely have to hold jobs due to weather delays. There are no licenses limiting geographical expansion.

    PRICE $6,200,000 CASH FLOW $1,472,747

  • Producer of Large Pre-Fabricated Metal Structures for Commercial Purposes

     

    This company specializes in manufacturing of pre-fabricated metal structures for various end uses and also manufacturers parts and inventory pieces for metal and steel buildings. They are located conveniently between Milwaukee and Madison, Wisconsin with a nationwide service area, and sales managers strategically placed throughout the Midwest. One of the key products offered is cold-formed steel buildings. These structures are known for their durability, strength, and versatility - they are designed to withstand harsh weather conditions and provide long-lasting performance. The company also offers a wide range of metal buildings suitable for different purposes such as commercial, industrial, agricultural, and self-storage units. In addition to complete buildings, they also fabricate various parts and building components which include steel panels, framing materials, insulation, and fasteners. They do not build or install any structures. They do not haul or truck any product; everything is shipped using a 3rd party. The B2B client base consists of general contractors, and business owners. The well-designed manufacturing facility spans over 36,000 square feet and is home to $1.1 million of equipment and over $300,000 of inventory. The company has a team of 19 dedicated individuals in various departments including a COO, two district managers, a VP of engineering who oversees the technical aspects of the projects, a CFO, two customer service representatives, plus there are 12 skilled laborers with various talents such as welding technicians and painters, who contribute to the manufacturing process. The owner is semi-passive, primarily involved in approving orders, billing, and providing general oversight. Reason for sale is planning their retirement.

    Priced at $2,700,000, this business comes with over $200,000 in accounts receivable and generated $530,118 in cash flow in 2023. The seller has offered to stay with the business, postclose, for 1 year in order to provide a smooth transition. Growth opportunities include sourcing additional vendors and bringing shipping in-house as they currently rely on 3rd party shipping.

     

    PRICE $2,700,000 CASH FLOW $686,118

  • Commercial Glass and Glazing with 85% Repeat clients

     

    This prominent commercial glass and glazing company, based in Phoenix, has been providing services to their business-to-business client base for 13 years throughout the state of Arizona. Their clients are not the end user but rather the general contractor. They boast an 85% repeat customer base. The focus of their work is on hospitals, schools, office parks and car dealerships - there is no residential clients. They have a spacious 7,700 square foot facility with a large shop for fabrication alongside furnished offices. The staff includes 7 in leadership and 3 admin, along with 9 laborer’s, installers, and glazers. The owner is willing to stay on board for 2-4 years while settling into retirement. The purchase also comes with the necessary amount of vehicles, equipment, and working capital which can range from $500K - $700K.

    Priced at $3,300,000, a 10% down payment of $330,000 will return $461,009 in the first year after debt payments. The seller has offered to carry 10% of the purchase price in order to show their vested interest in the continued success of the business moving forward. In terms of growth, their strategy includes hiring more staff and expanding into the residential sector.

     

    PRICE $3,300,000 CASH FLOW $937,048

  • Vinyl Fabrication with 100% Wholesale to Distributors

     

     

    This vinyl fabrication company distributes raw vinyl products to wholesalers and large advertising firms, their customer is not the end user. The production facility is a spacious 8,100 sq. ft. uniquely modified fabrication space. The owner has lived out of state for over 3 years, and what allows him to do this is the President who operates the company and has been there nearly 20 years. Also included on their staff is an Art Director, Sales Manager, Production Manager, several Finishers, along with Customer Service Associates. The product mix is 33% vinyl banners, 33% trade show displays, and 33% specialty graphics. The distribution network they have built is nationwide with a hyper focus in the Southwest region. This business has been 100% SBA approved for a qualified buyer who has 10% cash down. A buyer who puts down 10% of the purchase price will receive a return of $256K after their loan payment – this is an incredible rate of return! The cash flow for the last twelve months is $577K, which is a 27% profit margin. There is little to no advertising, marketing, or business development, and this company is successfully operating and growing year over year by simply servicing their existing client base. Priced at $2,150,000, this business is primed and ready for a new owner who is looking to expand into the design space. The owner has offered 10% Seller Financing to show his vested interest in the continued success of the business moving forward in addition to a transition period of 6 months to 1 year.

     

     

    PRICE $2,150,000 CASH FLOW $566,116

  • Trademarked Online Retail Business with Wholesale Partnerships

    This unique novelty retail business has over 1,500 established wholesale client partnerships! They carry a niche bathroom product focusing on molecularly battling unsavory smells leaving behind only the pleasant and masculine smell of a customer’s choosing. Finally, a trademarked brand focused on offering the guys an option they can be comfortable with. Obviously, the market was craving such an option as they have quickly wracked up business partners offering their product on shelves. There are currently three owners. All of these owners have full-time careers and consider this their “hobby” business. A new owner could easily run this business in less than 10 hours per week as they outsource production and only handle fulfillment. This business finds new clients and customers primarily via tradeshows and their website, where individual consumers can place an order. This business would offer a current male consumer focused enterprise an opportunity to expand products with a well-known brand and range of smells. It would also offer an individual owner the opportunity to run a part-time business with huge growth opportunities and the chance to unironically call your job crappy.

     

    While this business has excellent “mom and pop shop” representation across the United States, there are still multiple growth opportunities for new ownership. One would be focusing on stepping into the big box store realm, specifically focusing on gift shops and home good stores. Another could include expanding on current trade show schedules or building on existing partnerships to increase the wholesale side of business.

     

    This relocatable business, outsources all of its product manufacturing. This means that new ownership could be located anywhere and continue this business’s reputation for unique and manly products saving guys from choking on noxious bathroom gases and overbearingly floral facilities one fart joke at a time.

    PRICE $98,000

  • Commercial Plumbing Outside of Detroit with Tenured Staff

     

     

    The company comes with a well-established team of 11 including 7 field technicians, 2 estimators, 1 bookkeeper, and 1 admin. This business has a client base made up of 80% repeat customers in a variety of industries including the industrial sector, the healthcare field, and municipal clients. Services that are offered include plumbing (which makes up 75% of service base) and pipefitting (25% of service base). The master plumbing license is not held by current ownership but instead is held by one of the team members. Based in Detroit, Michigan, this well-established business is centrally located between Ann Arbor, Flint, Detroit, and Toledo. This is because the current owner is looking for a strategic buyer to grow the business further and is planning to stay on with the business for 2-3 years to assist in this anticipated growth and ensure a smooth transition. The team works out of 5,000 sq. ft. building with 3,500 sq. ft. dedicated to the shop, with the remaining space dedicated to the office for a low $2,250 per month. This plumbing and piping business is primed for new ownership, with the projected $1,000,000 in backlog and $600,000 of new projects in their pipeline to be bid on. The current owner is active in the business overseeing estimates and visiting job sites once a week. This includes vehicles, equipment, tools, trailer, and a working capital of $247,709 which, altogether, add up to be valued at $588,297.

    Priced at $925,000, the purchase of this company includes all the assets that new ownership will need to continue and grow the current business operation. There is plenty of room to expand operations both in the amount of space currently leased and in the opportunities that a buyer could easily take advantage of to see an ongoing development. With their exponentially high rate of return clients, an added marketing or advertising campaign could be expected to result in ongoing dividends of returning clients for years to come. A 10% down payment of $92,500 returns $87,674 in the first year after debt payments!

    PRICE $925,000 CASH FLOW $225,064

  • Residential Playground Equipment: Sales and Installation

     

     

    Focused on Sports Courts and Playgrounds (both residential and commercial) and trampoline systems. This is an allencompassing project management company that begins with customer consultation, design & layout, logistics & delivery; then implementation followed by annual maintenance and equipment additions. Proven over the test of time, this business will turn 30 this year and there is no stop in sight as they are projecting higher sales than last years $3.2 million (which was the highest year)! There are 10 on staff, with 3 sales associates, 1 receptionist and greeter, and 6 installers (2 full time, 2 seasonal, and 2 subs). There is plenty of room to display all the recreation this company can bring to a backyard in their 20,000 sq. ft. facility; which includes offices, warehouse space and a showroom. The assets included in the purchase of this business are valued at $572,916 and this includes hoops, trampolines, playground equipment, vehicles and more.

    Priced at $2,425,000, the current owner has offered a transition/ training period of up to one year to ensure a smooth transition. With growth opportunities including partnering with small schools, public parks, and growing the commercial side of business and by adding other product lines such as ninja warrior courses, gazebos, picnic tables, and firepits. With a 10% down payment of $242,500, a buyer can expect a return of $177,336 in the first year after debt payments.

     

    PRICE $2,425,000 CASH FLOW $494,502

  • South-East Michigan Piping Company

    This South-East Michigan Piping Company presents a huge opportunity for a strategic owner. With an excellent reputation and $1M in backlog for 2022, as well as huge growth opportunities in marketing and hiring, this business is extremely rewarding for the ambitious owner. The seller is looking to stay on for 2-3 years to help set the business up for great success in the face of growing competition.

     

    The company boasts a team known for quality, punctual work delivered with a personal touch. With 25% of their work in pipe-fitting and 75% in plumbing, including both reworking existing pluming and installing new, this company has earned their high reputation and enjoys a strong base of repeat clientele due to the quality and timeliness of their work.

     

    Situated in a growing industry in a strong location, clear growth opportunities present the strategic owner a route to great rewards in the face of growing competition. The current owner only does cold calls when they have time, and a marketing campaign can elevate this business to an even larger client base, which will then be subject to a high repeat client percentage. A well planned hiring campaign to bring in more laborers offers another path to growth.

     

    The team works out of  5,000 sq. ft. building with 3,500 sq. ft. dedicated to the shop, and 1,500 sq. ft. to the office. There is plenty of room to expand operations and bring in more laborers. Servicing clients throughout the South-East Michigan area, this business returns $150,124 in the first year after debt payments, with a 10% down payment of $130,000.

    PRICE $1,300,000 CASH FLOW $347,503

  • Pet Nutrition Manufacturer, Competent Staff and High Reputation

    This business manufacturers custom pet supplements for clients who then private label the product and sell it under their name on ecommerce sites such as Amazon. The clients do not own the formulations, they only private label. This business is stable, with the current owner willing to carry 20% of the financing as a show of faith, and also is willing to consult long-term with the new owner. The extremely capable team gives a new owner the flexibility to move to absentee ownership, or alternatively to focus on growth.

     

    The business sells custom-order to 20+ clients, who then sell the product through ecommerce sites. Product categories include pet treat supplements, dog probiotics and dental sticks, and powder supplements. The close-knit six-person staff is extremely competent, with the number one employee capable of managing all day-to-day operations. The owner currently mostly offers high-level direction and works 20 hours a week. A new owner has the freedom to become more or less involved than this as they please.

     

    If the new owner chooses to invest into growth, several promising routes are available. Currently this business does absolutely no sales, so bringing on a salesperson is one option. Launching the company’s own brand is another exciting avenue, as well as expanding into other product and animal categories.

     

    This business comes with $950,000 of tangible assets including pet nutrition product mixers and a new dog dental product machine.

     

    Priced at $2,935,000, a 15% down payment of $440,250 returns $407,034 in the first year after debt payments! 

    PRICE $2,935,000 CASH FLOW $839,202

  • Import and Distribution of Lifestyle Clothing and Apparel

     

    This private label clothing design and distribution company designs lifestyle apparel and imports and manufactures the apparel under private labels. With over 20 years of experience in the industry and three individual brands under their parent umbrella, this company has seen significant growth with an annualized revenue of over $10 million in 2022. The current owner works remotely, and his responsibilities include general oversight of the company and approving product designs, neither of which require much time in person. This business works with three international factories in China, India, and Pakistan and serves a wide variety of retail clients in the United States, Canada, and Europe. Specializing in creating lifestyle men’s wear including t-shirts, shorts, hoodies, long sleeves, and button-ups, this could be an excellent investment and consolidation opportunity for current clothing distributors struggling to break into men’s wear. Their skilled team includes 7 industry leading employees specializing in different necessary areas including design, marketing, sales, merchandising, and logistics. This business has nearly $800,000 of business equity included in the asking price based on the fair market value and the current owner has agreed to stay with the company for 1 to 2 years in order to ensure a smooth transition. On top of this, not only are the current owners offering to finance 10% of the purchase, but with the asking down payment of 15%, new owners can anticipate a 138% return on investment in the first year! The purchase of this business also includes nearly $500,000 in business equity based on the fair market value. There are also ample growth opportunities for new ownership to move into the women’s and children’s clothing fields utilizing their existing client relationships and thriving reputation for high quality and uniquely styled clothing.

    While this company’s sales are primarily to private label business, they also have a well-established online shop where consumers can buy products. This online shop ships products to 8 different countries, including Germany and France. They also collaborate with up-and-coming musical artists to offer exposure for not only the artist but also for their brand. There is currently 20+ ambassadors who proudly display their clothing at concerts, musical festivals, and other public events. As far as industry uniqueness goes, they focus on keeping products “complex but simple” and stay ahead of the market.

    With a price of $3,000,000, this business not only offers exponential financial assets included in the asking price, it also shows great promise moving forward as it continues to preserve essential clients and is looking for new ownership.

    PRICE $3,000,000 CASH FLOW $990,629

  • Production Lab for Dental Implants

     

    The current owner of this dental implant production lab is willing to stay on with the business for 2 years after the sale, and their salary has been accounted for in the listed cash flow! This business is a stable investment into the dental industry and can be viewed as an essential economic need which is clearly shown in their continually growing revenue, even during the pandemic. This Omaha based business has been in service over 20 years and has a diverse list of services offered including designing and producing custom dental fixtures such as Implant Restorations, 3D Printing & Milling, Crowns, Custom Shades, Diagnostic Wax-Ups, Dentures, Metal Frame, Flexible Partials, Retainers, Veneers and many more. This full-service dental lab not only has all of the services that any doctor, dentist, or oral surgeon could nee, but also offers an experienced and efficient team including 6 technicians and 1 driver who collectively have a tenure of 3 or more years with the business! This is a business that clients depend on and integrate into their practices. The dental studio helps doctors and dentists increase patient retention and referrals by reducing chair time and increasing satisfaction. This implements success for not only the client, but for the company as well.

     

    Due to the first-rate custom products this studio provides, most of their clients are recurring and long-lasting! There is an Instagram page, but no true marketing has ever been done. The studio owner prefers to keep business local, but in the past has had clients in states across the U.S. and has the resources and space in their 1,600 sq. ft. lab to bring this practice back now. These resources include over $250k in assets such as 3D printers, compressors, scanners, a delivery vehicle and more.

     

    At a purchase price of $945,000, a buyer can expect a $197,487 return in the first year after debt payments! This laboratory has plenty of growth opportunities, including offering services to doctors and dentists nationally and an increase in general marketing and advertisements. A great reputation and a highly experienced team have resulted in this business being perfect for transitioning a new owner to continue the reputable dental laboratory.

    PRICE $945,000 CASH FLOW $360,154

  • Glazing Contractor with 35k sq. ft. Factory & $7.5M in Backlog

    There is amazing growth potential for a new owner of this OKC Glazing Contractor; expanding services into Texas, Arkansas, Kansas, and Missouri would give a huge revenue boost! With nearly $6M in sales in 2020 and $7.5M already in their backlog, this company has been established in Oklahoma City for over 70 years. Working out of a 35,000 sq. ft. factory, the business has top-notch CNC capabilities that are unmatched in the area. Services include design, fabrication, manufacturing, and installation of aluminum curtainwall, storefront, heavy glass doors, glass handrails, and swinging & sliding aluminum doors. There are 45 full-time employees, including the owner, who handles general oversight, 3 Project Managers, 2 Estimators, 1 CAD Drafter, 1 Superintendent, 5 Foremen, 2 in Accounting, 10 in the factory, and a highly skilled team in the field handling installations. Their main focus is on mid to high-rise towers; sale size ranges from $250k-$3M, with $500k-$700k billed out each month. Most work (90%) is bid by invitation from the GC, with work secured 6-12 months into future. Along with $7.5M worth of signed contracts, the company has $3.5M in their pipeline.

     

    Because it is such a specialized industry, the company uses the Union from time to time out of Texas and New Mexico. Their participation agreement with the union allows them to remain independent and hire from the union when needed for large projects. The company’s bonding capacity of $12M, along with their exceptional factory, equipment, and manpower, allows them to bid on monumental projects in the area.

     

    Priced at $2,020,000, the factory, equipment, client relationships, industry reputation, and highly experienced team is already in place for this business. A new owner could step in and take this company to the next level. A 12.5% down payment of $252,500 returns $281,137 in the first year after debt payments – a 111% return on investment!

    PRICE $2,020,000 CASH FLOW $539,461

  • $1.5M in Assets at Design, Engineering, and Manufacturing Company

     

    There are over $1.5M in assets at this design, engineering, and manufacturing company! They are well established in the Chicago area but have loyal customers nationwide.  With $1.5M in sales and a 36% profit margin, the company specializes in the design, engineering, and manufacturing of hot runner systems and components for mold making and thermoplastic processing plants. After designing and engineering the custom hot runner system to fit their customers’ plastic injection molding system, they manufacture the system on-site, assuring quality control and reduced cost to their clients. They also have the capability to retrofit existing molds; they can repair or re-configure a system, replace heaters, nozzles, and other components, and they can troubleshoot leaks, heating issues, and flow problems. All of these services contribute to their long-standing client relationships and solid reputation in the market for over 35 years. Their diverse client base consists of mold makers and processing plants for consumer goods in categories such as medical, automotive, cosmetics, caps & closures, consumer electronics, and pet products. Their customers design the product, manufacture it through 3D printing, and gives them the specs; this team then designs the custom hot runner system needed to fit their needs and requirements.

     

    The highly skilled and experienced team includes the Owner (President/Treasurer), as well as a Design Engineer/Project Manager, 3 Machine Operators, 1 in Assembly, 1 Office Manager, and 1 Financial Officer. The owner currently handles general oversight of the business and team as well as some of the engineering; the Design Engineer/Project Manager handles all design engineering for the hot runner systems and manages each project from beginning to end.

     

    Priced at $2,050,000, this company certainly has the potential to go global!  An existing hot runner system company could take this business to the next level by using the 25 patented products, the team’s experience, and the customers already in place and expanding. A mold maker could also expand their business by purchasing this company, which would complement their services and products.


    PRICE $2,050,000 CASH FLOW $547,161

  • Trailer Manufacturing, Painting, & Maintenance

     

    The bank loan would be 100% collateralized from the included business assets with the purchase of this trailer manufacturing, painting & maintenance company. Operating out of an 18k sq. ft. facility in Southern Saskatchewan, the highly skilled team does custom trailer engineering and fabrication,  along with trailer maintenance, refurbishing, and supplying fabricated replacement parts. The average sale size is $52,500 per trailer; trailers include gravel, belly dump, clam shell, flat decks, and more, each with a variety of dimensions that can be customized. Refurbishing work consists of sandblasting, painting, and general welding repairs, and the company also supplies fabricated replacement parts such as stoppers, fifth wheel replacements, air cylinders, and tarps. Included in purchase price is over $313,354 worth of assets, including equipment such as band saws, jigs, a forklift, hoists, a payloader, welders, a shearer, an iron worker, a hydraulic press, trailer rotisserie stands, bench grinders, a paint system, and a Caterpillar 950 Payloader.

     

    Sales are conducted by two dealers in Canada and the owner, with most sales being done over the phone and no travel. Personnel includes four experienced employees: 1 owner, 2 full-time welders/fabricators, and 1 full-time office/shop assistant. The current owner oversees operations, conducts some sales, and assists in the shop when needed.

     

    The ability to customize dimensions for various trailer styles sets this business apart from competitors. Priced at $435,000, opportunities for growth include expanding the current website and social media presence to attract a wider range of customers. There is also an opportunity to take advantage of a more streamlined process through the Alberta government; instead of doing a bid system, the business could get on a short list to be approved to provide services/products on request.

    PRICE $435,000 CASH FLOW $124,517

  • HVAC, Sheet Metal Fabrication & Plumbing – Commercial Only

     

    60% collateralized and favorable financing terms! This HVAC and Plumbing company has been serving the Markham, Ontario area for over 15 years! They offer HVAC (50%), plumbing (45%), and refrigeration (5%) services to commercial and industrial customers within a 100-km radius of Markham. Their highly experienced hands-on team is comprised of 6 sheet metal fabricators, 4 plumbers, 5 on the refrigeration/gas crew, 1 administrative assistant, and 1 subcontracted PT bookkeeper.  Assets include 9 vehicles, each equipped with various tools and equipment for the task at hand, and the business has a substantial supply of machinery and equipment, including 7 vacuum pumps, 2 coring machines, 8 torches, various drills & die heads, 3 chop saws, 3 air compressors, a generator, and a backflow prevention kit.

     

    With this business having a services and construction side, they offer an extensive variety of services and projects! This business prides itself on being knowledgeable and well-trained to provide the highest level of technical service on systems such as air conditioning, refrigeration systems, process heating, ventilation systems, water chillers, boilers, and indoor air quality monitoring.

     

    With a solid reputation in place, this business gains clients through an ample number of word-of-mouth referrals. Increasing advertising efforts and creating a social media presence would lead to revenue growth. Hiring staff for management positions (Operations Manager, Service Manager, Chief Estimator, Project Manager) would undoubtedly take the company to the next level.

    PRICE $2,600,000 CASH FLOW $701,779

Contracting/Building/Improvements (16)

  • General Contracting, Electrical & Mechanical Services in Growing Area

    This multi-trade service business has an 80% recurring client base and a 33% 3-Year average profit margin!  With an incredibly versatile team of employees in place, 90% of their work is self-performed. They offer complete mechanical, electrical, and automation design, installation, and maintenance, as well as steel erection, concrete foundations, design build, and heavy equipment installation. The team of employees is incredibly versatile, with the ability to transition from trade to trade very easily. They have 25+ recurring clients with most of them having an MSA in place. In other cases, even though there is no contract in place, this company is their contractor of choice.  The company started performing more mechanical services a few years ago, resulting in higher net income and profit margins. As they continue to do more on the mechanical side in the coming years, a new owner can expect to see profit margins and net income continue to increase, as profit margins from mechanical work is 35%, compared to 15% from general contracting services. There is tremendous room for expansion into the mechanical side, which currently accounts for only 9% of the business, but has a higher profit margin than the other services they provide. 

    Located near Charleston, South Carolina, the company operates from a two-acre property including four buildings. The seller owns the real estate and would rent it to the next owner for $3,500/month. The highly skilled and experienced team includes the Owner/President (who is willing to stay on as President or GM if desired by Buyer), 2 Project Managers, 3 Superintendents (2 of which are Assistant Project Managers), 1 Bookkeeper, and 1 Office Manager/Safety Coordinator.

    Work is steady throughout the year and most projects are completed within a 100-mile radius of the office; temperatures in the area are generally in the 40’s-80’s, so they rarely have to hold jobs due to weather delays. There are no licenses limiting geographical expansion.

    PRICE $6,200,000 CASH FLOW $1,472,747

  • Commercial Roofing – 100% Recurring Clients – No Storm Chasing

     

    This commercial roofing business has nearly 100% repeat customer base – there is no storm chasing. In 2024, there is already $12M in backlog and $6.5M in work in progress. Most of their projects are completed in less than one year, services are varied including, covering membrane roofing, metal roofing, sheet metal, slate & tile steep slope roofing, waterproofing, plaza pavers, and solar installation and repairs. Their well-developed team of 51 is made up of 1 Controller, 1 HR Manager, 1 Superintendent, 2 Project Managers, 3 Estimators, 1 Accounting Assistant, and 42 Laborers. The owner coordinates with the Controller & Superintendent, along with overseeing banking. He is confident that the Controller & Superintendent are qualified and capable of operating the company. With the purchase of this company, a buyer would receive $3.3M in assets, which includes $630K in equipment (forklifts, air compressors, generators, safety equipment, boom lifts, anything needed for their jobs), 16 vehicles, computers, FF&E, office software, and working capital. The business operates out of a 16,000 sq. ft. facility with 4,000 sq. ft. of office space.

    Priced at $7,200,000, this company is poised for a seamless transition. The owner is willing to carry up to 10% of the price and has offered to stay on board for 1-2 years, showing a vested interest in the ongoing success of the company. Currently there is no marketing or outside sales taking place, and there is a lot of untapped potential on the solar side of the business, which will greatly improve revenues and profit margins.

     

     

    PRICE $7,200,000 CASH FLOW $1,795,945

  • Plumbing with repeat GC Client Base: Over 90 Licensed Staff

     

    A very unique plumbing company that specifically works with general contractors and land developers who are neighborhood production builders. There is work in progress of over $64 million dollars, plus a strong backlog. This non-union plumbing company has 98 employees on staff, including 8 in leadership and administration roles, with the other 90 as plumbers and field technicians. The client is never the end user or a home owner, it is 100% B2B. Also, this business does not provide any service or maintenance work, though that could be a great growth opportunity. The business services a 60-mile radius around Sacramento, California with 6 top annually repeating clients. Included in the purchase is working capital of $1M, along with $1.6M in equipment, vehicles, and improvements. The owner is selling due to age and retirement, though they owner is passive already, providing only light oversight as needed and providing payroll. Their position would not need to have any replacement. Priced at $15,500,000, a 10% down payment of $1,550,000 will return $1,400,103 in the first year after debt payments. This shows a huge return on investment! The owner is also willing to hold 15% of the price as either a seller carry or equity roll, or a combination thereof, showing a vested interest in the ongoing success of the company after closing. There are several growth opportunities, including expanding into service & maintenance work, and targeting more apartment complexes for commercial projects. This presents an opportunity for potential buyers who are interested in acquiring an established plumbing business with an incredible team on board and that shows significant growth potential.

     

     

    PRICE $15,500,000 CASH FLOW $5,467,484

  • Logistics and Sourcing for Bulk Material

     

    This business sources materials for infrastructure developments, utilities, roads, and bridges. They source materials from over 20+ national manufacturers and vendors. They offer their services for municipal job sites where Prime Contractors are performing utility and bridge installations, including ductile/concrete pipe, precast storm drainage & utility structures, cast iron manholes, and inlet frames/covers. With the thought of a “recession” looming, this company will be growing, as the newly passed Infrastructure Bill will directly impact this company’s revenue and shield them from economic downfall. The team includes 1 VP, 1 Controller, 1 Estimator, and 1 Administrative Specialists. The current owner oversees the team, meeting with key employees when needed, and provides business development strategies. As a show of good faith and vested interest in the ongoing success of the company, the current owner is willing to hold a promissory note for up to 10% of the total price. He is also happy to stay on board for 1 year post close to ensure a smooth transition. New ownership can expect to step into a stable investment with three locations, including a primary location in Delaware and satellite locations in Georgia and Florida. After building this business and operating in this industry for 20 years, the current owner is ready for a change of pace and is interested in exploring the next chapter of his life. Priced at $2,650,000 this business has an established business operation and enough stability for a new owner to step in and continue operating the business as is. This opportunity also affords new owners enough flexibility to change things up and try out some new growth routes.

    PRICE $2,650,000 CASH FLOW $731,745

  • Floor to Ceiling Interior Design and Renovation

     

     

    This interior design company was established in 1990 and has served clients within a 100-mile radius of North Platte ever since. With over three decades of experience, they have built a strong reputation for providing full-service interior design solutions from floor to ceiling. They have a team of skilled professionals who can transform any room into a beautiful and functional space. The dedicated team includes: two carpenters, one designer, one marketing professional, and one bookkeeper. The owner is full time, overseeing the operations, providing estimates, and meeting with clients. Whether it's a small powder room, a luxurious master bedroom, or a functional kitchen used to entertain, they can handle all aspects of the remodeling process. Their services primarily cater to residential clients, but they also undertake the occasional commercial project upon request. The business operates out of a spacious 2,400 square foot showroom located in North Platte. The showroom provides clients with an opportunity to explore various design options and visualize their projects before making any decisions. The lease for the showroom is only $1,887 per month, allowing them to showcase their work in a professional and inviting environment. The reason for selling is the owner's retirement planning. After many years of successfully running the business, the seller has decided to retire and is looking for a suitable buyer to take over the operations. The owner is willing to finance 10% of the purchase price and provide a training period of up to one year to ensure a smooth transition of ownership.

    Priced at $1,690,000, a 10% down payment of $169,000 will return $252,648 in the first year after debt payments! A 149% return on investment! Their full-service approach covers all aspects of interior design, including bathroom remodeling, cabinet installation, and home design.

     

    PRICE $1,690,000 CASH FLOW $495,975

  • Fabrication of Precision Machine Parts: 100% B2B

     

    The company was founded in 1992 and is located in Omaha, Nebraska, with a service area throughout the Midwest. This business fabricates precision parts for large machines used by large manufacturers. The client base is 100% B2B, made up of distribution centers, manufacturing facilities, and fabrication shops. The company works with various materials such as steel, plastic, and other metals to create these custom parts, each order is tailored to meet the specific requirements of the client, ensuring that the parts produced are a perfect fit for their intended application. There are four full-time machine technicians who are responsible for the production of custom precision parts. The facility is a spacious 3,440 square foot building that includes two bays for manufacturing operations and an office space for administrative tasks. The owners are responsible for administrative duties and have offered to stay on 1 year for a smooth transition before they enter retirement! They do not perform any labor. The purchase of this business comes with over $400,000 in assets, along with $119,497 in account receivable and a work in progress valued at $219,601.

    Priced at $1,350,000, a 10% down payment of $135,000 returns $171,960 in the first year after debt payments! That is a 127% return on investment! As part of the growth opportunities for the business, implementing a marketing strategy would help increase brand awareness and attract new clients. Additionally, hiring an additional machine technician would allow for increased production capacity and faster turnaround times. This business does not carry any special designations such as MBE, WBE, 8a etc..

     

    PRICE $1,350,000 CASH FLOW $366,333

  • Manufacturer of Racking Systems for IT and Servers

     

     

    This manufacturer designs and fabricates racking and cabinetry systems across Canada and the United States. Established in Toronto for over 50 years, this fabrication business has experienced significant growth and success in the industry. With over $1,000,000 in upcoming work, the company continues to expand its market presence and customer base. Their client base consists of IT companies, cabling contractors, distributors, data centers, and financial institutions – 70% is direct to the end user and 30 % is to distributors. They work with 40 to 50 clients annually. The company operates from a spacious 24,000 square foot facility that houses a design center, and production area. The company has 24 full-time staff members, including 16 skilled craftsmen in the shop and 6 administrative personnel in the office, and 2 in leadership. They do not do any installation or wiring of products. The owner is not involved in the business, providing minimal oversight as he has a team of experienced managers and employees who run the day-to-day operations. The seller has offered to carry 15% of the purchase price in addition to a 6-month training period in order to provide a seamless transition. Equipment and Inventory included is valued at $939,429, plus AR for the buyer’s working capital is $145,000. In addition, they boast a work in progress of $650,000 with a backlog of $700,000! Priced at $2,450,000, this business is primed and ready for a new owner to step in and enjoy a reputation that has been built over the past 50 years. A 20% down payment of $490,000 will return $128,602 in the first year after debt payments!

     

     

    PRICE $2,450,000 CASH FLOW $490,783

  • Fabrication of Doors, Cabinets, and Lockers – No Installation

     

    A fabrication business that specializes in the manufacturing of cabinet, louvre and locker doors for over 40 years. They primarily operate as a business-to-business (B2B) company, with approximately 98% of their sales being made to other businesses with a niche in health clubs and golf courses. They produce raw products, but do not engage in the design process. Instead, the B2B clients submit the design, which is then brought to life through their manufacturing capabilities. This company does not install the doors, nor do they work with the end user. The established team in place consists of a a Bookkeeper and 8 Fabrication Technicians. Additionally, the seller has agreed to a 1-year transition period in order to provide a smooth transition. The assets included in the purchase price have a replacement value of $1,880,240 and the current backlog is at $203,428. This business is located in the growing community of Montrose Colorado, which is roughly 45 minutes away from Grand Junction. The spacious facility is 14,298 square foot with ample room for expansion.

    Priced at $890,000, this business has established itself as a reputable player in the door manufacturing industry. The current owner is selling this business in order to plan for retirement and has offered to carry 10% of the purchase price in order to show vested interest in the continued success of the business. A 10% down payment of $89,000 returns $246,001 in the first year after debt payments! They do not engage in metalwork or plastics. Additionally, they do not provide any hardware or finishing services. Their manufacturing process solely involves working with raw materials and does not require the use of chemicals or spray finishes.

     

    PRICE $890,000 CASH FLOW $300,218

  • Property Maintenance with Light Reno & Upgrades: All B2B

     

    This property maintenance and repair business currently has over $2 million of signed contracts on their work in progress list! Their services include maintenance, renovation & light remodeling, repairs, and rehab work. 60% of their services are utilized by the military, parks department, and United States Fishing & Wildlife Services, while the other 40% of their client base is primarily made up of commercial real estate holding portfolio and multi-unit real estate owners. Located in Houston, TX since 2004, they have a well-established team, including 1 Admin Assistant, 1 Office Manager, 1 Network/IT, 1 Operations Manager, 2 Estimators, 1 Superintendent, 1 Residential Supervisor, 1 Federal Contracting Assistant, and 1 Bookkeeper. They also have 6 field crews with 1-2 men per truck. Their location includes a 4,200 sq. ft. office building (3 offices, 15 workstations, conference rooms, etc.), a 2,500 s. ft. warehouse, and a 1/2-acre equipment yard. The owner currently works part-time, primarily handling oversight of operations & reviewing of financials. To ensure a smooth transition of ownership, establish his stake in the ongoing success of the business, and as a show of good faith, the current owner has not only offered a one-year transition and/or training period, but has offered a seller carry rate of 10%.

    Priced at $1,450,000, this business is primed for new ownership to step in and continue the business’s upward growth pattern, as well as see new growth by expanding marketing tactics and growing the business to consumer residential work. With the purchase, you would be getting $175K in assets as well, including crew vans/trucks, trailers, pressure washers, manlift, and everything else needed to continue to operate successfully.

    PRICE $1,450,000 CASH FLOW $384,527

  • Manufacturing and Fabrication of Millwork – 100% B2B with $6M in Backlog

     

     

    Operating out of a 14,000 sq, ft. fabricating facility in Salt Lake City, which they recently moved to keep up with the year-over-year growth, in fact, they are experiencing a higher-than-normal backlog of over $6M! Over the last 3 decades, this fabrication & millwork operation has served a repeat base of commercial clients; ranging across schools/universities, hospitals, churches, detention centers and office buildings. Known for high quality, specialized manufacturing of cabinetry and related goods, there is a tenured team of 26, including 5 in Administration, 11 in the Shop, and 6 in the Field. They have an expert leadership team running the day-to-day operations, made up of a General Manager, Shop Foreman, Production Manager, and a Project Manager. The owner is removed from the daily roles, he is more of the “Big Vision” and general oversight of his key people. After 30 years, he is retiring, but is committed to a 2–3-year transition to ensure ongoing success of the business. He is also willing to finance 10- 15% of the purchase price. There is over $3 million in assets with the purchase, which includes CNC routers, horizontal boring machine, gliding saw, table & chip saw, timesaver sander, software, 1 pick-up, 2 trailers, 2 vans, 2 box trucks and all of the additional equipment and tools needed to operate the business. They have a focused service area in the Southwest US. There are no affiliations or special certifications associated with this business, meaning they are not MBE, WBE, veteran owned, union, etc.

    Priced at $3,825,000, this business comes with a proven history, a tenured staff, and reliable client base, allowing for a buyer to step in and continue operating and growing successfully from day one. A 12.5% down payment of $478,125 returns $518,603 in the first year after debt payments!

     

    PRICE $3,825,000 CASH FLOW $1,061,649

  • Enviro Services of Drilling Waste: 100% Absentee Owner

     

     

    This company currently has 250 clients, of which 50+ of those are recurring with the typical client being a municipality or utility company. This company handles all aspects of the industrial clean up services and disposal & hauling of drilling waste for oil field productions. Their equipment & vehicles have a value of over $2.6MM and consists of combo vacs, tank trucks, straight vacs, water trucks, mobile steamers, and maintenance units. This variety of equipment also gives them the ability to perform a mixture of maintenance, water delivery, vegetation control, water truck services, & mobile steaming. The Leadership Team is in place & consists of twenty-three employees. There are 5 in Administration (Vice President of Operation, General Manager of Fleet & Dispatch, Billing Manager, Safety Officer, and Dispatch); 13 Operators, and 5 in the Shop. The uniquely qualified team allows the owner to be able to live remote, more than 2 hours away, and only does light oversight of the business. Financing should be a breeze as this company is boasting a 20% Profit Margin and is 100% collateralized, plus there is roughly $375K of working capital that is included in the purchase price as well.

    At the purchase price of $4,950,000 CAD, with a 20% investment from the Buyer, the Seller will show a vested interest in the business’s success by holding a note for 10% and rolling equity of 10% allowing the bank to be at a 60% loan, making the business over 100% collateralized. The business has a focus in Alberta with clients across Canada. The company’s leased space consists of an 11-acre industrial fully fenced yard site, a 750 sq. ft. office with 4 maintenance bays, and a 5-bedroom crew house.

     

    PRICE $4,950,000 CASH FLOW $979,115

  • Multiple Locations Architecture Practice with 25% Seller Carry

     

    Based in New York City, this business has been able to accumulate an excellent reputation spurred on by happy clients which has led to 90% repeat clientele. A strategic new owner with experience in architecture and engineering would have 3 years of seller transitioning of the business and a foot into the New York market. The firm has nearly 15 years of experience under their belt, and their leadership team has been well mentored. The team consists of 25 employees including Leadership and several architects. This owner is open to a 30% carry showing good faith in the ongoing success and the seller’s vested interest in the success of the business after sale. This architecture firm has a focus on higher education and K-12, with 4.1M in backlog, they are poised for an acquisition. Priced at $4,400,000 this business is primed to return year over year success to anyone in a related industry. Someone that knows how to operate in this field would be able to not only enjoy the expected organic growth pattern brought forward by the world’s focus on education and building new opportunities, but put forth new growth opportunities without having to utilize exponential resources on accumulating additional assets. Included in the purchase of this business is $1,152,000 in assets, this includes AR and the necessary equipment needed to maintain day-to-day operations.

     

    PRICE $4,400,000 CASH FLOW $954,000

  • Fabricated Synthetic Stone for Outdoor Walls – No Installation

    This business handles the fabrication of synthetic, precast stone for masonries and 75% of their work is done for municipal contracts. This operation only handles the manufacturing and fabrication of the cast stone, the do not handle any installation of the products in exterior walls. The services offered include creating a mold and color matching stones for historical buildings that need stones which are no longer available or for eye-catching statement pieces in new locations. Clients that take advantage of these fully customizable stones primarily include museums, commercial locations, and high-end multifamily housing units. Due to this extremely stable client base, there will not be any impact on this business should there be a recession. In fact, due to the newly passed US Infrastructure Bill, this business can expect organic growth opportunities in the upcoming year. To add to the stability of this business, they currently have a 90% repeat client base made up of B2B work with the masons being the direct client, not the end user.

    This Chicago based establishment offers a niche service and, because of this, their nearest competition is 30 miles away. This organization has nearly 20 employees with experts in management including a production manager, plant manager, supply manager; along with 1 drafter, 1 sales rep, 2 mold shop and 12 plant production workers. This team allows the current owner to only work 20-25 hours handling bookkeeping and some deliveries out of personal preference.

    Priced at $2,550,000 this business is ready for a new owner to step in and continue operating on the foundation laid before them. The seller has offered a training period of 1-2 years to ensure a smooth transition of ownership as well as to finance 20% of the purchase price as a show of good faith. With an excellent staff, reputation that’s been established since 2010, and large warehouse with a significant amount of unused space, this niche business is primed to offer a new and excited owner exponential growth opportunity with minimal additional investments needed.

    PRICE $2,550,000 CASH FLOW $511,011

  • Commercial Plumbing Outside of Detroit with Tenured Staff

     

     

    The company comes with a well-established team of 11 including 7 field technicians, 2 estimators, 1 bookkeeper, and 1 admin. This business has a client base made up of 80% repeat customers in a variety of industries including the industrial sector, the healthcare field, and municipal clients. Services that are offered include plumbing (which makes up 75% of service base) and pipefitting (25% of service base). The master plumbing license is not held by current ownership but instead is held by one of the team members. Based in Detroit, Michigan, this well-established business is centrally located between Ann Arbor, Flint, Detroit, and Toledo. This is because the current owner is looking for a strategic buyer to grow the business further and is planning to stay on with the business for 2-3 years to assist in this anticipated growth and ensure a smooth transition. The team works out of 5,000 sq. ft. building with 3,500 sq. ft. dedicated to the shop, with the remaining space dedicated to the office for a low $2,250 per month. This plumbing and piping business is primed for new ownership, with the projected $1,000,000 in backlog and $600,000 of new projects in their pipeline to be bid on. The current owner is active in the business overseeing estimates and visiting job sites once a week. This includes vehicles, equipment, tools, trailer, and a working capital of $247,709 which, altogether, add up to be valued at $588,297.

    Priced at $925,000, the purchase of this company includes all the assets that new ownership will need to continue and grow the current business operation. There is plenty of room to expand operations both in the amount of space currently leased and in the opportunities that a buyer could easily take advantage of to see an ongoing development. With their exponentially high rate of return clients, an added marketing or advertising campaign could be expected to result in ongoing dividends of returning clients for years to come. A 10% down payment of $92,500 returns $87,674 in the first year after debt payments!

    PRICE $925,000 CASH FLOW $225,064

  • Mechanical Advisory Firm: Recurring Clients are 90% of Revenue

    With 90% of revenue coming from recurring clients, this mechanical advisory company subcontracts almost all their labor. They have been serving major commercial clients since 1992 in HVAC, mechanical, and plumbing and 80% of their business is from new construction with the remaining 20% coming from maintenance & repairs work. Deemed an essential business amid the pandemic, this company’s largest customers are food processing facilities and Amazon distribution centers, with a strong foothold in the logistical and institutional sectors. Their highly experienced team with 5+ year tenures, has over 100 years of combined experience; it consists of the owner, who acts as General Manager, plus 1 Project Manager, 1 Estimator, 1 Office Manager/Bookkeeper, and subcontractors as needed (3 of which are exclusive to this company).

    Using proprietary software that tracks the breakdown of all of their costs for each individual project has set them apart from the competition; it allows them to be exceptionally cost-conscious and pursue jobs that match their skill set, while being cost-effective. Clients know this company will always stay on budget. In addition, they have never lost money on a project due to their scientific approach to pricing.

    Established in 1992, they are a legacy company in the construction world; they receive invitations from the contracting and construction communities to bid a job and have a current win rate on bids of 50%!   This company does not market and advertising as 100% of their customers come from referrals from existing customers. With a current backlog of $6.5M, the team is committed to seeing a job through from beginning to end, from the bidding process to coordinating the resources and installation needed for the project. Services include plumbing, heating, ventilation, air conditioning, sprinklers, industrial gas fitting, steam fitting, process piping, and pneumatics.

    This would be a fantastic bolt-on opportunity for a control’s contractor, electrician, or civil contractor. Creating synergy between two companies would be an incredible opportunity to expand the market share and boost revenue.

     

    PRICE $11,750,000 CASH FLOW $2,416,800

  • Concrete Pumping for Schools & Hospitals – 90% Recurring Clients

    With over $10M in hard assets, this growing concrete business has 4 locations, 36 concrete pumps, a 90% recurring client base, and 57 employees in Southern California and Texas. The bulk of its contracts are municipal projects, such as K-12 Schools, Universities, Hospitals, and Government Agencies. With its specialized equipment and experienced teams, this business is able to take on projects that would be too large or too difficult for other contractors. The company’s customers are loyal, and since larger public projects and public works are rarely affected by economic changes, the business has been able to weather economic changes and continue to grow while other contractors have failed.

     

    The business boasts over $10M in hard assets and equipment, including 36 concrete pumps, making them one of the largest concrete companies in the nation. Moreover, the current owners have been efficient in their operations and have focused on sustainable and responsible growth. The owners approach this in two important ways: (1) They purchase all new equipment without incurring any long-term debt, and (2) The owners import their replacement parts from producers and wholesalers worldwide, which allows them to save 30-45% off what their competitors have to pay. Using these approaches, the company has over $2M in accounts receivable and ongoing work, and typically over 90% of AR is paid within 90 days. All this while remaining DEBT FREE!

     

    Well-trained managers and project leads are in place and the supporting administrative staff is knowledgeable and capable to handle day-to-day operations. A lot of new equipment was purchased in 2016 & 2017; generally, CapEx is less than $150,000/year.

     

    The owner is involved in daily operations as a manager and in an oversight capacity, and he is willing to stay on as president for 3-4 years. This is an excellent opportunity for any buyer, regardless of construction experience, as Seller will give you all the tools to succeed. Truly a turnkey business opportunity.

    With over $10M in hard assets, this growing concrete business has 4 locations, 36 concrete pumps, a 90% recurring client base, and 57 employees in Southern California and Texas. The bulk of its contracts are municipal projects, such as K-12 Schools, Universities, Hospitals, and Government Agencies. With its specialized equipment and experienced teams, this business is able to take on projects that would be too large or too difficult for other contractors. The company’s customers are loyal, and since larger public projects and public works are rarely affected by economic changes, the business has been able to weather economic changes and continue to grow while other contractors have failed.

     

    The business boasts over $10M in hard assets and equipment, including 36 concrete pumps, making them one of the largest concrete companies in the nation. Moreover, the current owners have been efficient in their operations and have focused on sustainable and responsible growth. The owners approach this in two important ways: (1) They purchase all new equipment without incurring any long-term debt, and (2) The owners import their replacement parts from producers and wholesalers worldwide, which allows them to save 30-45% off what their competitors have to pay. Using these approaches, the company has over $2M in accounts receivable and ongoing work, and typically over 90% of AR is paid within 90 days. All this while remaining DEBT FREE!

     

    Well-trained managers and project leads are in place and the supporting administrative staff is knowledgeable and capable to handle day-to-day operations. A lot of new equipment was purchased in 2016 & 2017; generally, CapEx is less than $150,000/year.

     

    The owner is involved in daily operations as a manager and in an oversight capacity, and he is willing to stay on as president for 3-4 years. This is an excellent opportunity for any buyer, regardless of construction experience, as Seller will give you all the tools to succeed. Truly a turnkey business opportunity.

     

    PRICE $17,250,000 CASH FLOW $2,367,719

  • Telecom Site Planning & Surveying with 3 Managers

     

    This company performs site planning and surveying for the telecom industry with clients such as Verizon, AT&T, Sprint, and Cox Communications. Services include Field Engineering, which includes field walk-out and survey, rightof-way permitting, make-ready engineering, and small cell site surveys, along with Design & Drafting, including new development project design & engineering, small cell design, CAD drafting, traffic control design, photo simulations, and 3D modeling. There are no licenses or certifications needed to own this business. They operate as the subcontractor, so the prime contractor holds any of the necessary licensing for all projects. They have built a tenured team of 21 employees, including 3 Project Managers, 1 Drafting Manager, 1 Quality Control, 2 Project Coordinators, 1 Wind Load Specialist, 1 Lead Field Tech, 2 Field Techs, 3 Traffic Control Designers, 2 Lead Designers, 4 AutoCAD Designers, and 1 Account Admin. This does not include the owner, who is active in the business, though he does feel that the current staff has been trained well enough to handle his responsibilities. That said, there is an adjustment in the cash flow to replace or retain the owner if desired. They operate out of a 3,500 sq. ft. office, providing plenty of space for their team. Priced at a $830,000, this opportunity is poised and ready for a new owner to step into this industry with a reputation that has been built over the last 15 years. A 10% down payment of $83,000 returns $125,915 in the first year after debt payments, which is a 151% return on investment!! Growth opportunities lie in directly targeting more clients within the telecom industry and implementing an effective marketing strategy, as they do not currently have a sales team or marketing plan in place.

     

    PRICE $830,000 CASH FLOW $245,419

  • Manufacturer of Racking Systems for IT and Servers

     

     

    This manufacturer designs and fabricates racking and cabinetry systems across Canada and the United States. Established in Toronto for over 50 years, this fabrication business has experienced significant growth and success in the industry. With over $1,000,000 in upcoming work, the company continues to expand its market presence and customer base. Their client base consists of IT companies, cabling contractors, distributors, data centers, and financial institutions – 70% is direct to the end user and 30 % is to distributors. They work with 40 to 50 clients annually. The company operates from a spacious 24,000 square foot facility that houses a design center, and production area. The company has 24 full-time staff members, including 16 skilled craftsmen in the shop and 6 administrative personnel in the office, and 2 in leadership. They do not do any installation or wiring of products. The owner is not involved in the business, providing minimal oversight as he has a team of experienced managers and employees who run the day-to-day operations. The seller has offered to carry 15% of the purchase price in addition to a 6-month training period in order to provide a seamless transition. Equipment and Inventory included is valued at $939,429, plus AR for the buyer’s working capital is $145,000. In addition, they boast a work in progress of $650,000 with a backlog of $700,000! Priced at $2,450,000, this business is primed and ready for a new owner to step in and enjoy a reputation that has been built over the past 50 years. A 20% down payment of $490,000 will return $128,602 in the first year after debt payments!

     

     

    PRICE $2,450,000 CASH FLOW $490,783

  • Staffing Firm Focused in IT Industries

     

    This staffing firm has 100% repeat clients which have multi-year contracts, focused in the spaces of Banking, Insurance, Agriculture, Government and Health Care. They place 20+ staff including software engineers, project managers, analysts, and scrum masters. For more than 2 decades they have served primarily Iowa and the surrounding states. This company is doing little to no business development, which would be a great opportunity for growth. There Is 1 recruiter, 1 VP of sales, and an office administrator. The reason for sale is health concerns of the absentee owner. Most importantly, the active owner has offered a 2–3-year transition where he will also finance and roll equity for a total combined amount of 25%.

    Priced at $1,350,000, a 10% down payment of $135,000 returns $209,772 in the first year after debt payments! Resulting in a 155% return on investment! This is a niche market in the Des Moines area which is home to Wells Fargo, Hy-Vee, Principal Financial and Amazon Distribution – which all need these on-site services

     

    PRICE $1,350,000 CASH FLOW $335,316

  • Wholesale of Niche Goods with 46,000 sq. ft. of Distribution Space

     

    Their distribution facility ships to over 800 B2B customers across the Continental US, made up of truck stops, grocery store chains, ecommerce companies, and more. There is a good mix of wholesale clients versus dropship orders where no inventory is held. The business has a highly diverse portfolio of more than 40 vendors, such as Riddell, WinCraft, and Fremont Die. There is a strong leadership team in place, including a President, Controller, Purchasing Manager, and Sales Director, plus a full warehouse & shipping team. The tenured President will stay in place as operator if the buyer desires. The owner resides out of state and has a very minimal role. The assets included are valued at $2,025,000, these assets are licensed sports team novelty items, a forklift, extensive warehouse shelving, pallet shrink wrapper, packaging equipment, pallet racking, and leasehold improvements. The company produced nearly $9M in revenue in 2022, putting $1.2M to the bottom line. Boasting over 300 types of products ranging across accessories, gifts, home goods, and gear, they have something for every fan. They do not sell shoes, clothes, or sports equipment. Their most popular product brands include products associated with the NFL, MLB, NBA, MLS, NGH, Nascar, US Army, Jack Daniels, and Harley Davidson.

    Priced at $5,700,000, this business includes 2 million in assets, a strong team, and solid reputation and history, putting a new owner in the perfect position to continue operating and growing successfully. Over 3 decades ago, this company started with the teenage owner who sold his first baseball card; now over 30 years later, this business thrives in the distribution of sports products & highly recognizable brands. The owner is willing to finance 10% and/or retain 5% equity, as a show of good faith in the ongoing success of the business. A 10% down payment of $570,000 returns $618,947 in the first year after debt payments!

     

     

    PRICE $5,700,000 CASH FLOW $1,300,112

  • Placement Firm Staffing Admin Roles: 100% Federal Clientele

     

     

    This business operation is very similar to a staffing agency, they provide staffing & labor for military branches and federal agencies such as the Navy, Air force, DOT, DOL, and DOD. Provides labor across all 50 states, they recruit and place personnel in diversified positions including receptionists, data entry, IT support, Training Leads, and Program Managers to name a few. Of the services provided, Administrative Support makes up 72% of their services, Program Management is 10%, Logistics makes up 15%, with IT only at 3%. Their highly trained staff is made up of 1 Controller, 1 In House Counsel serving as HR and Foreign Security Officer, 1 Business Development Representative, and 3 Admin, along with roughly 70 billable contract staff. The working capital of nearly $400,000 will be given to the buyer and, with the low equipment needed, capital expenditure is nil. While there are two owners, one is absent and would not need a replacement moving forward, and the other is willing to stay on board for 2-3 years post-close to ensure a smooth and successful transition and ongoing growth. As a show of good faith, the current owners are willing to carry 15% of the financing. This is to help prove their vested interest in the ongoing success of the company.

    Priced at $2,600,000, this business is perfectly positioned for a buyer to step in and continue the already consistent year over year growth trends. A down payment of $260,000 will return $325,197 in the first year after debt payments which is a 125% return on investment! Overall growth opportunities include expanding on the current potential for IT contracts, a great opportunity for a tech business to expand their services and expand their client base into the government sector.

     

     

    PRICE $2,600,000 CASH FLOW $719,956

  • Import and Distribution of Lifestyle Clothing and Apparel

     

    This private label clothing design and distribution company designs lifestyle apparel and imports and manufactures the apparel under private labels. With over 20 years of experience in the industry and three individual brands under their parent umbrella, this company has seen significant growth with an annualized revenue of over $10 million in 2022. The current owner works remotely, and his responsibilities include general oversight of the company and approving product designs, neither of which require much time in person. This business works with three international factories in China, India, and Pakistan and serves a wide variety of retail clients in the United States, Canada, and Europe. Specializing in creating lifestyle men’s wear including t-shirts, shorts, hoodies, long sleeves, and button-ups, this could be an excellent investment and consolidation opportunity for current clothing distributors struggling to break into men’s wear. Their skilled team includes 7 industry leading employees specializing in different necessary areas including design, marketing, sales, merchandising, and logistics. This business has nearly $800,000 of business equity included in the asking price based on the fair market value and the current owner has agreed to stay with the company for 1 to 2 years in order to ensure a smooth transition. On top of this, not only are the current owners offering to finance 10% of the purchase, but with the asking down payment of 15%, new owners can anticipate a 138% return on investment in the first year! The purchase of this business also includes nearly $500,000 in business equity based on the fair market value. There are also ample growth opportunities for new ownership to move into the women’s and children’s clothing fields utilizing their existing client relationships and thriving reputation for high quality and uniquely styled clothing.

    While this company’s sales are primarily to private label business, they also have a well-established online shop where consumers can buy products. This online shop ships products to 8 different countries, including Germany and France. They also collaborate with up-and-coming musical artists to offer exposure for not only the artist but also for their brand. There is currently 20+ ambassadors who proudly display their clothing at concerts, musical festivals, and other public events. As far as industry uniqueness goes, they focus on keeping products “complex but simple” and stay ahead of the market.

    With a price of $3,000,000, this business not only offers exponential financial assets included in the asking price, it also shows great promise moving forward as it continues to preserve essential clients and is looking for new ownership.

    PRICE $3,000,000 CASH FLOW $990,629

  • Web Based Marketing and Brand Development Service

    This primarily web based multi-faceted branding, advertising, and marketing firm is located in NYC and has clients dispersed nationwide. These clients primarily consist of financial services, national insurance agencies, technology, communications, and health care businesses. This agency provides all of the marketing services that a company could need including brand strategy, campaign development and implementation, web development, content marketing in television, print, digital, and social media, media planning and buying, and account-based marketing. Their core staff is comprised of seasoned senior executives who have worked for large global advertising agencies and, thanks to their ability work with consultants and freelancers as needed, they are able to adapt to any market ebb and flow. With over $1.9M in assets and over $8M in annual revenue for the past 3 consecutive years, the possibilities that new owners have with this business are seemingly endless and their 29% profit margin displays the payoff of having an experienced team and dedication to their field.

     

    Their core team consists of 30 full-time senior creative copy, creative art, strategy, and client service staff. The typical project scope runs from $20,000 to $150,000. With current assets and staff, low-cost growth opportunities include continuing to build client relationships with blue chip clients, and expanding outside of the current clientele focus. The three owners currently handle client relationships, financial management, and creative products; they are willing to stay on for up to three years and do a promissory note of 5% plus an equity roll of 10%.

     

    Priced at $10,900,000, this company is primed for purchase for anyone who wants to get involved in something proven and profitable. By continuing to build new client relationships, while cultivating existing connections, a new owner could certainly take this company to the next level.

    PRICE $10,900,000 CASH FLOW $2,206,622

  • Electrical Services Focused in Cable & Low Voltage Data installs

    Located in Tampa Florida, this electrical services company offers high and low cable installation services to local commercial construction firms. There are currently 7FT field technicians for installation work, with 2 PT office employees. The amount of field technicians employed varies depending on the project load, but their experienced crew provides excellent service, working with large, nationally known retail clients. With their well-trained staff, this company extends their services to 50 solid clients which includes local commercial construction firms, and subcontracting work for a national low voltage company. With this purchase, a buyer would receive $317K in assets, which includes $235K in vehicles, $12K in equipment, and $70K in A/R while benefiting from a low overhead at the current 1,200 sq. ft. warehouse. The two owners are married, with one acting as president of the company (and handling the A/P and A/R work, permits, and other office tasks) while the other owner acts as the vice president, handling the purchasing of materials for projects, and doing the estimating for forthcoming projects. Most of the owners’ responsibilities can be absorbed by staff members to allow for a more passive ownership but the current Owner is willing to stay with the company for up to 3 years in order to provide a smooth transition. This company has licenses to work in both Florida and Georgia, with their main service area spanning 2 hours from their home base in Tampa Bay, Florida. Services provided include high/low voltage cable installation, pre-construction design, generator installation, and troubleshooting for electrical, structured cabling, building controls and security, and life safety systems. The current process for obtaining contracts takes about 1-2 months, with the average cost per project being $10,000. Priced at $1,175,000, after debt payment the buyer would see a return of $169,922 in the first year after debt payments! This contractor provides a new owner with an experienced crew and client base that can not only continue its significant work in the commercial sector but also expand greatly into the residential market.

    PRICE $1,175,000 CASH FLOW $348,323

  • Data Capture & Thermal Label Equipment Sales & Services – $3M+ in Revenue

    With a 96% recurring client base primarily in manufacturing, warehousing, distribution, and logistics, this Georgia-based company had nearly $4M in sales in 2020! This value-added reseller (VAR) focuses on traditional bar code technology, RFID technology, process improvement, equipment sales and service and custom software solutions. This company has also developed a Warehouse Mgmt. system that could be sold for $45K or if further developed for $60K. From solution concept to the design, development and implementation, their experienced team can deliver traditional mobile and wireless solutions. 60% of their revenue comes from sales of products like data capture equipment, printing equipment and labels while the remaining 40% is from services like custom software and web development, hardware repair and network installation. Their typical network installation project runs from $80K - over $250K with this company installing as much as 1M square feet of networks for their clients and in any given year completing 10-15 projects. Their networking portfolio encompasses small businesses to Fortune 500 facilities across the country with an impeccable track record.

     

    Helping their clients succeed for 15 years, this company provides custom tailored solutions and results as promised and on time. With over 20 years professional software and database development expertise in-house, their staff's strong coupling of technical and business knowledge allows them to provide clients with world class solutions to their needs. The team consists of 7 full time employees including a senior VP, office manager, software developers with decades of experience and a process improvement resource. They also have 2-3 part time technicians who work for them as needed.

     

    This company is proud to partner with some of the most successful and regarded companies in the IT industry like Zebra, Data Logic, Honeywell, and Epson to name a few. This company has an outstanding opportunity for growth through development and upgrade of their WMS as well as going after more network installation projects.

    PRICE $1,840,000 CASH FLOW $589,682

  • Mechanical Advisory Firm: Recurring Clients are 90% of Revenue

    With 90% of revenue coming from recurring clients, this mechanical advisory company subcontracts almost all their labor. They have been serving major commercial clients since 1992 in HVAC, mechanical, and plumbing and 80% of their business is from new construction with the remaining 20% coming from maintenance & repairs work. Deemed an essential business amid the pandemic, this company’s largest customers are food processing facilities and Amazon distribution centers, with a strong foothold in the logistical and institutional sectors. Their highly experienced team with 5+ year tenures, has over 100 years of combined experience; it consists of the owner, who acts as General Manager, plus 1 Project Manager, 1 Estimator, 1 Office Manager/Bookkeeper, and subcontractors as needed (3 of which are exclusive to this company).

    Using proprietary software that tracks the breakdown of all of their costs for each individual project has set them apart from the competition; it allows them to be exceptionally cost-conscious and pursue jobs that match their skill set, while being cost-effective. Clients know this company will always stay on budget. In addition, they have never lost money on a project due to their scientific approach to pricing.

    Established in 1992, they are a legacy company in the construction world; they receive invitations from the contracting and construction communities to bid a job and have a current win rate on bids of 50%!   This company does not market and advertising as 100% of their customers come from referrals from existing customers. With a current backlog of $6.5M, the team is committed to seeing a job through from beginning to end, from the bidding process to coordinating the resources and installation needed for the project. Services include plumbing, heating, ventilation, air conditioning, sprinklers, industrial gas fitting, steam fitting, process piping, and pneumatics.

    This would be a fantastic bolt-on opportunity for a control’s contractor, electrician, or civil contractor. Creating synergy between two companies would be an incredible opportunity to expand the market share and boost revenue.

     

    PRICE $11,750,000 CASH FLOW $2,416,800

Selfcare/Childcare (10)

  • Non-Medical Home Health & Recession Resistant

     

     

    This home health business handles the non-medical care of clients across 5 different counties! This agency has more than 50 caregivers employed and a top leadership team of 3 managers that allow the seller to work a minimal 15 hours per week. Not only are the clients for this business diversified, they will need the care offered by this establishment regardless of the current economic status, meaning this business is essentially recession resistant. The client type for this in-home care company consists of people who require more assistance within their day-day activities. Seniors, respite patients, those with dementia, and veterans are their main focus. This companion care business recently received a contract with the VA in 2021, expanding their already diverse client base. Located in Omaha, NE, their service area currently includes the Omaha Metropolitan Area and surrounding cities, reaching as far as Fremont, Ralston, Bellevue, and Council Bluffs. Primarily these caregivers are in the homes of their clients, allowing this business to operate out of a 2,800 sq. ft. office space which in return keeps the overhead cost low. The current owner is selling due to deterring health unfortunately.

    Priced at $849,000, the current owner has offered 10% financing as a show of good faith in the continued success of the business after sale. This investment has exponential growth including further development the Fremont and Council Bluffs client bases, developing the newly awarded VA contract, and creating partnerships with workman’s compensation divisions. While each of these opportunities could provide significant growth with minimal additional investment, a buyer could also have the chance to enjoy their 18% profit margin if they wanted to be passive and not do anything to improve!

     

    PRICE $849,000 CASH FLOW $239,207

  • Production Lab for Dental Implants

     

    The current owner of this dental implant production lab is willing to stay on with the business for 2 years after the sale, and their salary has been accounted for in the listed cash flow! This business is a stable investment into the dental industry and can be viewed as an essential economic need which is clearly shown in their continually growing revenue, even during the pandemic. This Omaha based business has been in service over 20 years and has a diverse list of services offered including designing and producing custom dental fixtures such as Implant Restorations, 3D Printing & Milling, Crowns, Custom Shades, Diagnostic Wax-Ups, Dentures, Metal Frame, Flexible Partials, Retainers, Veneers and many more. This full-service dental lab not only has all of the services that any doctor, dentist, or oral surgeon could nee, but also offers an experienced and efficient team including 6 technicians and 1 driver who collectively have a tenure of 3 or more years with the business! This is a business that clients depend on and integrate into their practices. The dental studio helps doctors and dentists increase patient retention and referrals by reducing chair time and increasing satisfaction. This implements success for not only the client, but for the company as well.

     

    Due to the first-rate custom products this studio provides, most of their clients are recurring and long-lasting! There is an Instagram page, but no true marketing has ever been done. The studio owner prefers to keep business local, but in the past has had clients in states across the U.S. and has the resources and space in their 1,600 sq. ft. lab to bring this practice back now. These resources include over $250k in assets such as 3D printers, compressors, scanners, a delivery vehicle and more.

     

    At a purchase price of $945,000, a buyer can expect a $197,487 return in the first year after debt payments! This laboratory has plenty of growth opportunities, including offering services to doctors and dentists nationally and an increase in general marketing and advertisements. A great reputation and a highly experienced team have resulted in this business being perfect for transitioning a new owner to continue the reputable dental laboratory.

    PRICE $945,000 CASH FLOW $360,154

  • Craniofacial Practice with Over 90% Referral Based Clients

     

    This practice specializes in Craniofacial care for clients with TMJ, sleep apnea, migraines, and headaches. Craniofacial care is the specialized care of pain and sleep disorders specific to the neck and above. You do not need to be a DDS or MD to own this business. To ensure a smooth transition of ownership and continuity of operations, the current owner is willing to provide training and support for a period of one to two years. They have also expressed their willingness to extend this period if the new owner requires further assistance. The seller is approaching retirement age which has prompted the decision to sell the business. This presents an opportunity for a new owner to take over and continue providing specialized care to patients in need. The current owner completes 20 hours per week - aiding in the lab and assessing patients. The client base consists of professional referrals from referring physicians, dentists, and physical therapists or chiropractors. The Breakdown of services is as follows: 50% craniofacial pain, 30% dental sleep medicine, 20% dental facial orthopedics & orthodontics. The team consists of 1 FT receptionist who handles administrative tasks and manages patient appointments, 2 dental assistants who assist in providing care to patients and 1 FT lab technician. The business operates from a spacious 2,100 square feet facility with 4 treatment rooms, a reception area, 2 offices, a break room, lab, and utility room. Included in the purchase price is $185,000 worth of instruments, supplies and furnishings. Located in Lincoln, Nebraska this center has been providing comprehensive services for craniofacial pain since 2011.

    Priced at $440,000, with a 10% down payment of $44,000 a buyer can expect a return of $65,045 in the first year after debt payments. This opportunity presents a relatively high margin with a low multiple of 3.4 and due to the assets valued at $185,000, the bank loan is over 50% collateralized! There are several growth opportunities that can be explored. One potential avenue for expansion is to introduce cosmetic dental services, catering to clients seeking aesthetic improvements. Additionally, expanding into cosmetic injectables such as Botox!

     

    PRICE $440,000 CASH FLOW $128,396

  • Absentee Owned Laundromat with Full Service Drop Off

     

     

    Strategically located in Williston, ND, which is a temporary home for over 100,000 laborers who migrate to the region for work in the agriculture, fields, and energy industries, and reside in temporary homes who need the access to do laundry. This 3,600 sq ft facility offers self-service laundry, shower facilities and drop-off services where employees will wash, dry and fold laundry for the customer. The owner lives out of state and only visits a few times a year. The business has 1 general manager along with 4-5 laundry techs. This spacious laundromat was established in 2012 and competition in the area is very low. The pay-per-load machines utilize a card service as opposed to cash and coin which is much more secure and safe, especially for the outof-state owner. Included is over $474,000 in hard assets, with the bank loan being $490,000 this is nearly 100% collateralized. An SBA lender has pre-approved this deal structure. North Dakota is ranked 2nd, after Texas, as the highest oil producing state. Due to this fact, many oil companies will send swathes of contractors to this area and this business is noted as a preferred laundromat for their employees.

    Priced at $765,000, a 15% down payment of $114,750 returns $93,940 in the first year after debt payments! Plus, the owner is offering a 10% promissory note and 6 months of training, as a sign of good faith. This activity has brought the business to a 38% profit margin. A new owner could boost revenue by offering starching and dry-cleaning services or by offering pick up services in the area and nearby towns.

     

    PRICE $765,000 CASH FLOW $198,271

  • Spa & Massage- Non-Medical- Passive Owner

     

     

    This business is home to a 3,000 square feet location with 11 treatment rooms that are not at maximum capacity. They have an established chain of command, which includes 28 team members as well as 3 Team Leads. This day spa performed 60% massage and 40% skincare with a reoccurring active client base. The services in skincare include facials, body treatments, spray tans, waxing, and more. Their clients include both men and women of all ages, with 591 active monthly members. The spa location is perfectly placed in the middle of a very accessible and busy area! The current owner handles oversight, but Team Leads operate the daily business. The aging owner has some medical concerns and is looking to sell; as a sign of good faith, she is offering a 15% note and 6 months of training!

    Priced at $519,000 this establishment offers a buyer the opportunity to purchase a well-known business in a prime location with support and training from both the owner and from the national franchise, making it a high rate for success!

     

    PRICE $519,000 CASH FLOW $177,728

  • Packaging & Wholesale of Holistic Goods: Owner will stay 5 years and carry 40%

    Boasting sales of $30MM, this B2B business has two primary client types: smaller wholesalers and direct to shop owners. Services include wholesale, coordinating manufacturing, packaged development with fulfillment, and arranging logistics through 3rd party freight. This team includes a CFO, General Manager, VP of Sales, Retail Lead, 2 Manufacturing Leads, Warehouse Lead, 4 Warehouse Associates, 5 In House Sales Reps, 24 Packagers, and 19 Outside Sales Reps. They do not have any drivers, all are outsourced. They focus mainly on Distribution and Logistics to other smaller wholesalers which make up 59% of their revenue, while 38% is sold Business to Business to multi location owners; less than 3% is sold direct to the consumer and this is intentional for research and development purposes. The current owner recently reinvested significant amounts of time and money into expanding operations, including moving to a distribution center twice the size to handle the growth. They operate out of a 12,000 sq. ft. distribution facility in Southern California. In 2023 they added another distribution center in Florida. The goal for selling is to expand with a Strategic Buyer or Equity Group who can bring strong business acumen. The owner will remain on board for 4-5 years and is willing to do a 40% carry or equity roll combo as a sign of a vested interest in the business’s success. Currently there are 36 States who have recognized these Low-Dose consumables as a legal product and there are projected to be another 7 states that will follow suit in the next 6-9 months. The business does not sell any traditional cannabis products but rather regulated hemp which allows them to legally sell across state lines.

    This business is priced at $49,000,000, producing a 30% profit margin! There are 43 well-known and respectably sized Private Equity Groups and dozens of publicly traded companies that own very similar businesses! Another growth area is in manufacturing, bringing it in house to boost productivity.

     

    PRICE $49,000,000 CASH FLOW $9,835,970

  • Dog Day Care & Boarding with Passive Ownership

    Boasting a 67% profit margin with an annual cash flow of $186,913, this is a great opportunity for pet lovers and entrepreneurs alike. A 10% down payment of $61,500 returns $95,567 dollars in the first year after loan payments! Located in Kearney Nebraska since 2016, this dog boarding business has a well-located facility offering boarding, daycare, grooming and training to their loyal clients. The 5-person team is extremely competent, with each team member equipped with the knowledge and know-how when it comes to training and caring for pets. The owner of this pet boarding and training facility spends about 10 hours a week overseeing operations making this a passive opportunity. This business is poised to continue growing with a new, relocated indoor facility capable of housing 50+ dogs which allows plenty of space for training and the 24 included large kennels. To show good faith in the continued success of this business, the current owner has offered to finance 10% of the purchase price and has agreed to stay on with the company for 6 months to 1 year to ensure a smooth transition. The niche is in their academy, which offers programs tailored for service dogs and behavioral training courses.

    PRICE $615,000 CASH FLOW $186,913

  • Residential Playground Equipment: Sales and Installation

     

     

    Focused on Sports Courts and Playgrounds (both residential and commercial) and trampoline systems. This is an allencompassing project management company that begins with customer consultation, design & layout, logistics & delivery; then implementation followed by annual maintenance and equipment additions. Proven over the test of time, this business will turn 30 this year and there is no stop in sight as they are projecting higher sales than last years $3.2 million (which was the highest year)! There are 10 on staff, with 3 sales associates, 1 receptionist and greeter, and 6 installers (2 full time, 2 seasonal, and 2 subs). There is plenty of room to display all the recreation this company can bring to a backyard in their 20,000 sq. ft. facility; which includes offices, warehouse space and a showroom. The assets included in the purchase of this business are valued at $572,916 and this includes hoops, trampolines, playground equipment, vehicles and more.

    Priced at $2,425,000, the current owner has offered a transition/ training period of up to one year to ensure a smooth transition. With growth opportunities including partnering with small schools, public parks, and growing the commercial side of business and by adding other product lines such as ninja warrior courses, gazebos, picnic tables, and firepits. With a 10% down payment of $242,500, a buyer can expect a return of $177,336 in the first year after debt payments.

     

    PRICE $2,425,000 CASH FLOW $494,502

  • Hair School Financial Literacy Educational Program

    This extremely efficient business focuses on financial literacy educational programs for hair school students. The operation requires only the owner, resulting in an extremely high 77% average profit margin over the past three years, and devotes less than 10 hours per week. The business offers a curriculum package to hair schools which is an admission tool to get more enrollments and increase graduation rates by teaching financial literacy. The curriculum consists of textbooks authored by the owner, updated every 2-3 years, and a huge collection of videos teaching financial topics. The business is currently partnered with around 35 schools, so there is ample opportunity for growth. This program is the secret weapon to reduce drops, boost enrollments, improve attendance, and lower default rates.

     

    This business was created specifically for the beauty and cosmetology industry and uses an illustrated course book, animated videos, and turn-key lesson plans to teach financial lessons to benefit students in the future. This program will allow you to finally differentiate yourself from other schools and - at the same time - lower the number of drops in your school. The program has nothing to do with changing the curriculum, hiring new staff, or lowering tuition. First and foremost, this business is an admissions tool to get more enrollments.

     

    Priced at $990,000, this company will result in a 204% return on the investment in the first year. This program gives you a way to differentiate yourself from other schools in your area and be able to justify a higher price in order to stop students from “price shopping” schools.

    PRICE $990,000 CASH FLOW $352,441

  • Audiology Clinic Serving a 100 Mile Radius

     

     

    This audiology clinic is based out of two locations in Nebraska one of which is located at an owned building in West Point. This business is built on strong relationships with over 200 clients, as well as existing contracts with nursing homes and veteran facilities. The clinic serves a huge 100 mile radius centered at West Point! At the purchase price of $407,000, a 10% down payment of $40,700 returns $81,207 in the first year after debt payments, which is a nearly 200% return on investment!

     

    This company provides audiology and hearing aid services for all ages including comprehensive hearing evaluations, hearing aid consultations and fittings, and special diagnostic tests. The current owner is the audiologist, providing all patient services. Alongside the owner is one full-time employee, the office manager, who handles all communication with patients, dedicates reports, troubleshoots, and recommends hearing items for patients, and works with insurance companies for claim submissions.

     

    The West Point location is a 1,000 square feet stand-alone building specifically built for a medical clinic and is owned by the current owner. The office is open Monday through Friday from 9:00am-5:00pm by appointment and walk-in. The Fremont location is a single 10x12 foot office in a shared office building with the current lease is being $300/month and is by appointment only.

     

    This audiology clinic is not tied to a physician or private practitioner, which gives the company freedom to be its own private practice and see clients as they wish. Some areas for growth include moving away from paper charting and expand on marketing as well as telehealth, nursing home, and pediatric services.

     

    PRICE $407,000 CASH FLOW $133,690

Advertising/Marketing/Media/Print/Production (4)

  • Web Based Marketing and Brand Development Service

    This primarily web based multi-faceted branding, advertising, and marketing firm is located in NYC and has clients dispersed nationwide. These clients primarily consist of financial services, national insurance agencies, technology, communications, and health care businesses. This agency provides all of the marketing services that a company could need including brand strategy, campaign development and implementation, web development, content marketing in television, print, digital, and social media, media planning and buying, and account-based marketing. Their core staff is comprised of seasoned senior executives who have worked for large global advertising agencies and, thanks to their ability work with consultants and freelancers as needed, they are able to adapt to any market ebb and flow. With over $1.9M in assets and over $8M in annual revenue for the past 3 consecutive years, the possibilities that new owners have with this business are seemingly endless and their 29% profit margin displays the payoff of having an experienced team and dedication to their field.

     

    Their core team consists of 30 full-time senior creative copy, creative art, strategy, and client service staff. The typical project scope runs from $20,000 to $150,000. With current assets and staff, low-cost growth opportunities include continuing to build client relationships with blue chip clients, and expanding outside of the current clientele focus. The three owners currently handle client relationships, financial management, and creative products; they are willing to stay on for up to three years and do a promissory note of 5% plus an equity roll of 10%.

     

    Priced at $10,900,000, this company is primed for purchase for anyone who wants to get involved in something proven and profitable. By continuing to build new client relationships, while cultivating existing connections, a new owner could certainly take this company to the next level.

    PRICE $10,900,000 CASH FLOW $2,206,622

  • Wholesale of Niche Goods with 46,000 sq. ft. of Distribution Space

     

    Their distribution facility ships to over 800 B2B customers across the Continental US, made up of truck stops, grocery store chains, ecommerce companies, and more. There is a good mix of wholesale clients versus dropship orders where no inventory is held. The business has a highly diverse portfolio of more than 40 vendors, such as Riddell, WinCraft, and Fremont Die. There is a strong leadership team in place, including a President, Controller, Purchasing Manager, and Sales Director, plus a full warehouse & shipping team. The tenured President will stay in place as operator if the buyer desires. The owner resides out of state and has a very minimal role. The assets included are valued at $2,025,000, these assets are licensed sports team novelty items, a forklift, extensive warehouse shelving, pallet shrink wrapper, packaging equipment, pallet racking, and leasehold improvements. The company produced nearly $9M in revenue in 2022, putting $1.2M to the bottom line. Boasting over 300 types of products ranging across accessories, gifts, home goods, and gear, they have something for every fan. They do not sell shoes, clothes, or sports equipment. Their most popular product brands include products associated with the NFL, MLB, NBA, MLS, NGH, Nascar, US Army, Jack Daniels, and Harley Davidson.

    Priced at $5,700,000, this business includes 2 million in assets, a strong team, and solid reputation and history, putting a new owner in the perfect position to continue operating and growing successfully. Over 3 decades ago, this company started with the teenage owner who sold his first baseball card; now over 30 years later, this business thrives in the distribution of sports products & highly recognizable brands. The owner is willing to finance 10% and/or retain 5% equity, as a show of good faith in the ongoing success of the business. A 10% down payment of $570,000 returns $618,947 in the first year after debt payments!

     

     

    PRICE $5,700,000 CASH FLOW $1,300,112

  • Design and Mail Marketing Company: Established 30 Years

    This medical mailer design and fulfillment business produces a specific niche product necessary to its industry for donation collection. This is well illustrated by their 300+ current clients in the medical, nonprofit, and dental fields. This excellent reputation, coupled with their top-notch work ethic, has led to many of their top clients continually returning for 10+ years. This mid-sized establishment has been servicing and creating business partnerships within the Omaha area for over 30 years. They can remain flexible on jobs that bigger companies would not be able to accept and skilled enough to be more efficient and reliable than smaller firms. Thanks to their skilled and established staff of 18 employees which include 2 Managers, a senior customer service representative, 8 production workers, 2 maintenance workers, their services can be utilized for a range of products including educational seminars and conference. To fill the consistent and diverse needs of these clients, the business purchase includes over $330,000 work of assets which collateralizes 63% of the bank loan needed.

     

    In addition to current services provided, the firm has room to grow outside of traditional printing jobs by utilizing staff’s current ability to handle layout, online marketing, and shipping services to expand further into the online field that can often be preferred in today’s market. The current owner is willing to assist with a smooth transition by offering at least one year of training which could also be used to assist in hiring and training an in store general manager if new ownership would prefer a hands-off management style.

     

    With a purchase price of $440,000 and a down payment of $44,000, a buyer would see a 634% return on investment of $278,938 in the first year after debt payments! This business is well set for a new owner to step in and continue the incredible legacy that has been built over the years. 

    PRICE $440,000 CASH FLOW $345,743

  • Bar and Grill

    This Omaha Metro Area’s Newest Bar and Grill has really brought a fun and upbeat spot for many to relax and dine in.  The owner had more than 20 years of industry experience owning and operating other bars in which this location was established in November of 2008. Individuals enjoy delicious American food favorites with cold beverages from the bar and grill. This facility features a casual dining atmosphere with great food and drink selections.  It has also been a great attraction for many to watch the fine world of sports. 

    PRICE $210,000 CASH FLOW $72,000

Maintenance/Service/Trades (25)

  • Fire Protection Engineering Firm in Texas – 60% Profit Margin

    The current Senior Consultant for this fire protection engineering firm has over 20 years of experience and would be able to assume the role of CEO under new ownership! With a 60% profit margin and year-over-year growth in sales for 3 years, this Dallas company has a highly skilled team of employees already in place who run the day-to-day operations.  Established for over 25 years, this firm provides a wide array of services in all phases of fire protection engineering, including building & fire code consulting & engineering, fire alarm systems, automatic sprinkler systems, smoke exhaust systems, fire modeling, plan review, and systems testing. Their diverse client base consists of design professionals (55%), contractors (25%), federal government (10%), and private owners (10%), with their service area covering primarily Texas and surrounding states. The collaborative team of 7 includes the owner, a licensed Fire Protection Engineer, along with 1 Senior Consultant, 1 Senior Designer, 3 Engineers, and 1 Administrative Assistant. The team is based out of 2,300 sq. ft. office in Dallas, with a small 200 sq. ft. satellite office in San Antonio.

     

    Plan review customers are a portion of their ongoing client base; plan review services provide recurring monthly revenue, as it is a service in constant demand and yields steady cash flow for the company, accounting for approximately 20% of their total revenue per year. The average plan review fee ranges from $500-$1,000. Project sale sizes range anywhere from $2k-$200k, with an average sale size of around $10k. The firm uses state-of-the-art software packages such as AutoCAD, Revit, HydraCAD, AutoSPRINK, CFAST, FDS, Egress, and Intelligibility.

     

    Priced at $5,900,000, this firm has seen year-over-year growth in sales for 3 years and a 5-year average profit margin of 47%. A solid team is already in place; they run the day-to-day operations, handle clients regularly, and complete projects successfully. Over the years, this firm has gained a  reputation for providing some of the best services when it comes to fire protection and planning, giving them steady word-of-mouth referrals. Pursuing more projects in colleges & universities, school districts, and in the industrial sector would certainly lead to continued growth.

    PRICE $5,900,000 CASH FLOW $1,239,860

  • Commercial Roofing – 100% Recurring Clients – No Storm Chasing

     

    This commercial roofing business has nearly 100% repeat customer base – there is no storm chasing. In 2024, there is already $12M in backlog and $6.5M in work in progress. Most of their projects are completed in less than one year, services are varied including, covering membrane roofing, metal roofing, sheet metal, slate & tile steep slope roofing, waterproofing, plaza pavers, and solar installation and repairs. Their well-developed team of 51 is made up of 1 Controller, 1 HR Manager, 1 Superintendent, 2 Project Managers, 3 Estimators, 1 Accounting Assistant, and 42 Laborers. The owner coordinates with the Controller & Superintendent, along with overseeing banking. He is confident that the Controller & Superintendent are qualified and capable of operating the company. With the purchase of this company, a buyer would receive $3.3M in assets, which includes $630K in equipment (forklifts, air compressors, generators, safety equipment, boom lifts, anything needed for their jobs), 16 vehicles, computers, FF&E, office software, and working capital. The business operates out of a 16,000 sq. ft. facility with 4,000 sq. ft. of office space.

    Priced at $7,200,000, this company is poised for a seamless transition. The owner is willing to carry up to 10% of the price and has offered to stay on board for 1-2 years, showing a vested interest in the ongoing success of the company. Currently there is no marketing or outside sales taking place, and there is a lot of untapped potential on the solar side of the business, which will greatly improve revenues and profit margins.

     

     

    PRICE $7,200,000 CASH FLOW $1,795,945

  • Logistics and Sourcing for Bulk Material

     

    This business sources materials for infrastructure developments, utilities, roads, and bridges. They source materials from over 20+ national manufacturers and vendors. They offer their services for municipal job sites where Prime Contractors are performing utility and bridge installations, including ductile/concrete pipe, precast storm drainage & utility structures, cast iron manholes, and inlet frames/covers. With the thought of a “recession” looming, this company will be growing, as the newly passed Infrastructure Bill will directly impact this company’s revenue and shield them from economic downfall. The team includes 1 VP, 1 Controller, 1 Estimator, and 1 Administrative Specialists. The current owner oversees the team, meeting with key employees when needed, and provides business development strategies. As a show of good faith and vested interest in the ongoing success of the company, the current owner is willing to hold a promissory note for up to 10% of the total price. He is also happy to stay on board for 1 year post close to ensure a smooth transition. New ownership can expect to step into a stable investment with three locations, including a primary location in Delaware and satellite locations in Georgia and Florida. After building this business and operating in this industry for 20 years, the current owner is ready for a change of pace and is interested in exploring the next chapter of his life. Priced at $2,650,000 this business has an established business operation and enough stability for a new owner to step in and continue operating the business as is. This opportunity also affords new owners enough flexibility to change things up and try out some new growth routes.

    PRICE $2,650,000 CASH FLOW $731,745

  • Commercial Glass and Glazing with 85% Repeat clients

     

    This prominent commercial glass and glazing company, based in Phoenix, has been providing services to their business-to-business client base for 13 years throughout the state of Arizona. Their clients are not the end user but rather the general contractor. They boast an 85% repeat customer base. The focus of their work is on hospitals, schools, office parks and car dealerships - there is no residential clients. They have a spacious 7,700 square foot facility with a large shop for fabrication alongside furnished offices. The staff includes 7 in leadership and 3 admin, along with 9 laborer’s, installers, and glazers. The owner is willing to stay on board for 2-4 years while settling into retirement. The purchase also comes with the necessary amount of vehicles, equipment, and working capital which can range from $500K - $700K.

    Priced at $3,300,000, a 10% down payment of $330,000 will return $461,009 in the first year after debt payments. The seller has offered to carry 10% of the purchase price in order to show their vested interest in the continued success of the business moving forward. In terms of growth, their strategy includes hiring more staff and expanding into the residential sector.

     

    PRICE $3,300,000 CASH FLOW $937,048

  • Midwest Based Truck Driver Training Center

     

    For over 20 years this niche business has been educating students to get their CDL with driver training classes. They have both classroom and active driver training using their 15 Semis. They are also accredited through the DMV as an official 3rd party CDL testing site with a truck driver. Throughout North America, this post high school career path brings students that are 30% from the Midwest states and 70% from across the US. They have a location in Nebraska, strategically located on the I-80 which is the most travelled US interstate for coast-to-coast hauling. The purchase price includes a fleet of 16 Tractor Trailer Semis, buildout classrooms, a full curriculum, plus a full class schedule as truck drivers remain in high demand throughout North America. Additionally, the owner is offering 10% financing plus a 2-year training period to ensure a smooth and successful transition. A tangible growth strategy is to add additional community colleges to their referral partners. After becoming licensed through their program, a driver can now earn $80,000/year for only a $4,000 investment into their tuition. In 2019, the Federal Government mandated that every person applying for a CDL must complete an approved program through a training school. This business is an approved school and fits all requirements for this change. Also, in the state of Nebraska, the Department of Motor Vehicles no longer offers CDL testing and all testing for CDL licenses will be done by 3rd party examiners. This business holds all certifications necessary for this transition as well.

    Priced at $2,950,000, a 10% down payment of $295,000 returns $357,431 in the first year after debt payments. The owner has offered to carry 15% of the purchase price in order to show their vested interest in the continued success of the business moving forward. Many individuals who pursue CDL training may need to travel to Kearney, Nebraska, to attend the program; by providing onsite accommodations or partnering with local lodging establishments, they can offer convenience and comfort to out-oftown students. Additionally, having a restaurant space can provide meals and refreshments during training sessions, further enhancing the overall experience for students.


    PRICE $2,950,000 CASH FLOW $877,942

  • Infrastructure Contracting Firm with a focus in Roadwork and Water Utilities

    Infrastructure development firm focused on roadways, underground utilities and water/sewer projects that have served all 5 boroughs of New York over the last 20 years. Though they do not have any sort of certification for MBE, WBE, or 8a etc. this firm has proved a successful track record working with various New York City agencies such as the Department of Design and Construction, Department of Environmental Protection, School Construction Authority and Port Authority of NY & NJ. They do not currently undertake private work. The business occupies a 25,000 square foot lot with a 4,000 square foot office space. There are 40-50 fulltime W2 employees, and the field staff are union. The seller is planning for retirement and has offered a training period of 1- 2 years to ensure a smooth handover – he already has 2 VPs in place to take over. In terms of growth opportunities, this business has the potential to take on larger projects. The equipment and vehicles included in the purchase price have been valued at $2,861,000 during a 2023 appraisal.

    Priced at $4,395,000, the seller has offered to carry 10% of the purchase price in addition to a 10% equity roll in order to show his vested interest in the continued success of the business moving forward. A down payment of $439,500 will return $661,918 in the first year after debt payments! With its extensive experience in public bid projects and established relationships with various New York City agencies, the company can leverage its reputation and expertise to secure larger contracts. Expanding their project portfolio can lead to increased revenue and further establish their presence in the construction industry.

     

     

    PRICE $4,395,000 CASH FLOW $1,227,903

  • Home Flooring: No Installation

     

    This flooring company has been serving the Omaha/ Lincoln area for several years. The business specializes in providing high-quality flooring solutions to a residential client base. The Corporate office provides all lead generations and schedules the first appointment with the potential client. The owner performs the estimate, invoicing and site checkups while 100% of the installation is subcontracted out. There are over 10 subcontractors on a regular basis, with the average project requiring 1-2 individuals for completion. The average job size in 2022 was $5,000 with a minimum rate of $2,000. The owner of this business operates out of his home office and does not need the traditional office space, resulting in little to no overhead. Due to relocation out of state, the seller is willing to provide a transition period of 6 months to ensure a smooth handover. In addition to the proposed transition period, the franchise provides comprehensive training and ongoing support to ensure that new owners have all the necessary skills and knowledge to operate the business effectively. With its strong reputation, established supplier relationships, and a growing market, this business has the potential for continued growth and profitability.

    Priced at $690,000, this opportunity presents a unique proposition as it does not require any construction background from potential buyers. This means that individuals who are interested in entering the flooring industry but lack experience or knowledge in construction can still successfully run this business.

     

    PRICE $690,000 CASH FLOW $237,677

  • Enviro Services of Drilling Waste: 100% Absentee Owner

     

     

    This company currently has 250 clients, of which 50+ of those are recurring with the typical client being a municipality or utility company. This company handles all aspects of the industrial clean up services and disposal & hauling of drilling waste for oil field productions. Their equipment & vehicles have a value of over $2.6MM and consists of combo vacs, tank trucks, straight vacs, water trucks, mobile steamers, and maintenance units. This variety of equipment also gives them the ability to perform a mixture of maintenance, water delivery, vegetation control, water truck services, & mobile steaming. The Leadership Team is in place & consists of twenty-three employees. There are 5 in Administration (Vice President of Operation, General Manager of Fleet & Dispatch, Billing Manager, Safety Officer, and Dispatch); 13 Operators, and 5 in the Shop. The uniquely qualified team allows the owner to be able to live remote, more than 2 hours away, and only does light oversight of the business. Financing should be a breeze as this company is boasting a 20% Profit Margin and is 100% collateralized, plus there is roughly $375K of working capital that is included in the purchase price as well.

    At the purchase price of $4,950,000 CAD, with a 20% investment from the Buyer, the Seller will show a vested interest in the business’s success by holding a note for 10% and rolling equity of 10% allowing the bank to be at a 60% loan, making the business over 100% collateralized. The business has a focus in Alberta with clients across Canada. The company’s leased space consists of an 11-acre industrial fully fenced yard site, a 750 sq. ft. office with 4 maintenance bays, and a 5-bedroom crew house.

     

    PRICE $4,950,000 CASH FLOW $979,115

  • Property Management with 85% Multi-Family: Owner will carry 25%

     

    A 15+ year established property management firm where the owner is seeking a strategic minded buyer with business acumen. As a show of good faith and vested interest in the ongoing success of the company the owner has offered to roll equity for up to 25% and provide a 4–5- year transition period. Their client mix is 85% multi-family housing/apartments, 10% single family homes (multi-unit), and 5% commercial made up of Property Investors, focused in multifamily living. The organization has developed a reputable presence, by serving Milwaukee & Kenosha Wisconsin. The owner oversees his leadership team and will do some site sourcing, as he still finds that enjoyable. His staff handles the day-to-day operations. The welldeveloped management team includes a Controller, two Senior Vice Presidents and a Superintendent. There are also 3 Property Managers, 3 in Maintenance, and 1 Office Administrator. The acquisition includes about $450K in assets which are company vehicles, deposits, and AR. Priced at $3,350,000, a 10% down payment will return $333,740 in the first year after debt payments. A 99% return on investment! Two banks have already pre-approved this loan for a qualified buyer with only 10% down and 65% from a lender. The upcoming growth coupled with a 34% profit margin makes this streamlined property management business a great opportunity.

     

    PRICE $3,350,000 CASH FLOW $799,385

  • Renovations and Maintenance for Denver School Districts: Seller will carry 35%

     

     

    Their services revolve around maintenance and rehabilitation including renovations, drywall, light electrical system installation, plumbing, and demolition focusing on municipal work with over 50% of their revenue from the state school systems in the Denver Metro Area. The owner of this business is selling for retirement preparation but before stepping away from this operation, he is dedicated to ensuring the ongoing success and comfort of both the staff and clients which is why he has offered a transition period of up to 2-3 years. As an added demonstration of his vested interest in the ongoing success of the business, the owner has also offered to carry 35% of the purchase price - this is 3 times more than the average! This purchase includes $237,852 in equipment and vehicles as well as $377,424 in working capital, along with a 100% collateralized bank loan! Their small but mighty team includes a General Manager who assists with estimating, hiring and scheduling, 2 Field Superintendents plus 1 in billing, while the owner focuses on the estimating and management of the overall business.

    Priced at $795,000 and with sales of $2,698,493 in 2022, this business is primed and ready for a new owner to step in and continue operations. This business is a fantastic opportunity for a wide variety of buyers, it possesses exponential room for growth in almost every field as the owner has kept things small out of personal preference. Due to the recently passed infrastructure bill, this company is recession proof due to their municipality focus.

     

    PRICE $795,000 CASH FLOW $256,972

  • GC Management of Tenant Buildout: All Labor is Subcontracted

     

    This remotely operated commercial remodel and renovation business is working for repeat, long tenured clients across the United States, such as Leslie Pools and Michaels! Established in 1993, they have high levels of repeat customers and referral-based work. There is a strong backlog for 2024 and there is no self-performing labor! With their clients and contractors across the country, they utilize a vetted group of regional contractors that they have had for many tenured years. This business is fully relocatable and can be managed from anywhere, the owner handles project oversite and client relations. The seller is looking to retire, but to make the transition process as easy as possible, he has offered a training period of up to 1 year for a new owner, plus he is willing to carry a 15% promissory note. The W2 staff consists of 1 office administrator and 1 supervisor. Although there is no inventory to manage, the seller does have equipment and vehicles used for minor alterations – these assets have been valued at $192,527 resulting in a very low capex!

    Priced at $1,495,000, a 10% down payment of $149,500 returns $329,889 in the first year after debt payments! A 220% return on investment! This business would be an ideal opportunity for a new entrepreneur looking to buy a business with tenured established, no equipment needed. This could also be a good fit for a strategic buyer wanting to expand their geographic client base or expand into the commercial space. Either way, with their long-standing reputation for customer service and flexibility, extensive growth opportunities, and streamlined operation this business has an excellent foundation to expand upon.

     

    PRICE $1,495,000 CASH FLOW $533,762

  • Well-Established Appliance Retailer with Installation Services

     

     

    Established over 90 years, this retail appliance business has an excellent local reputation and deep roots within their community. The business is situated in Iowa City and serves clients in various small towns within a 50-mile radius. The staff consists of a total of 8 members, including 1 service lead, 2 service technicians, 1 installation lead, 1 installation technician, 2 office managers, and 1 delivery assistant. With this well-established team in place, the owner is able to take a more passive role, providing oversight and management support as necessary. The business operates out of two separate buildings. The first building has a designated area of 1,600 square feet for parts and service, along with a showroom spanning 2,000 square feet. The second building, which houses the appliances, has a total area of 4,000 square feet. The purchase of this business includes $471,327 in assets, which overcollateralizes the loan, including vehicles, trailers, equipment, inventory, and accounts receivable.

    Priced at $270,000, this business is a great opportunity for a new owner to step in and enjoy a passive business venture! While there are a few other appliance stores in the area, very few offer installation and maintenance services, which sets this business apart from its competitors. As a show of good faith, the owner has offered 10% seller financing and will stay on board for 6 months-1 year post-close. The loan is 100% over-collateralized!

     

    PRICE $270,000 CASH FLOW $84,651

  • Professional PM Firm with over $120 Million in Contracted Work

     

    This professional PM and construction management firm plans and manages renovations and maintenance for military bases across the upper West Coast. Clients are 90% Federal/Government and 10% private hire, including the VA, Navy, US Coast Guard, Army, School Districts, and Apartments/Condos. There are typically 20-30 active jobs concurrently which represents a current WIP of $24,000,000 plus several multi-year contracts in backlog. A highly developed management team is in place where there are about 35 key employees, including a President, CFO, 4 Project Managers, 2 Engineers, 5 Superintendents, 2 Foreman, 5 Estimators, 4 Quality Control, plus Admin, IT, and Assistants. This allows the owner to work remotely, spending only 10 hours per week providing “strategic vision” to the leadership team. They have a 4+ year backlog with multi-year contracts with proprietary deal flow in over $120 Million in contracts. The Seller is willing to stay 2-3 years postclose and will also offer a promissory note and/or equity roll of 30% as a sign of good faith. With the purchase, a buyer would receive $2.9M in assets, including working capital and the vehicles and equipment needed to continue successfully. CapEx remains very low at less than $200K per year. Reoccurring clients are the VA, Federal Government, and the US Military. There will not be any impact on this business should there be a recession, Government shutdown or upcoming election. In fact, due to the passed US Infrastructure Bill, this business will have organic growth as the bill has billions of set asides for our military bases.

     

    PRICE $36,500,000 CASH FLOW $6,802,180

  • Roof Inspection & Installation: 10 Million in Residential backlog for 2023

     

     

    This residential roofing business has been in service since 2011 and they have $2.4M in receivables! they have 2 locations with their main location in Manassas, VA and the second satellite location an hour away, both locations have a General Manager to ensure smooth individual operations. The services offered include roof inspection and installation, gutter repair, siding, windows, floors, decks, drywall, and storm restoration which are utilized by over 5,000 clients in Virginia, West Virginia, and Maryland. The team consists of 19 employees including 2 office managers, 5 office staff, and 7 sales reps, this roofing business not only has an established chain of command but has also been able to keep their CapEx and liability low by outsourcing all of the labor. Their team works with clients’ insurance companies to ensure that customers get the most out of their claim. The current owner only focuses on the oversite of sales and even with his minimal involvement in day-to-day activities, he is willing to stay on board with the business for 2-3 years post-close to ensure a smooth transition. Coupled with the high levels of customers coming in due to referrals (70%!), and their average online rating of 4.8, this business is primed for growth. The current owner is willing to carry 30% of the $2,900,000 purchase price, to show their established confidence in the company’s ability to continue successfully. A 10% down payment of $290,000 is what Is needed to step into ownership of this projected 10 Million dollar revenue roofing company. In the Northeast U.S., April through September is storm season, which is the busiest time of year for this company. After a hailstorm, there is a 50% chance that a roof will have a leak. They have learned to utilize this information by increasing their marketing to coincide with this optimum business opportunity. Because of this niche market, the business has proven to be pandemic and recession proof. Outside of their already incredible client base, there would be easy expansion into commercial and government work as well.

     

    PRICE $2,900,000 CASH FLOW $803,349

  • Multiple Locations Architecture Practice with 25% Seller Carry

     

    Based in New York City, this business has been able to accumulate an excellent reputation spurred on by happy clients which has led to 90% repeat clientele. A strategic new owner with experience in architecture and engineering would have 3 years of seller transitioning of the business and a foot into the New York market. The firm has nearly 15 years of experience under their belt, and their leadership team has been well mentored. The team consists of 25 employees including Leadership and several architects. This owner is open to a 30% carry showing good faith in the ongoing success and the seller’s vested interest in the success of the business after sale. This architecture firm has a focus on higher education and K-12, with 4.1M in backlog, they are poised for an acquisition. Priced at $4,400,000 this business is primed to return year over year success to anyone in a related industry. Someone that knows how to operate in this field would be able to not only enjoy the expected organic growth pattern brought forward by the world’s focus on education and building new opportunities, but put forth new growth opportunities without having to utilize exponential resources on accumulating additional assets. Included in the purchase of this business is $1,152,000 in assets, this includes AR and the necessary equipment needed to maintain day-to-day operations.

     

    PRICE $4,400,000 CASH FLOW $954,000

  • Fabricated Synthetic Stone for Outdoor Walls – No Installation

    This business handles the fabrication of synthetic, precast stone for masonries and 75% of their work is done for municipal contracts. This operation only handles the manufacturing and fabrication of the cast stone, the do not handle any installation of the products in exterior walls. The services offered include creating a mold and color matching stones for historical buildings that need stones which are no longer available or for eye-catching statement pieces in new locations. Clients that take advantage of these fully customizable stones primarily include museums, commercial locations, and high-end multifamily housing units. Due to this extremely stable client base, there will not be any impact on this business should there be a recession. In fact, due to the newly passed US Infrastructure Bill, this business can expect organic growth opportunities in the upcoming year. To add to the stability of this business, they currently have a 90% repeat client base made up of B2B work with the masons being the direct client, not the end user.

    This Chicago based establishment offers a niche service and, because of this, their nearest competition is 30 miles away. This organization has nearly 20 employees with experts in management including a production manager, plant manager, supply manager; along with 1 drafter, 1 sales rep, 2 mold shop and 12 plant production workers. This team allows the current owner to only work 20-25 hours handling bookkeeping and some deliveries out of personal preference.

    Priced at $2,550,000 this business is ready for a new owner to step in and continue operating on the foundation laid before them. The seller has offered a training period of 1-2 years to ensure a smooth transition of ownership as well as to finance 20% of the purchase price as a show of good faith. With an excellent staff, reputation that’s been established since 2010, and large warehouse with a significant amount of unused space, this niche business is primed to offer a new and excited owner exponential growth opportunity with minimal additional investments needed.

    PRICE $2,550,000 CASH FLOW $511,011

  • Parks, Roads Infrastructure with 62 million in Backlog

     

     

    This Civil based Infrastructure business performs Site Prep for Parks, Roads and School Districts with a focus in paving. Their repeat client base includes the DOT, Department of Parks & Rec and the Port Authorities. The proof is in the performance with this NYC business as they have never defaulted on a project in their 43-year history. This business currently has over $62M in backlog – the highest they have ever had! The assets are valued over 4 million, which include $2,350,000 in heavy equipment, $1.3 million in vehicles and they will leave $500,000 in Working Capital! This makes the loan over-collateralized plus there is a bank loan already pre-approved for a qualified buyer! The team consists of 20 core people, there is no shortage of trained professionals at hand, including office staff, project managers, and foremen plus 30-50 union laborers. The owner currently works about 25 hours a week and will provide transition for 2-3 years. The owner is ready to retire but has a vested interest in the continuing success of this business, to show good faith he is willing to finance and/or hold a 30% Equity Roll. The business utilizes a 12,000 sq. ft. building which includes an office, shop, machines, storage with 8,000 sq. ft. of unused space that could be used for expansion! Priced at $5,100,000, this business is primed and ready for a new owner to step in and enjoy a backlog that has surpassed their all time high. Their work falls under the municipal umbrella: meaning if there should be a recession, their workflow will not be impacted. In fact, due to the recently passed US Infrastructure Bill, this business will grow significantly as $66 Billion dollars has been set aside for public transportation infrastructure work. A new owner could add plumbing, precast, fencing and hardscaping to the list of services as these are all growth opportunities. A buyer must qualify for a Minority, Woman or Veteran designation to own majority of this business.

     

    PRICE $5,100,000 CASH FLOW $1,128,352

  • Lead, Mold, and Air Testing for Corporate and Municipal Clients

     

     

    This business offers vital services, including inspection and sampling of air monitoring, water & mold sampling, and air & lead inspections. With over 40 years of experience, this business completes work in three states – Arkansas, Mississippi, and 90% in Louisiana. Along with their corporate clients, they also serve banks, school districts, and municipalities. Included in the sale is over $180,000 in assets, including several trucks, trailers, and XRF analyzer, and AR, which makes this bank loan over 50% collateralized. Their location includes an office, 7 total storage facilities, an equipment shed, and covered parking area (all at the same location). The reason for the sale is because the owner was given a cancer diagnosis (now in remission), however, she is willing to train and transition a new owner for 6 months to 1 year, as well as carry 10% of the list price in a note! The staff consists of 2 full time employees, a part time bookkeeper, and subcontractors that are hired as needed. While the seller does assist with bidding, the employees on staff are trained to do so as well and can absorb this responsibility with ease.

    At a price of $440,000, and a down payment of $44,000, a buyer would expect to see a return of $143,044 in the first year after debt payments! The business also has a low multiple of 2.15 with a profit margin of 30%, call for an appointment!

     

     

    PRICE $440,000 CASH FLOW $206,395

  • Passive Des Moines Home Renovation Company

     

    This passive Des Moines based home renovation company is stable and has huge growth potential! Boasting an amazing reputation which leads to repeat clients and referrals, this company has more than $1,600,000 in the pipeline for Q1 alone, which annualizes out to $6.4M in projected revenue! There is nearly $1M in assets including the company’s 14 vans, power tools, and inventory. This well-built operation is passive – with the owner dedicating only 5 to 7 hours a week to the business - but also boasts room to grow if an ambitious new owner wants to lean into growth opportunities. A well-executed hiring campaign to increase the volume of work, as well as possibly opening a satellite location, could drive this business even higher. 

     

    This experienced team provides a “one-stop-shop” approach to residential kitchen and bath remodels. This business controls the quality and timeliness of every installation by completing all work in house except for countertop instillation. Their complete showroom and an onsite designer provide 3D renderings for projects that allows for stress-free selections. Most projects happen in the kitchen (45%), the bathroom (45%), as well as other remodeling projects throughout the home. A 12% down payment of $677,829 returns $718,052 in the first year even after debt payments!

     

    An incredible asset of this business is the well-trained and experienced team who are cross-trained in many different skills and many of whom have a long tenure with the company. Leads manage the projects, and the general manager handles the day-to-day operations with the help of an office manager. The team works out of a 4,000 sq. ft. office building. The owner of the business owns the facility under a separate entity and is willing to lease to the next owner. With a solid reputation in the area, the business has a long-standing relationship with customers; they are able to keep their service area within a 30-mile radius of the Des Moines metro.

    PRICE $5,648,580 CASH FLOW $1,569,050

  • Glazing Contractor with 35k sq. ft. Factory & $7.5M in Backlog

    There is amazing growth potential for a new owner of this OKC Glazing Contractor; expanding services into Texas, Arkansas, Kansas, and Missouri would give a huge revenue boost! With nearly $6M in sales in 2020 and $7.5M already in their backlog, this company has been established in Oklahoma City for over 70 years. Working out of a 35,000 sq. ft. factory, the business has top-notch CNC capabilities that are unmatched in the area. Services include design, fabrication, manufacturing, and installation of aluminum curtainwall, storefront, heavy glass doors, glass handrails, and swinging & sliding aluminum doors. There are 45 full-time employees, including the owner, who handles general oversight, 3 Project Managers, 2 Estimators, 1 CAD Drafter, 1 Superintendent, 5 Foremen, 2 in Accounting, 10 in the factory, and a highly skilled team in the field handling installations. Their main focus is on mid to high-rise towers; sale size ranges from $250k-$3M, with $500k-$700k billed out each month. Most work (90%) is bid by invitation from the GC, with work secured 6-12 months into future. Along with $7.5M worth of signed contracts, the company has $3.5M in their pipeline.

     

    Because it is such a specialized industry, the company uses the Union from time to time out of Texas and New Mexico. Their participation agreement with the union allows them to remain independent and hire from the union when needed for large projects. The company’s bonding capacity of $12M, along with their exceptional factory, equipment, and manpower, allows them to bid on monumental projects in the area.

     

    Priced at $2,020,000, the factory, equipment, client relationships, industry reputation, and highly experienced team is already in place for this business. A new owner could step in and take this company to the next level. A 12.5% down payment of $252,500 returns $281,137 in the first year after debt payments – a 111% return on investment!

    PRICE $2,020,000 CASH FLOW $539,461

  • Earthwork, Shoreline Protection, Site Prep in Texas – 90+ FT Employees

    This Earthwork & Industrial Site Prep business completes 225 jobs per year, with a minimum of 20 active projects at one time!  Located in Victoria, Texas and with 90+ FT employees, their average client tenure is 13 years. Sale size ranges from $10k to $1.5M, with an average of $350k. With $9.4M in WIP and over $3M in their pipeline, work is plentiful for this well-diversified team. They offer a vast array of heavy civil construction services, including  building streets, subdivisions, commercial site preparation, and industrial work at petrochemical plants, as well as utility system construction, earthwork, site preparation, coastal erosion control, shoreline protection, and general maintenance. Clients are comprised of private developers, industrial, city, county, and state governments, and GC’s. This versatile offering of services and diverse client base works in this company’s favor, as they don’t rely heavily on one client or sector. Approximately 30% of their work is as the GC, primarily for the county, city, or state. The other 70% involves working for the GC on a project as the sub. While they do have a go-to list of subcontractors when needed, the majority of the time, it’s their own 90+ person team completing the work, which boosts profit margin.

     

    Over $7M in assets includes $5M in heavy equipment, $1.2M in vehicles, $57k worth of trailers, tools valued at $365k, and office furniture & software worth $379k. The team works out of a 6,000 sq. ft. office building located on 5 acres of land; their facilities also include 1 heavy equipment shop, 1 truck shop (2,000 sq. ft. each), and 1 fuel & oil shed (1,200 sq. ft.). The owner of the business owns the facility under a separate entity and leases it back to the business for $9,000/month; this rate would be kept the same under new ownership. With a solid reputation in the area, the business has long-standing relationships with customers and GC’s alike; they are able to keep their service area within a 100-mile radius of the office. 

     

    Utilizing top notch ComputerEase, HCSS, AGTEK, and Trimble software, this well-respected team receives invites to bid from GC’s they’ve worked with over the years where they have a 75% win rate; they also subscribe to websites that send notices of upcoming projects that are up for public bidding, with a 25% success rate on those. Priced at $20,250,000, there is ample opportunity for growth. Expanding the service area to other gulf states for high margin erosion control projects and actively pursuing more bids would certainly lead to an increase in revenue. There is currently a very limited sales team and little to no marketing. Working Capital is $2.1M and would transfer to the new owner.

    PRICE $20,250,000 CASH FLOW $4,154,501

  • General Contracting, Electrical & Mechanical Services in Growing Area

    This multi-trade service business has an 80% recurring client base and a 33% 3-Year average profit margin!  With an incredibly versatile team of employees in place, 90% of their work is self-performed. They offer complete mechanical, electrical, and automation design, installation, and maintenance, as well as steel erection, concrete foundations, design build, and heavy equipment installation. The team of employees is incredibly versatile, with the ability to transition from trade to trade very easily. They have 25+ recurring clients with most of them having an MSA in place. In other cases, even though there is no contract in place, this company is their contractor of choice.  The company started performing more mechanical services a few years ago, resulting in higher net income and profit margins. As they continue to do more on the mechanical side in the coming years, a new owner can expect to see profit margins and net income continue to increase, as profit margins from mechanical work is 35%, compared to 15% from general contracting services. There is tremendous room for expansion into the mechanical side, which currently accounts for only 9% of the business, but has a higher profit margin than the other services they provide. 

    Located near Charleston, South Carolina, the company operates from a two-acre property including four buildings. The seller owns the real estate and would rent it to the next owner for $3,500/month. The highly skilled and experienced team includes the Owner/President (who is willing to stay on as President or GM if desired by Buyer), 2 Project Managers, 3 Superintendents (2 of which are Assistant Project Managers), 1 Bookkeeper, and 1 Office Manager/Safety Coordinator.

    Work is steady throughout the year and most projects are completed within a 100-mile radius of the office; temperatures in the area are generally in the 40’s-80’s, so they rarely have to hold jobs due to weather delays. There are no licenses limiting geographical expansion.

    PRICE $6,200,000 CASH FLOW $1,472,747

  • 70+ Years for KC HVAC Design, Fabrication, and Installation

    With a 22,000 sq. ft. fabrication shop and 41 skilled personnel on staff, this HVAC design and installation company has been in operation for 70 years! Clients for this business include education, manufacturing, industrial, medical, government, and municipalities. The team is comprised of 9 office staff, along with 4 in the shop, 7 service staff, and 21 field employees. Not only do they specialize in new construction and renovation ventures, but they successfully work on refrigeration systems and manage projects as prime contractors as well.  The team focuses mainly on new construction (40%) and renovations (45%), and their service department accounts for 15% of annual revenues.  Prime contracts amount to about 15-20% of work performed. The service department performs approximately $1.5M per year, while hard bid projects are in the $10.5M range.

    This multi-faceted business is held in high regard by the general contractors, architects, and engineers in the Kansas City Metro.  Their increasing revenues show that this healthy business is growing organically through positive word-of-mouth reviews and high-quality workmanship. 

    Priced at $1,725,000, a new owner could easily continue the current successful trajectory, as well as grow the business by expanding the maintenance and service contracts.  The business operates from a complex that has ample space for all current operations with room for continued expansion.  A large 30,000 square foot building features a 22,000 square foot shop which is the fabrication hub and the remaining spaces (8,000 square feet) are utilized as storage warehousing.  The lots are both paved and offer plenty of parking and working space.   

    PRICE $1,725,000 CASH FLOW $676,827

  • Concrete Pumping for Schools & Hospitals – 90% Recurring Clients

    With over $10M in hard assets, this growing concrete business has 4 locations, 36 concrete pumps, a 90% recurring client base, and 57 employees in Southern California and Texas. The bulk of its contracts are municipal projects, such as K-12 Schools, Universities, Hospitals, and Government Agencies. With its specialized equipment and experienced teams, this business is able to take on projects that would be too large or too difficult for other contractors. The company’s customers are loyal, and since larger public projects and public works are rarely affected by economic changes, the business has been able to weather economic changes and continue to grow while other contractors have failed.

     

    The business boasts over $10M in hard assets and equipment, including 36 concrete pumps, making them one of the largest concrete companies in the nation. Moreover, the current owners have been efficient in their operations and have focused on sustainable and responsible growth. The owners approach this in two important ways: (1) They purchase all new equipment without incurring any long-term debt, and (2) The owners import their replacement parts from producers and wholesalers worldwide, which allows them to save 30-45% off what their competitors have to pay. Using these approaches, the company has over $2M in accounts receivable and ongoing work, and typically over 90% of AR is paid within 90 days. All this while remaining DEBT FREE!

     

    Well-trained managers and project leads are in place and the supporting administrative staff is knowledgeable and capable to handle day-to-day operations. A lot of new equipment was purchased in 2016 & 2017; generally, CapEx is less than $150,000/year.

     

    The owner is involved in daily operations as a manager and in an oversight capacity, and he is willing to stay on as president for 3-4 years. This is an excellent opportunity for any buyer, regardless of construction experience, as Seller will give you all the tools to succeed. Truly a turnkey business opportunity.

    With over $10M in hard assets, this growing concrete business has 4 locations, 36 concrete pumps, a 90% recurring client base, and 57 employees in Southern California and Texas. The bulk of its contracts are municipal projects, such as K-12 Schools, Universities, Hospitals, and Government Agencies. With its specialized equipment and experienced teams, this business is able to take on projects that would be too large or too difficult for other contractors. The company’s customers are loyal, and since larger public projects and public works are rarely affected by economic changes, the business has been able to weather economic changes and continue to grow while other contractors have failed.

     

    The business boasts over $10M in hard assets and equipment, including 36 concrete pumps, making them one of the largest concrete companies in the nation. Moreover, the current owners have been efficient in their operations and have focused on sustainable and responsible growth. The owners approach this in two important ways: (1) They purchase all new equipment without incurring any long-term debt, and (2) The owners import their replacement parts from producers and wholesalers worldwide, which allows them to save 30-45% off what their competitors have to pay. Using these approaches, the company has over $2M in accounts receivable and ongoing work, and typically over 90% of AR is paid within 90 days. All this while remaining DEBT FREE!

     

    Well-trained managers and project leads are in place and the supporting administrative staff is knowledgeable and capable to handle day-to-day operations. A lot of new equipment was purchased in 2016 & 2017; generally, CapEx is less than $150,000/year.

     

    The owner is involved in daily operations as a manager and in an oversight capacity, and he is willing to stay on as president for 3-4 years. This is an excellent opportunity for any buyer, regardless of construction experience, as Seller will give you all the tools to succeed. Truly a turnkey business opportunity.

     

    PRICE $17,250,000 CASH FLOW $2,367,719

  • Commercial Roofing with 16 Million in Backlog

     

     

    After 30 years in business, this 100% commercial roofing company has over 16 million in backlog and does 70% maintenance work! Their team includes 25 administrative staff members and a combined 60 metal workers and craftsman. The business will use subcontractors on a rare and minimal scale for specialty work. Their client base spans over a 120-mile radius of Erie, PA and consists of exclusively commercial clients, which, coupled with their excellent reputation, has led to their customer pool being made up of 60% recurring clients. Having been open for over 30 years, this business and team have been able to acquire an excellent reputation with their clients and have established profitable partnerships in their community and surrounding areas which keeps word of mouth marketing effective all year round. Though the owner is active in oversight and management, he is willing to stay on for 2 years post-close to not only train & transition, but to help find and train his replacement if the buyer desires. With over $6 million of assets included in the purchase, new ownership can expect to continue this business’s ongoing growth pattern without investing excessive resources into expanding opportunities. They fully self-perform all labor and have an extensive staff and established chain of command.

     

    This area is well known for their requirements of union-based employees and businesses for construction or repair work. Thankfully, this business is well intertwined with local unions, and 75% of their current projects come from those established partnerships. While they do some public work with these ties, expanding their partnerships and open bids to include more municipal work would be a huge opportunity for growth. Other opportunities would include expanding into residential work or growing the new installation side of business as their current primary focus is maintenance and repair.

     

    Priced at $14,950,000 a 10% down payment of $1,495,000 returns $1,619,957 in the first year after debt payments. The current owner is selling as part of his retirement strategy. 

     

    PRICE $14,950,000 CASH FLOW $3,615,422

  • IT Staffing Firm with Offshore Consultants

     

    This is IT staffing firm has 33 consultants on staff, 12 of which are US based and 21 are offshore in New Delhi, India. The consultant’s scope of work includes software development, information management and documentation systems, plus software analysis and testing for clients in the industries of transportation, medical, and financial. The aging owner is willing to stay on and transition for 1 year, he has also offered to financing 15% of the purchase price plus roll equity of 15% to show his commitment to the success of the future owner. The owner works no more than 2-3 hours per week and there is no physical office space as all contractors are 100% remote making this business highly profitable with no overhead. The cash flow is over $770,000 and is on a 4-year growth trend, the clients are 100% repeat and the average tenure of the client is over 15 years.

    Priced at $2,250,000, with its established reputation and track record, this business is well-positioned for an acquisition. A 10% down payment of $225,000 returns $398,172 in the first year after debt payments! There is no special license or designation required to operate this business. Looking at future growth opportunities, this business could benefit from hiring a business development or marketing person to expand its client list as there is no growth strategy currently being performed. Additionally, a new owner could sponsor visas for the off-shore consultants.

     

    PRICE $2,250,000 CASH FLOW $772,991

  • Midwest Based Truck Driver Training Center

     

    For over 20 years this niche business has been educating students to get their CDL with driver training classes. They have both classroom and active driver training using their 15 Semis. They are also accredited through the DMV as an official 3rd party CDL testing site with a truck driver. Throughout North America, this post high school career path brings students that are 30% from the Midwest states and 70% from across the US. They have a location in Nebraska, strategically located on the I-80 which is the most travelled US interstate for coast-to-coast hauling. The purchase price includes a fleet of 16 Tractor Trailer Semis, buildout classrooms, a full curriculum, plus a full class schedule as truck drivers remain in high demand throughout North America. Additionally, the owner is offering 10% financing plus a 2-year training period to ensure a smooth and successful transition. A tangible growth strategy is to add additional community colleges to their referral partners. After becoming licensed through their program, a driver can now earn $80,000/year for only a $4,000 investment into their tuition. In 2019, the Federal Government mandated that every person applying for a CDL must complete an approved program through a training school. This business is an approved school and fits all requirements for this change. Also, in the state of Nebraska, the Department of Motor Vehicles no longer offers CDL testing and all testing for CDL licenses will be done by 3rd party examiners. This business holds all certifications necessary for this transition as well.

    Priced at $2,950,000, a 10% down payment of $295,000 returns $357,431 in the first year after debt payments. The owner has offered to carry 15% of the purchase price in order to show their vested interest in the continued success of the business moving forward. Many individuals who pursue CDL training may need to travel to Kearney, Nebraska, to attend the program; by providing onsite accommodations or partnering with local lodging establishments, they can offer convenience and comfort to out-oftown students. Additionally, having a restaurant space can provide meals and refreshments during training sessions, further enhancing the overall experience for students.


    PRICE $2,950,000 CASH FLOW $877,942

  • Civil Engineering Practice Focused on Waste Water & Disaster Area Relief

     

     

    Civil engineering firm focused on waste water and disaster relief for suffering communities! Roughly 50% of the work they do comes from infrastructure grants, and 50% comes from referring engineering firms who lack the expertise in this niche of water and wastewater management. The firm does not bid to gain or win work; rather they have a niche in grant application processing. Their team of 11 consists of 2 Licensed Engineers, 5 Non-Licensed Engineers, and 4 in administration. They work out of a 2,600 square foot office space and have the necessary resources to accommodate their operations effectively. They work closely with cities, counties, and special districts to provide expertise in various aspects of engineering related to water and wastewater systems. This includes designing, planning, and implementing infrastructure projects such as water treatment plants, sewage systems, stormwater management, and other related facilities. They primarily serve the Central Valley of California, including clients in Kern County, Modesto, and Stockton. The current owner has decided to sell the firm in order to plan for retirement. The current owner’s responsibilities include general oversight with limited direct interactions with clients. As part of the transition process, he is willing to provide a training period of 1-2 years to ensure a smooth handover of the operation. This will allow the new owners to familiarize themselves with the business operations, client base, and ongoing projects. In addition to the 1-2 year training period, the seller has offered to carry 20% of the purchase price via seller financing and an equity roll.

    Priced at $7,000,000, this business is primed and ready for a new owner to step in and enjoy a reputation that has been built over the last 10 years. A 10% down payment of $700,000 returns $539,232 in the first year after debt payments, which is a 77% return on investment! The current owner provides light oversight, handling hiring processes, and managing invoicing. These responsibilities can be absorbed by the existing staff or delegated to new hires as the business transitions to new ownership. One of the growth opportunities lies in outsourcing the grant writing. With an increasing demand for infrastructure development and maintenance, there is significant potential for expansion in their area.

     

    PRICE $7,000,000 CASH FLOW $1,440,687

  • Architecture Firm in Calgary with 30% VTB

     

    The firm specializes in senior care facilities and commercial mixed-use properties, and in 2023, they nearly grossed 1.8 million in sales with $996,229 in cash flow, resulting in an impressive profit margin of 55%. The team of 9 employees consists of a Senior Project Manager, a Registered Senior Project Architect, an experienced staff architect in the process of acquiring their architecture registration, and 2 administrative employees handling project invoicing and accounting. This Calgary-based architecture firm, with a history of 34 years in the industry, has established itself as a reputable and dependable entity. The firm offers a comprehensive range of services, including architectural and master-planning solutions, from briefing to final certificate. The current owner, who actively works as an architect and oversees the general operations, has generously offered a 3-4-year training and transition period with the necessary retainment salary accounted for in the listed cash flow. Additionally, as a gesture of confidence in the firm's ongoing success, the owner has offered a 30% seller carry. While the firm primarily works with clients in Canada, it boasts an international portfolio, having completed projects in the US, India, China, Malaysia, and other countries. The owner has decided to sell the firm to plan for retirement. In addition to the long-standing reputation, a new owner will acquire a working capital between $300,000 - $500,000, which is included in the purchase price.

    Priced at $1,950,000, with a very low multiple of only 2.25. This architecture firm represents a highly reliable investment opportunity for larger firms looking to expand their portfolio, smaller architecture firms aiming to double in size, or young architects seeking their first step into the professional industry with an established portfolio and reputation.

     

    PRICE $1,950,000 CASH FLOW $996,229

  • Property Management with 85% Multi-Family: Owner will carry 25%

     

    A 15+ year established property management firm where the owner is seeking a strategic minded buyer with business acumen. As a show of good faith and vested interest in the ongoing success of the company the owner has offered to roll equity for up to 25% and provide a 4–5- year transition period. Their client mix is 85% multi-family housing/apartments, 10% single family homes (multi-unit), and 5% commercial made up of Property Investors, focused in multifamily living. The organization has developed a reputable presence, by serving Milwaukee & Kenosha Wisconsin. The owner oversees his leadership team and will do some site sourcing, as he still finds that enjoyable. His staff handles the day-to-day operations. The welldeveloped management team includes a Controller, two Senior Vice Presidents and a Superintendent. There are also 3 Property Managers, 3 in Maintenance, and 1 Office Administrator. The acquisition includes about $450K in assets which are company vehicles, deposits, and AR. Priced at $3,350,000, a 10% down payment will return $333,740 in the first year after debt payments. A 99% return on investment! Two banks have already pre-approved this loan for a qualified buyer with only 10% down and 65% from a lender. The upcoming growth coupled with a 34% profit margin makes this streamlined property management business a great opportunity.

     

    PRICE $3,350,000 CASH FLOW $799,385

  • Expert Witness Prep & Placement for Law Firms

     

    This opportunity is a litigation consulting and expert witness firm that provides business analysis and expert witness reports and testimony. They assist law firms and government agency clients. The focus is on identifying and retaining qualified experts. They are engaged throughout the duration of the case to support those experts. The firm also has special expertise in using social media analysis to develop litigation-ready evidence. This firm’s client base are top, recognizable Corporations, News Channels, and the Department of Justice, that need assistance finding expert witnesses, case analysis, witness reports, and trial strategy & preparation. With a stable team of 12; made up of mostly attorneys, law professors, MBAs, and accountants, the buyer does not need to be an attorney as the current owner is not. The owner has some roles in business development and staff oversight, though he has recently been offloading more of his client facing roles in order to prepare for a smooth transition. The seller has offered a transition period ranging from 1 to 2 years, he is willing to do seller financing or roll equity of 25% as a sign of good faith. All personnel work remotely, which drives their 44% profit margin and allows them to take on clients across the United States and throughout Canada.

    Priced at $6,150,000, this business offers a strategic buyer the opportunity to expand their practice or allows for an individual with legal experience looking to start their own practice. This consulting firm has a stable team, client base, and network that offer extreme growth opportunities moving forward. Options vary and include creating a division of the business to handle opposition research in order to find contradictions or indiscretions that would assist with discrediting the opposition’s expert witness, working with class action cases, and taking on cases for the International Trademark Association.

     

    PRICE $6,150,000 CASH FLOW $1,303,323

  • Professional PM Firm with over $120 Million in Contracted Work

     

    This professional PM and construction management firm plans and manages renovations and maintenance for military bases across the upper West Coast. Clients are 90% Federal/Government and 10% private hire, including the VA, Navy, US Coast Guard, Army, School Districts, and Apartments/Condos. There are typically 20-30 active jobs concurrently which represents a current WIP of $24,000,000 plus several multi-year contracts in backlog. A highly developed management team is in place where there are about 35 key employees, including a President, CFO, 4 Project Managers, 2 Engineers, 5 Superintendents, 2 Foreman, 5 Estimators, 4 Quality Control, plus Admin, IT, and Assistants. This allows the owner to work remotely, spending only 10 hours per week providing “strategic vision” to the leadership team. They have a 4+ year backlog with multi-year contracts with proprietary deal flow in over $120 Million in contracts. The Seller is willing to stay 2-3 years postclose and will also offer a promissory note and/or equity roll of 30% as a sign of good faith. With the purchase, a buyer would receive $2.9M in assets, including working capital and the vehicles and equipment needed to continue successfully. CapEx remains very low at less than $200K per year. Reoccurring clients are the VA, Federal Government, and the US Military. There will not be any impact on this business should there be a recession, Government shutdown or upcoming election. In fact, due to the passed US Infrastructure Bill, this business will have organic growth as the bill has billions of set asides for our military bases.

     

    PRICE $36,500,000 CASH FLOW $6,802,180

  • IT Managed Services with 85% Repeat Client Base

     

     

    This MSP firm provides services including network management, cloud computing, cybersecurity, data backup and recovery, and help desk support. They offer IT managed services including server architecture and design, hosting, system backups, VOIP solutions, network design, dedicated environments, platform hosting, shared servers, and 24/7 monitoring/ crisis control services. Additionally, they offer IT based staffing services which is an add on service only offered to existing clients. The company has an impressive 85% repeat client base, which speaks to the quality of their services and the trust they have built with their clients. For more than a decade this IT business based in Omaha has established itself as a reliable provider in the region, with a strong team in place of 3 IT engineers, 2 in sales and 2 in admin. The owner of the business is willing to carry a larger that standard, 25% of the sale and provide a 2-year transition as a sign of good faith. In 2022 the team earned their best year yet with an annual revenue over $8.7 Million and a 20% profit margin! Their client scope ranges from small to medium sized businesses with a focus in the banking industry. Growth opportunities for this business could include expanding into a tech help desk service.

    Priced at $8,975,000 this business with an excellent reputation for never losing a client is poised to deliver a stable and continually growing opportunity to the new owner. This presents an attractive opportunity for potential buyers looking to enter or expand in this market.

     

    PRICE $8,975,000 CASH FLOW $1,767,484

  • Barcode Solutions and Integration: 50% Collateralized

    With over $420,000 in assets included in purchase, this barcode solutions and integration business opportunity is over 50% collateralized. In addition to the hard assets offered with the business, this company has over 1,800 active customers in their client base made up of 55% resellers and 45% end-users! With services including barcode system integration, equipment maintenance, fulfillment, troubleshooting, and solutions, this business is able to operate nationwide and has some international customers as well. The bulk of their sales (65%) consists of media/consumables (labels, thermal transfer ribbons, thermal tags, warehouse signs); they also sell software (asset tracking, barcode label printing, inventory control/WMS software), and hardware (barcode scanners, label printers, receipt printers, etc.). The current staff is made up of 5 employees including 1 office and marketing manager, 1 east coast manager (based in Georgia), 1 part-time employee, 1 1099 sales representative (based in Chicago), and one owner who handles general oversite and some accounting and order processing. This owner has offered a training/ transition period of 3-5 years and their salary for this time period has been accounted for in the cash flow analysis.

     

    The company currently places their orders with nearly 240 vendors and keeps approximately $103K worth of inventory on hand at any given time. They pack and ship customer-specific orders daily and distribute the shipments locally as well as nationwide using United Parcel Service and LTL freight companies. This small but efficient team produced nearly $2M in sales in 2020 and is on track to make $2.4M in 2022. A new owner has the opportunity to expand into new industries or continue to run this successful business as-is.

     

    Priced at $815,000, a new owner is expected to see a 233% return on investment in the first year after debt payments based on the 2022 annualized cash flow and the loan needed for this purchase will be over 50% collateralized. Growth is unlimited, as there are untapped markets across the country. Small businesses all the way up to large retail chains need these services to keep up with ever-evolving technology while maintaining profitability and keeping costs low.

    PRICE $815,000 CASH FLOW $368,815

  • Temp Staffing with some Direct Hire Placement

     

    This staffing firm places full-service, temp-to-hire, and direct hire staffing ranging from part-time, short-term, or long-term opportunities, and several placements have remained in their positions for 10-15 years after placement. The agency specializes in fulfilling the needs of their diverse client base in the professional and clerical fields. Having been established 18 years ago, this agency is well respected and are currently receiving 5-10 new orders on a weekly basis, with a turnaround time of 2 weeks to 2 months. Servicing customers that range from small businesses to large corporations, they offer multiple routes of staffing solutions to fulfill any business’s needs. The team consists of 2 FT employees, 1 staffing specialist, and 1 on-call staffing coordinator as well as 55-60 temp employees on assignment. Located in Providence Rhode Island, the current staff operates out of a 1,100 square foot leased building with a reception area and private offices that are perfect for interviews and different skills or communication tests. The current owner has offered 1-2 years for a transition/training period to ensure as smooth a move as possible for staff, clients, and the new owner.

    Priced at $490,000, this business already has an established client pipeline in place with the majority of new business coming from word-of-mouth referrals. Partnering with this staffing firm resulted in direct hire business for the VP of Human Resources, Business Analysts, Business Consultants, Instructional Designer, and recruiting personnel including skill assessments and language assessments. A simple opportunity for new ownership to grow the business, and their current pipeline, would be to establish an internet presence consisting of both a website and social media accounts.

     

    PRICE $490,000 CASH FLOW $91,320

  • Fire Protection Engineering Firm in Texas – 60% Profit Margin

    The current Senior Consultant for this fire protection engineering firm has over 20 years of experience and would be able to assume the role of CEO under new ownership! With a 60% profit margin and year-over-year growth in sales for 3 years, this Dallas company has a highly skilled team of employees already in place who run the day-to-day operations.  Established for over 25 years, this firm provides a wide array of services in all phases of fire protection engineering, including building & fire code consulting & engineering, fire alarm systems, automatic sprinkler systems, smoke exhaust systems, fire modeling, plan review, and systems testing. Their diverse client base consists of design professionals (55%), contractors (25%), federal government (10%), and private owners (10%), with their service area covering primarily Texas and surrounding states. The collaborative team of 7 includes the owner, a licensed Fire Protection Engineer, along with 1 Senior Consultant, 1 Senior Designer, 3 Engineers, and 1 Administrative Assistant. The team is based out of 2,300 sq. ft. office in Dallas, with a small 200 sq. ft. satellite office in San Antonio.

     

    Plan review customers are a portion of their ongoing client base; plan review services provide recurring monthly revenue, as it is a service in constant demand and yields steady cash flow for the company, accounting for approximately 20% of their total revenue per year. The average plan review fee ranges from $500-$1,000. Project sale sizes range anywhere from $2k-$200k, with an average sale size of around $10k. The firm uses state-of-the-art software packages such as AutoCAD, Revit, HydraCAD, AutoSPRINK, CFAST, FDS, Egress, and Intelligibility.

     

    Priced at $5,900,000, this firm has seen year-over-year growth in sales for 3 years and a 5-year average profit margin of 47%. A solid team is already in place; they run the day-to-day operations, handle clients regularly, and complete projects successfully. Over the years, this firm has gained a  reputation for providing some of the best services when it comes to fire protection and planning, giving them steady word-of-mouth referrals. Pursuing more projects in colleges & universities, school districts, and in the industrial sector would certainly lead to continued growth.

    PRICE $5,900,000 CASH FLOW $1,239,860

  • Data Capture & Thermal Label Equipment Sales & Services – $3M+ in Revenue

    With a 96% recurring client base primarily in manufacturing, warehousing, distribution, and logistics, this Georgia-based company had nearly $4M in sales in 2020! This value-added reseller (VAR) focuses on traditional bar code technology, RFID technology, process improvement, equipment sales and service and custom software solutions. This company has also developed a Warehouse Mgmt. system that could be sold for $45K or if further developed for $60K. From solution concept to the design, development and implementation, their experienced team can deliver traditional mobile and wireless solutions. 60% of their revenue comes from sales of products like data capture equipment, printing equipment and labels while the remaining 40% is from services like custom software and web development, hardware repair and network installation. Their typical network installation project runs from $80K - over $250K with this company installing as much as 1M square feet of networks for their clients and in any given year completing 10-15 projects. Their networking portfolio encompasses small businesses to Fortune 500 facilities across the country with an impeccable track record.

     

    Helping their clients succeed for 15 years, this company provides custom tailored solutions and results as promised and on time. With over 20 years professional software and database development expertise in-house, their staff's strong coupling of technical and business knowledge allows them to provide clients with world class solutions to their needs. The team consists of 7 full time employees including a senior VP, office manager, software developers with decades of experience and a process improvement resource. They also have 2-3 part time technicians who work for them as needed.

     

    This company is proud to partner with some of the most successful and regarded companies in the IT industry like Zebra, Data Logic, Honeywell, and Epson to name a few. This company has an outstanding opportunity for growth through development and upgrade of their WMS as well as going after more network installation projects.

    PRICE $1,840,000 CASH FLOW $589,682

B2B: Services/Wholesalers/Suppliers (25)

  • Maintenance in Commercial Roofing: Reoccurring

     

    Their client base is made up of 100% commercial clients including consultants, general contractors, private real estate owners, construction managers, and municipalities, 65% of whom are repeat clients. With 95 W2 Employees, this commercial roofing business is able to self-perform 100% of their labor. With $16M already lined up in backlog (committed contracts), they are on target to have the best year ever in 2023, and there is no sign of slowing down in 2023! Their services include reroofing/scheduled replacement (50%), new construction (40%), and general repair & maintenance (10%) and are able to service a wide service area including a 75-mile radius of Akron. The sale of this business includes $5M in assets, including 30+ trucks & trailers, and $2.6M in equipment. This means that new ownership would be able to easily build on current growth opportunities without needing to invest excessive resources to do so. Growth opportunities include going after more maintenance/service work, sheet metal projects, and the recently approved US Infrastructure Bill will also provide growth across the municipal clients they work with. The company is a mixture of union and non-union, with the union side making up 80% of their total sales and 60% of their current projects. Generally, they are the largest employer on a month-tomonth basis in the union, they employ an average of 44 roofers and 15 sheet metal workers per day with a fairly even split of new construction vs. renovation, and mostly in the public sector. There are a large number of institutions in the area that require union members to perform their projects. The non-union side is more in the private sector, with 80% of their revenue comprised of new construction. Priced at $14,950,000, this business is primed for new ownership with already long-standing client relationships in place, an excellent reputation, and a strong word of mouth job pipeline. The owners are looking forward to retiring out of state, but the two active owners are more than happy to stay on board post-close to ensure a smooth transition. Owner 1 handles the oversight and management, as well as review of estimates and would stay for 1 year, Owner 2 handles the day-to-day operations and would stay for 2 years, and Owner 3 (absentee) does not need replacing. They would be willing to retain equity or carry a note for 15%, showing their vested interest in the ongoing success on the company.

    PRICE $14,950,000 CASH FLOW $2,592,337

  • Fire Protection Engineering Firm in Texas – 60% Profit Margin

    The current Senior Consultant for this fire protection engineering firm has over 20 years of experience and would be able to assume the role of CEO under new ownership! With a 60% profit margin and year-over-year growth in sales for 3 years, this Dallas company has a highly skilled team of employees already in place who run the day-to-day operations.  Established for over 25 years, this firm provides a wide array of services in all phases of fire protection engineering, including building & fire code consulting & engineering, fire alarm systems, automatic sprinkler systems, smoke exhaust systems, fire modeling, plan review, and systems testing. Their diverse client base consists of design professionals (55%), contractors (25%), federal government (10%), and private owners (10%), with their service area covering primarily Texas and surrounding states. The collaborative team of 7 includes the owner, a licensed Fire Protection Engineer, along with 1 Senior Consultant, 1 Senior Designer, 3 Engineers, and 1 Administrative Assistant. The team is based out of 2,300 sq. ft. office in Dallas, with a small 200 sq. ft. satellite office in San Antonio.

     

    Plan review customers are a portion of their ongoing client base; plan review services provide recurring monthly revenue, as it is a service in constant demand and yields steady cash flow for the company, accounting for approximately 20% of their total revenue per year. The average plan review fee ranges from $500-$1,000. Project sale sizes range anywhere from $2k-$200k, with an average sale size of around $10k. The firm uses state-of-the-art software packages such as AutoCAD, Revit, HydraCAD, AutoSPRINK, CFAST, FDS, Egress, and Intelligibility.

     

    Priced at $5,900,000, this firm has seen year-over-year growth in sales for 3 years and a 5-year average profit margin of 47%. A solid team is already in place; they run the day-to-day operations, handle clients regularly, and complete projects successfully. Over the years, this firm has gained a  reputation for providing some of the best services when it comes to fire protection and planning, giving them steady word-of-mouth referrals. Pursuing more projects in colleges & universities, school districts, and in the industrial sector would certainly lead to continued growth.

    PRICE $5,900,000 CASH FLOW $1,239,860

  • Commercial Roofing – 100% Recurring Clients – No Storm Chasing

     

    This commercial roofing business has nearly 100% repeat customer base – there is no storm chasing. In 2024, there is already $12M in backlog and $6.5M in work in progress. Most of their projects are completed in less than one year, services are varied including, covering membrane roofing, metal roofing, sheet metal, slate & tile steep slope roofing, waterproofing, plaza pavers, and solar installation and repairs. Their well-developed team of 51 is made up of 1 Controller, 1 HR Manager, 1 Superintendent, 2 Project Managers, 3 Estimators, 1 Accounting Assistant, and 42 Laborers. The owner coordinates with the Controller & Superintendent, along with overseeing banking. He is confident that the Controller & Superintendent are qualified and capable of operating the company. With the purchase of this company, a buyer would receive $3.3M in assets, which includes $630K in equipment (forklifts, air compressors, generators, safety equipment, boom lifts, anything needed for their jobs), 16 vehicles, computers, FF&E, office software, and working capital. The business operates out of a 16,000 sq. ft. facility with 4,000 sq. ft. of office space.

    Priced at $7,200,000, this company is poised for a seamless transition. The owner is willing to carry up to 10% of the price and has offered to stay on board for 1-2 years, showing a vested interest in the ongoing success of the company. Currently there is no marketing or outside sales taking place, and there is a lot of untapped potential on the solar side of the business, which will greatly improve revenues and profit margins.

     

     

    PRICE $7,200,000 CASH FLOW $1,795,945

  • Logistics and Sourcing for Bulk Material

     

    This business sources materials for infrastructure developments, utilities, roads, and bridges. They source materials from over 20+ national manufacturers and vendors. They offer their services for municipal job sites where Prime Contractors are performing utility and bridge installations, including ductile/concrete pipe, precast storm drainage & utility structures, cast iron manholes, and inlet frames/covers. With the thought of a “recession” looming, this company will be growing, as the newly passed Infrastructure Bill will directly impact this company’s revenue and shield them from economic downfall. The team includes 1 VP, 1 Controller, 1 Estimator, and 1 Administrative Specialists. The current owner oversees the team, meeting with key employees when needed, and provides business development strategies. As a show of good faith and vested interest in the ongoing success of the company, the current owner is willing to hold a promissory note for up to 10% of the total price. He is also happy to stay on board for 1 year post close to ensure a smooth transition. New ownership can expect to step into a stable investment with three locations, including a primary location in Delaware and satellite locations in Georgia and Florida. After building this business and operating in this industry for 20 years, the current owner is ready for a change of pace and is interested in exploring the next chapter of his life. Priced at $2,650,000 this business has an established business operation and enough stability for a new owner to step in and continue operating the business as is. This opportunity also affords new owners enough flexibility to change things up and try out some new growth routes.

    PRICE $2,650,000 CASH FLOW $731,745

  • Fabrication of Doors, Cabinets, and Lockers – No Installation

     

    A fabrication business that specializes in the manufacturing of cabinet, louvre and locker doors for over 40 years. They primarily operate as a business-to-business (B2B) company, with approximately 98% of their sales being made to other businesses with a niche in health clubs and golf courses. They produce raw products, but do not engage in the design process. Instead, the B2B clients submit the design, which is then brought to life through their manufacturing capabilities. This company does not install the doors, nor do they work with the end user. The established team in place consists of a a Bookkeeper and 8 Fabrication Technicians. Additionally, the seller has agreed to a 1-year transition period in order to provide a smooth transition. The assets included in the purchase price have a replacement value of $1,880,240 and the current backlog is at $203,428. This business is located in the growing community of Montrose Colorado, which is roughly 45 minutes away from Grand Junction. The spacious facility is 14,298 square foot with ample room for expansion.

    Priced at $890,000, this business has established itself as a reputable player in the door manufacturing industry. The current owner is selling this business in order to plan for retirement and has offered to carry 10% of the purchase price in order to show vested interest in the continued success of the business. A 10% down payment of $89,000 returns $246,001 in the first year after debt payments! They do not engage in metalwork or plastics. Additionally, they do not provide any hardware or finishing services. Their manufacturing process solely involves working with raw materials and does not require the use of chemicals or spray finishes.

     

    PRICE $890,000 CASH FLOW $300,218

  • Network, Servers and MSP Business with Multi-Year Contracts

     

    In 2023, the firm has renewed their 3-year contracts with their larger clients for the third time! Providing IT and Network Management, security & visualization software, backup servers and Network Infrastructure to corporations and banks since 2015. The owner is selling because he would like to join a larger firm via acquisition; and he has offered a 3+ year transition plus is willing to finance 15%. This demonstrates the good faith vested interest in the continued success of the business plus mitigates any risk to the buyer. The revenue breakout is as follows: SaaS - 31%, Service/Project/Labor - 45%, Software and Hardware - 24%. About 80% of the client base is in the Greater Salt Lake region with the other 20% being national. The company utilizes specialized software, such as Datto RMM, Datto, BCDR, Autotask PSA, Auvik, Lionguard Scale Computing, DataCore, Windows, Citrix Apps, Citrix Hypervisor, Citrix ADC, and Sophos Central Endpoint.

    Priced at $1,075,000, a 10% down payment of $107,500 returns $151,845 in the first year after debt payments – a 141% return on investment! Producing a 46% profit margin and year over year top line growth for 5 years since 2018 with a solid customer base intact and an abundance of documentation on each client, a transition would be seamless for an already existing IT management company that is looking to grow the own client list and revenue.

     

    PRICE $1,075,000 CASH FLOW $315,063

  • Wholesale of Niche Goods with 46,000 sq. ft. of Distribution Space

     

    Their distribution facility ships to over 800 B2B customers across the Continental US, made up of truck stops, grocery store chains, ecommerce companies, and more. There is a good mix of wholesale clients versus dropship orders where no inventory is held. The business has a highly diverse portfolio of more than 40 vendors, such as Riddell, WinCraft, and Fremont Die. There is a strong leadership team in place, including a President, Controller, Purchasing Manager, and Sales Director, plus a full warehouse & shipping team. The tenured President will stay in place as operator if the buyer desires. The owner resides out of state and has a very minimal role. The assets included are valued at $2,025,000, these assets are licensed sports team novelty items, a forklift, extensive warehouse shelving, pallet shrink wrapper, packaging equipment, pallet racking, and leasehold improvements. The company produced nearly $9M in revenue in 2022, putting $1.2M to the bottom line. Boasting over 300 types of products ranging across accessories, gifts, home goods, and gear, they have something for every fan. They do not sell shoes, clothes, or sports equipment. Their most popular product brands include products associated with the NFL, MLB, NBA, MLS, NGH, Nascar, US Army, Jack Daniels, and Harley Davidson.

    Priced at $5,700,000, this business includes 2 million in assets, a strong team, and solid reputation and history, putting a new owner in the perfect position to continue operating and growing successfully. Over 3 decades ago, this company started with the teenage owner who sold his first baseball card; now over 30 years later, this business thrives in the distribution of sports products & highly recognizable brands. The owner is willing to finance 10% and/or retain 5% equity, as a show of good faith in the ongoing success of the business. A 10% down payment of $570,000 returns $618,947 in the first year after debt payments!

     

     

    PRICE $5,700,000 CASH FLOW $1,300,112

  • Property Management with 85% Multi-Family: Owner will carry 25%

     

    A 15+ year established property management firm where the owner is seeking a strategic minded buyer with business acumen. As a show of good faith and vested interest in the ongoing success of the company the owner has offered to roll equity for up to 25% and provide a 4–5- year transition period. Their client mix is 85% multi-family housing/apartments, 10% single family homes (multi-unit), and 5% commercial made up of Property Investors, focused in multifamily living. The organization has developed a reputable presence, by serving Milwaukee & Kenosha Wisconsin. The owner oversees his leadership team and will do some site sourcing, as he still finds that enjoyable. His staff handles the day-to-day operations. The welldeveloped management team includes a Controller, two Senior Vice Presidents and a Superintendent. There are also 3 Property Managers, 3 in Maintenance, and 1 Office Administrator. The acquisition includes about $450K in assets which are company vehicles, deposits, and AR. Priced at $3,350,000, a 10% down payment will return $333,740 in the first year after debt payments. A 99% return on investment! Two banks have already pre-approved this loan for a qualified buyer with only 10% down and 65% from a lender. The upcoming growth coupled with a 34% profit margin makes this streamlined property management business a great opportunity.

     

    PRICE $3,350,000 CASH FLOW $799,385

  • Expert Witness Prep & Placement for Law Firms

     

    This opportunity is a litigation consulting and expert witness firm that provides business analysis and expert witness reports and testimony. They assist law firms and government agency clients. The focus is on identifying and retaining qualified experts. They are engaged throughout the duration of the case to support those experts. The firm also has special expertise in using social media analysis to develop litigation-ready evidence. This firm’s client base are top, recognizable Corporations, News Channels, and the Department of Justice, that need assistance finding expert witnesses, case analysis, witness reports, and trial strategy & preparation. With a stable team of 12; made up of mostly attorneys, law professors, MBAs, and accountants, the buyer does not need to be an attorney as the current owner is not. The owner has some roles in business development and staff oversight, though he has recently been offloading more of his client facing roles in order to prepare for a smooth transition. The seller has offered a transition period ranging from 1 to 2 years, he is willing to do seller financing or roll equity of 25% as a sign of good faith. All personnel work remotely, which drives their 44% profit margin and allows them to take on clients across the United States and throughout Canada.

    Priced at $6,150,000, this business offers a strategic buyer the opportunity to expand their practice or allows for an individual with legal experience looking to start their own practice. This consulting firm has a stable team, client base, and network that offer extreme growth opportunities moving forward. Options vary and include creating a division of the business to handle opposition research in order to find contradictions or indiscretions that would assist with discrediting the opposition’s expert witness, working with class action cases, and taking on cases for the International Trademark Association.

     

    PRICE $6,150,000 CASH FLOW $1,303,323

  • GC Management of Tenant Buildout: All Labor is Subcontracted

     

    This remotely operated commercial remodel and renovation business is working for repeat, long tenured clients across the United States, such as Leslie Pools and Michaels! Established in 1993, they have high levels of repeat customers and referral-based work. There is a strong backlog for 2024 and there is no self-performing labor! With their clients and contractors across the country, they utilize a vetted group of regional contractors that they have had for many tenured years. This business is fully relocatable and can be managed from anywhere, the owner handles project oversite and client relations. The seller is looking to retire, but to make the transition process as easy as possible, he has offered a training period of up to 1 year for a new owner, plus he is willing to carry a 15% promissory note. The W2 staff consists of 1 office administrator and 1 supervisor. Although there is no inventory to manage, the seller does have equipment and vehicles used for minor alterations – these assets have been valued at $192,527 resulting in a very low capex!

    Priced at $1,495,000, a 10% down payment of $149,500 returns $329,889 in the first year after debt payments! A 220% return on investment! This business would be an ideal opportunity for a new entrepreneur looking to buy a business with tenured established, no equipment needed. This could also be a good fit for a strategic buyer wanting to expand their geographic client base or expand into the commercial space. Either way, with their long-standing reputation for customer service and flexibility, extensive growth opportunities, and streamlined operation this business has an excellent foundation to expand upon.

     

    PRICE $1,495,000 CASH FLOW $533,762

  • Boston Based Interior Design Firm focused on Procurement

     

    For over 30 years this Boston based firm has catered to their portfolio of repeat commercial clients. This multi-faceted group of designers and purchasing agents specialize in providing complete services for both new construction and refurbishing of commercial interiors. The team consists of 1 Design Director, 1 Senior Designer, 1 Designer, 1 Purchasing Agent, and 1 Bookkeeper. The business has an impressive client portfolio that includes renowned names like, Hilton Hotels, Marriott International/Starwood Hotels, Hyatt Hotels Corporation, TAJ Hotels, members of the Royal families of Qatar, The Kingdom of Saudi Arabia, the Prime Minister of Turkey, and has completed more than 220 condo high-rises, hotels & restaurants. The owner does not do any billable work but oversees strategy and interfaces with key employees, he has limited client interaction as he is only in the office three days per week. The current owner of this profitable design and architecture firm is willing to stay on for 2-4 years to help ease the transition and is offering to carry 10% of the purchase price plus roll equity of 10% to show good faith in the future success of this firm. The current owner is a newlywed, looking to sell this business so he can move out of state.

    Priced at $1,075,000, with nearly 2 million in sales and consistent cashflow, this business is primed for a new owner to step in and reap the benefits of this established firm. There is an opportunity for growth in the business development of this organization as most of their clients are repeat/existing base.

     

    PRICE $1,075,000 CASH FLOW $300,018

  • Packaging & Wholesale of Holistic Goods: Owner will stay 5 years and carry 40%

    Boasting sales of $30MM, this B2B business has two primary client types: smaller wholesalers and direct to shop owners. Services include wholesale, coordinating manufacturing, packaged development with fulfillment, and arranging logistics through 3rd party freight. This team includes a CFO, General Manager, VP of Sales, Retail Lead, 2 Manufacturing Leads, Warehouse Lead, 4 Warehouse Associates, 5 In House Sales Reps, 24 Packagers, and 19 Outside Sales Reps. They do not have any drivers, all are outsourced. They focus mainly on Distribution and Logistics to other smaller wholesalers which make up 59% of their revenue, while 38% is sold Business to Business to multi location owners; less than 3% is sold direct to the consumer and this is intentional for research and development purposes. The current owner recently reinvested significant amounts of time and money into expanding operations, including moving to a distribution center twice the size to handle the growth. They operate out of a 12,000 sq. ft. distribution facility in Southern California. In 2023 they added another distribution center in Florida. The goal for selling is to expand with a Strategic Buyer or Equity Group who can bring strong business acumen. The owner will remain on board for 4-5 years and is willing to do a 40% carry or equity roll combo as a sign of a vested interest in the business’s success. Currently there are 36 States who have recognized these Low-Dose consumables as a legal product and there are projected to be another 7 states that will follow suit in the next 6-9 months. The business does not sell any traditional cannabis products but rather regulated hemp which allows them to legally sell across state lines.

    This business is priced at $49,000,000, producing a 30% profit margin! There are 43 well-known and respectably sized Private Equity Groups and dozens of publicly traded companies that own very similar businesses! Another growth area is in manufacturing, bringing it in house to boost productivity.

     

    PRICE $49,000,000 CASH FLOW $9,835,970

  • IT Managed Services with 85% Repeat Client Base

     

     

    This MSP firm provides services including network management, cloud computing, cybersecurity, data backup and recovery, and help desk support. They offer IT managed services including server architecture and design, hosting, system backups, VOIP solutions, network design, dedicated environments, platform hosting, shared servers, and 24/7 monitoring/ crisis control services. Additionally, they offer IT based staffing services which is an add on service only offered to existing clients. The company has an impressive 85% repeat client base, which speaks to the quality of their services and the trust they have built with their clients. For more than a decade this IT business based in Omaha has established itself as a reliable provider in the region, with a strong team in place of 3 IT engineers, 2 in sales and 2 in admin. The owner of the business is willing to carry a larger that standard, 25% of the sale and provide a 2-year transition as a sign of good faith. In 2022 the team earned their best year yet with an annual revenue over $8.7 Million and a 20% profit margin! Their client scope ranges from small to medium sized businesses with a focus in the banking industry. Growth opportunities for this business could include expanding into a tech help desk service.

    Priced at $8,975,000 this business with an excellent reputation for never losing a client is poised to deliver a stable and continually growing opportunity to the new owner. This presents an attractive opportunity for potential buyers looking to enter or expand in this market.

     

    PRICE $8,975,000 CASH FLOW $1,767,484

  • Refrigerated Food Transportation & Distribution with Consistently Reliable Demand

    This transportation and distribution business operates in an industry that is continually high in demand as they handle food products that require a refrigerated and/or climate-controlled environment. This consistency has led to the business seeing continual year over year growth in their gross sales, including in 2020 when many companies struggled to continue their operation. This company boasts an impressive 85% repeat customer base and over 30 years of experience in their industry. While they primarily handle food transportation, they also offer warehousing services which makes up 10% of their annual revenue. There is an abundance of space allotted for physical expansion in their 20,000 square foot facility – 18,800 sq. ft. of this space is for warehousing, with 1,200 sq. ft. being utilized as an office space. Having been extremely well established, this business has accumulated an excellent reputation and industry leading staff. Their team is made up of 28 employees: 3 team leads, 2 dispatchers, 13 long haul drivers, 4 local drivers, and 6 warehouse workers. This full team allows them to self-perform all of their deliveries and eliminates any need for outside contractors.

     

    The purchase of this business includes over $1.3M in assets, including nearly $700K in vehicles and equipment, along with $600K in working capital. The services provided are 100% B2B, serving food production companies all over the US.  Some of these clients have been around since shortly after the company’s inception in 1989!  Even with the heavy percentage of repeating clients, their annual revenue is widely distributed across several different clients, resulting in minimal customer concentration. They also consistently add new clients to the mix as well, allowing for year over year growth in revenue over the last several years. 

     

    While both owners do have some involvement in the business, both are committed to seeing the business continue successfully and would be willing to stay on for 1-3 years post-close.  During this time, they will train and transition the business to new ownership, while also finding and training any replacement needed. To further demonstrate their vested dedication in the ongoing success of this business, they are willing to offer a seller carry rate of 15%, which is above the industry standard of 10%.

     

    Priced at $3,415,000, this business is ready for new ownership to take over and continue the pattern of growth to build on their current long-standing legacy.

     

    PRICE $3,415,000 CASH FLOW $854,730

  • Commercial Plumbing Outside of Detroit with Tenured Staff

     

     

    The company comes with a well-established team of 11 including 7 field technicians, 2 estimators, 1 bookkeeper, and 1 admin. This business has a client base made up of 80% repeat customers in a variety of industries including the industrial sector, the healthcare field, and municipal clients. Services that are offered include plumbing (which makes up 75% of service base) and pipefitting (25% of service base). The master plumbing license is not held by current ownership but instead is held by one of the team members. Based in Detroit, Michigan, this well-established business is centrally located between Ann Arbor, Flint, Detroit, and Toledo. This is because the current owner is looking for a strategic buyer to grow the business further and is planning to stay on with the business for 2-3 years to assist in this anticipated growth and ensure a smooth transition. The team works out of 5,000 sq. ft. building with 3,500 sq. ft. dedicated to the shop, with the remaining space dedicated to the office for a low $2,250 per month. This plumbing and piping business is primed for new ownership, with the projected $1,000,000 in backlog and $600,000 of new projects in their pipeline to be bid on. The current owner is active in the business overseeing estimates and visiting job sites once a week. This includes vehicles, equipment, tools, trailer, and a working capital of $247,709 which, altogether, add up to be valued at $588,297.

    Priced at $925,000, the purchase of this company includes all the assets that new ownership will need to continue and grow the current business operation. There is plenty of room to expand operations both in the amount of space currently leased and in the opportunities that a buyer could easily take advantage of to see an ongoing development. With their exponentially high rate of return clients, an added marketing or advertising campaign could be expected to result in ongoing dividends of returning clients for years to come. A 10% down payment of $92,500 returns $87,674 in the first year after debt payments!

    PRICE $925,000 CASH FLOW $225,064

  • Design and Mail Marketing Company: Established 30 Years

    This medical mailer design and fulfillment business produces a specific niche product necessary to its industry for donation collection. This is well illustrated by their 300+ current clients in the medical, nonprofit, and dental fields. This excellent reputation, coupled with their top-notch work ethic, has led to many of their top clients continually returning for 10+ years. This mid-sized establishment has been servicing and creating business partnerships within the Omaha area for over 30 years. They can remain flexible on jobs that bigger companies would not be able to accept and skilled enough to be more efficient and reliable than smaller firms. Thanks to their skilled and established staff of 18 employees which include 2 Managers, a senior customer service representative, 8 production workers, 2 maintenance workers, their services can be utilized for a range of products including educational seminars and conference. To fill the consistent and diverse needs of these clients, the business purchase includes over $330,000 work of assets which collateralizes 63% of the bank loan needed.

     

    In addition to current services provided, the firm has room to grow outside of traditional printing jobs by utilizing staff’s current ability to handle layout, online marketing, and shipping services to expand further into the online field that can often be preferred in today’s market. The current owner is willing to assist with a smooth transition by offering at least one year of training which could also be used to assist in hiring and training an in store general manager if new ownership would prefer a hands-off management style.

     

    With a purchase price of $440,000 and a down payment of $44,000, a buyer would see a 634% return on investment of $278,938 in the first year after debt payments! This business is well set for a new owner to step in and continue the incredible legacy that has been built over the years. 

    PRICE $440,000 CASH FLOW $345,743

  • Lead, Mold, and Air Testing for Corporate and Municipal Clients

     

     

    This business offers vital services, including inspection and sampling of air monitoring, water & mold sampling, and air & lead inspections. With over 40 years of experience, this business completes work in three states – Arkansas, Mississippi, and 90% in Louisiana. Along with their corporate clients, they also serve banks, school districts, and municipalities. Included in the sale is over $180,000 in assets, including several trucks, trailers, and XRF analyzer, and AR, which makes this bank loan over 50% collateralized. Their location includes an office, 7 total storage facilities, an equipment shed, and covered parking area (all at the same location). The reason for the sale is because the owner was given a cancer diagnosis (now in remission), however, she is willing to train and transition a new owner for 6 months to 1 year, as well as carry 10% of the list price in a note! The staff consists of 2 full time employees, a part time bookkeeper, and subcontractors that are hired as needed. While the seller does assist with bidding, the employees on staff are trained to do so as well and can absorb this responsibility with ease.

    At a price of $440,000, and a down payment of $44,000, a buyer would expect to see a return of $143,044 in the first year after debt payments! The business also has a low multiple of 2.15 with a profit margin of 30%, call for an appointment!

     

     

    PRICE $440,000 CASH FLOW $206,395

  • Moving Company with Diversity in Corporate, Military, And Residential Packing, Hauling, or Storing

    This moving company has been serving Oregon and Washington for 2 decades expanding in over 10 strategic locations. Their services range from office/business moving, contracted military moves, some residential; they also offer packing/crating and warehousing in their storage sites. Consistently growing between 5-10% in revenue is attributed to their very strong organization chart of a P.T. resident CFO, leadership team and regional managers. This allows for passive ownership with the current owner only needing to be present for 2 meetings per month as all of his roles have been absorbed for the last several years. Conservatively projecting $31,000,000 in revenue this year, they will earn 14% profit margin from the clear processes and procedures their divisions have in place. These include call centers, sales, marketing and IT, and drivers.

     

    The business has recently started a mobile pod division, allowing them to provide further services to different types of clients and continue the overall growth.  Other opportunities include small, inexpensive acquisitions to expand the territory, also they are adding server farm moving and hauling. With their excellent reputation as well as their existing client base and locations they have a service area spanning across local, interstate, and international clients. At a purchase price of $26,000,000, there is an option for the seller to not only provide a 10% seller carry, but to also retain 15% in equity if desired. This is being done to show the vested interest in the ongoing success of the business post-close.  

    PRICE $26,000,000 CASH FLOW $4,340,000

  • Pet Nutrition Manufacturer, Competent Staff and High Reputation

    This business manufacturers custom pet supplements for clients who then private label the product and sell it under their name on ecommerce sites such as Amazon. The clients do not own the formulations, they only private label. This business is stable, with the current owner willing to carry 20% of the financing as a show of faith, and also is willing to consult long-term with the new owner. The extremely capable team gives a new owner the flexibility to move to absentee ownership, or alternatively to focus on growth.

     

    The business sells custom-order to 20+ clients, who then sell the product through ecommerce sites. Product categories include pet treat supplements, dog probiotics and dental sticks, and powder supplements. The close-knit six-person staff is extremely competent, with the number one employee capable of managing all day-to-day operations. The owner currently mostly offers high-level direction and works 20 hours a week. A new owner has the freedom to become more or less involved than this as they please.

     

    If the new owner chooses to invest into growth, several promising routes are available. Currently this business does absolutely no sales, so bringing on a salesperson is one option. Launching the company’s own brand is another exciting avenue, as well as expanding into other product and animal categories.

     

    This business comes with $950,000 of tangible assets including pet nutrition product mixers and a new dog dental product machine.

     

    Priced at $2,935,000, a 15% down payment of $440,250 returns $407,034 in the first year after debt payments! 

    PRICE $2,935,000 CASH FLOW $839,202

  • Barcode Solutions and Integration: 50% Collateralized

    With over $420,000 in assets included in purchase, this barcode solutions and integration business opportunity is over 50% collateralized. In addition to the hard assets offered with the business, this company has over 1,800 active customers in their client base made up of 55% resellers and 45% end-users! With services including barcode system integration, equipment maintenance, fulfillment, troubleshooting, and solutions, this business is able to operate nationwide and has some international customers as well. The bulk of their sales (65%) consists of media/consumables (labels, thermal transfer ribbons, thermal tags, warehouse signs); they also sell software (asset tracking, barcode label printing, inventory control/WMS software), and hardware (barcode scanners, label printers, receipt printers, etc.). The current staff is made up of 5 employees including 1 office and marketing manager, 1 east coast manager (based in Georgia), 1 part-time employee, 1 1099 sales representative (based in Chicago), and one owner who handles general oversite and some accounting and order processing. This owner has offered a training/ transition period of 3-5 years and their salary for this time period has been accounted for in the cash flow analysis.

     

    The company currently places their orders with nearly 240 vendors and keeps approximately $103K worth of inventory on hand at any given time. They pack and ship customer-specific orders daily and distribute the shipments locally as well as nationwide using United Parcel Service and LTL freight companies. This small but efficient team produced nearly $2M in sales in 2020 and is on track to make $2.4M in 2022. A new owner has the opportunity to expand into new industries or continue to run this successful business as-is.

     

    Priced at $815,000, a new owner is expected to see a 233% return on investment in the first year after debt payments based on the 2022 annualized cash flow and the loan needed for this purchase will be over 50% collateralized. Growth is unlimited, as there are untapped markets across the country. Small businesses all the way up to large retail chains need these services to keep up with ever-evolving technology while maintaining profitability and keeping costs low.

    PRICE $815,000 CASH FLOW $368,815

  • Upstate New York Environmental Services

     

    This upstate New York company provides environmental services regionally and has generally low inventory, as everything needed is purchase based on the job at hand.  This company provides asbestos removal, lead remediation, and fireproofing services.  They are consistently seeing year over year growth and hit over $8M in revenue in 2021!  They have been established in upstate New York since 2012.

     

    Most business is accomplished in Upstate New York (85%), with the remaining work completed in the New York City area.  Customers include government organizations, state agencies, general contractors, construction managers, property managers, and property owners.  Project timelines are from a few weeks to a several months long and most contracts (85%) are earned through a request for proposal process.  Rarely subcontractors are utilized for large projects or those at long distances.  Supporting this team are two supervisors, one accountant, and one team assistant. 

     

    The company operates from a small office and warehouse space.  Purchasing and storing large amounts of equipment is not necessary as this business rents any large items needed to complete projects and houses very few assets on site.  All inventory and materials are ordered by project and may be briefly stored by this business or drop-shipped to the work site. 

     

    Priced at $898,000, a 12.5% down payment returns $147,250 in the first year after debt payments – a 131% return on investment! Opportunities are plentiful for growth in the New York City Area as well as widening the service area to include New Jersey, Pennsylvania, or additional regions of New York.

    PRICE $898,000 CASH FLOW $262,089

  • Temp Staffing with some Direct Hire Placement

     

    This staffing firm places full-service, temp-to-hire, and direct hire staffing ranging from part-time, short-term, or long-term opportunities, and several placements have remained in their positions for 10-15 years after placement. The agency specializes in fulfilling the needs of their diverse client base in the professional and clerical fields. Having been established 18 years ago, this agency is well respected and are currently receiving 5-10 new orders on a weekly basis, with a turnaround time of 2 weeks to 2 months. Servicing customers that range from small businesses to large corporations, they offer multiple routes of staffing solutions to fulfill any business’s needs. The team consists of 2 FT employees, 1 staffing specialist, and 1 on-call staffing coordinator as well as 55-60 temp employees on assignment. Located in Providence Rhode Island, the current staff operates out of a 1,100 square foot leased building with a reception area and private offices that are perfect for interviews and different skills or communication tests. The current owner has offered 1-2 years for a transition/training period to ensure as smooth a move as possible for staff, clients, and the new owner.

    Priced at $490,000, this business already has an established client pipeline in place with the majority of new business coming from word-of-mouth referrals. Partnering with this staffing firm resulted in direct hire business for the VP of Human Resources, Business Analysts, Business Consultants, Instructional Designer, and recruiting personnel including skill assessments and language assessments. A simple opportunity for new ownership to grow the business, and their current pipeline, would be to establish an internet presence consisting of both a website and social media accounts.

     

    PRICE $490,000 CASH FLOW $91,320

  • Commercial AC & Refrigeration Repair & Installation Service

    Established in 1997, this HVAC company located on Maui is known as the #1 refrigeration and air-conditioning company. Well known in the area for their excellent and prompt service and customer care, their excellent team consists of 16 employees, including trusted technicians, office staff, and installation managers. Due to the excellent reputation and efficient team, the owner of this successful HVAC company enjoys 3-4 months out of state each year! The business’s services are equally split between equipment service and installation. Their client base is made up of 90% commercial clients including condos, shopping centers, restaurants, and office buildings. They also service premium private residents. While the business had a small dip in revenue in 2020 due to covid, with a gross revenue of $4.8M in 2021 this business has already beat their pre-pandemic numbers and 2022 has continued to show growth and is expected to have a revenue of $5.2M.

     

    Having been in business for over 20 years, the owner has been able to train personnel to manage the business in his absence for 3-4 months per year and his current responsibilities consist of financial oversite and general management. To show vested interest in the business and assist with a smooth transition of ownership, the owner has offered a 1-year training period. Operations are managed from a large 6,000 square feet location in the Kahului area. The office has 2,000 square feet of space and the remaining 4,000 square feet is dedicated to their warehouse and sheet metal shop.

     

    Priced at $2,850,000, there is tremendous growth potential for a new owner. The company does almost no marketing; their only advertisement efforts being from their website and ads on their trucks. Over the years, all of their business has come from word of mouth due to the excellent service provided. A 12.5% down payment of $356,250 returns $410,069 in the first year after debt payments – a 115% return on investment! The current owner has also offered a 12.5% equity roll or financing to demonstrate his faith and continued investment in the success of the business. 

    PRICE $2,850,000 CASH FLOW $1,357,546

  • Rail Terminal Services for Inbound & Outbound Freight with $5M in Assets

     

    Serving the Mid-Atlantic & Northeast region of the US for 30+ years, services offered include railroad terminal operation for inbound & outbound freight clients, clerical & inspection, equipment maintenance & repair, and transloading of commodities such as swamp mats, propane, residual waste, hazmat materials, and agricultural biproducts. The diverse customer base consists of transportation providers, agriculture industry, PennDOT, the energy sector, and plastics & lumber clients. Corporate headquarters are in Scranton; which is where all accounting/bookkeeping, insurance needs, and HR are done. There is an intermodal terminal operation located in Pennsylvania, and a bulk rail facility in New York that is a short line railroad and is project-oriented, handling everything from mats for pipelines, re-bar for road construction, and utility poles for the power industry. They also have a rail facility in PA with a certified truck scale and multiple conveyors. All locations are strategically located, and the employees are all cross trained to work at any location. The reason for sale is an aging owner, who resides out of state and is absentee from the business. The well-developed leadership team allows for passive ownership. The staff is comprised of an Operations Manager, VP of Business Development, 1 Controller, 1 Accounting/HR, 1 Safety Officer/Project Oversight, plus a number of day and night managers, mechanics, transload operators, crane operators, truck drivers, and clerical staff. Assets include 9 sand trans loaders/conveyers, 4 hostler trucks, 2 overhead gantry cranes, a vacuum life, and a variety of heavy lifting equipment, construction pieces, and scales. There is also working capital included of nearly $800K, plus land improvements and deposits. All assets included total over $5M! This type of business is recession-resistant, as the recently passed US Infrastructure Bill allows for natural growth. Billions of dollars are being dedicated to the improvement of the US infrastructure. Freight supports the delivery of materials directly related to road and bridge work. Expanding their service area further south, adding another fully functional terminal, increasing commodities, and looking further into increasing residual waste services all offer clear routes to further growth for an already strong operation.

    Priced at $5,700,000, the seller is willing to carry 1.4M of the purchase price. This shows the seller’s faith in the ongoing success of the company. She is willing to stay on board for up to 1 year after closing as well to ensure a strong and smooth training and transition.

     

    PRICE $5,700,000 CASH FLOW $1,257,891

  • Environmental Based Services - Lead, Mold & Asbestos

     

    A 12.5% down payment of $681,250 returns $691,301 in the first year after debt payments!  The seller is willing to hold 15% of the note and is willing to do either a seller carry or equity hold for that amount.  With a team of 90+ employees, this company allows for passive ownership. The team of well-trained specialists provide exceptional asbestos abatement, lead and mold remediation services.   With most projects one to two weeks in duration, this company completes 800 jobs per year.   Annually, there are typically one or two very large projects that bring in over 10% of income, but the projects and customers vary from year-to-year.  The diverse customer base includes industrial businesses (<5%), commercial companies (90%) and homeowners (<10%).   

     

    Leveraging their $3,004,099 in assets as well as their team of 75 union workers, this well-established company is efficient, driven, and well-respected for their industry knowledge.  They are often called upon to successfully complete projects that others consider exceedingly technical, challenging, or too large.  Located in a large facility, the warehouse has storage space for all equipment and inventory, while the office can house the 17-member administrative team comfortably.  This location will be for sale outside the sale of the business.

     

    The owners are not involved in the day-to-day operations, rather lending their skills to business analysis, financial management, and process improvement. 

     

    PRICE $5,450,000 CASH FLOW $1,456,295

Private Equity Group (44)

  • Concrete Pumping for Schools & Hospitals – 90% Recurring Clients

    With over $10M in hard assets, this growing concrete business has 4 locations, 36 concrete pumps, a 90% recurring client base, and 57 employees in Southern California and Texas. The bulk of its contracts are municipal projects, such as K-12 Schools, Universities, Hospitals, and Government Agencies. With its specialized equipment and experienced teams, this business is able to take on projects that would be too large or too difficult for other contractors. The company’s customers are loyal, and since larger public projects and public works are rarely affected by economic changes, the business has been able to weather economic changes and continue to grow while other contractors have failed.

     

    The business boasts over $10M in hard assets and equipment, including 36 concrete pumps, making them one of the largest concrete companies in the nation. Moreover, the current owners have been efficient in their operations and have focused on sustainable and responsible growth. The owners approach this in two important ways: (1) They purchase all new equipment without incurring any long-term debt, and (2) The owners import their replacement parts from producers and wholesalers worldwide, which allows them to save 30-45% off what their competitors have to pay. Using these approaches, the company has over $2M in accounts receivable and ongoing work, and typically over 90% of AR is paid within 90 days. All this while remaining DEBT FREE!

     

    Well-trained managers and project leads are in place and the supporting administrative staff is knowledgeable and capable to handle day-to-day operations. A lot of new equipment was purchased in 2016 & 2017; generally, CapEx is less than $150,000/year.

     

    The owner is involved in daily operations as a manager and in an oversight capacity, and he is willing to stay on as president for 3-4 years. This is an excellent opportunity for any buyer, regardless of construction experience, as Seller will give you all the tools to succeed. Truly a turnkey business opportunity.

    With over $10M in hard assets, this growing concrete business has 4 locations, 36 concrete pumps, a 90% recurring client base, and 57 employees in Southern California and Texas. The bulk of its contracts are municipal projects, such as K-12 Schools, Universities, Hospitals, and Government Agencies. With its specialized equipment and experienced teams, this business is able to take on projects that would be too large or too difficult for other contractors. The company’s customers are loyal, and since larger public projects and public works are rarely affected by economic changes, the business has been able to weather economic changes and continue to grow while other contractors have failed.

     

    The business boasts over $10M in hard assets and equipment, including 36 concrete pumps, making them one of the largest concrete companies in the nation. Moreover, the current owners have been efficient in their operations and have focused on sustainable and responsible growth. The owners approach this in two important ways: (1) They purchase all new equipment without incurring any long-term debt, and (2) The owners import their replacement parts from producers and wholesalers worldwide, which allows them to save 30-45% off what their competitors have to pay. Using these approaches, the company has over $2M in accounts receivable and ongoing work, and typically over 90% of AR is paid within 90 days. All this while remaining DEBT FREE!

     

    Well-trained managers and project leads are in place and the supporting administrative staff is knowledgeable and capable to handle day-to-day operations. A lot of new equipment was purchased in 2016 & 2017; generally, CapEx is less than $150,000/year.

     

    The owner is involved in daily operations as a manager and in an oversight capacity, and he is willing to stay on as president for 3-4 years. This is an excellent opportunity for any buyer, regardless of construction experience, as Seller will give you all the tools to succeed. Truly a turnkey business opportunity.

     

    PRICE $17,250,000 CASH FLOW $2,367,719

  • General Contracting, Electrical & Mechanical Services in Growing Area

    This multi-trade service business has an 80% recurring client base and a 33% 3-Year average profit margin!  With an incredibly versatile team of employees in place, 90% of their work is self-performed. They offer complete mechanical, electrical, and automation design, installation, and maintenance, as well as steel erection, concrete foundations, design build, and heavy equipment installation. The team of employees is incredibly versatile, with the ability to transition from trade to trade very easily. They have 25+ recurring clients with most of them having an MSA in place. In other cases, even though there is no contract in place, this company is their contractor of choice.  The company started performing more mechanical services a few years ago, resulting in higher net income and profit margins. As they continue to do more on the mechanical side in the coming years, a new owner can expect to see profit margins and net income continue to increase, as profit margins from mechanical work is 35%, compared to 15% from general contracting services. There is tremendous room for expansion into the mechanical side, which currently accounts for only 9% of the business, but has a higher profit margin than the other services they provide. 

    Located near Charleston, South Carolina, the company operates from a two-acre property including four buildings. The seller owns the real estate and would rent it to the next owner for $3,500/month. The highly skilled and experienced team includes the Owner/President (who is willing to stay on as President or GM if desired by Buyer), 2 Project Managers, 3 Superintendents (2 of which are Assistant Project Managers), 1 Bookkeeper, and 1 Office Manager/Safety Coordinator.

    Work is steady throughout the year and most projects are completed within a 100-mile radius of the office; temperatures in the area are generally in the 40’s-80’s, so they rarely have to hold jobs due to weather delays. There are no licenses limiting geographical expansion.

    PRICE $6,200,000 CASH FLOW $1,472,747

  • Staffing Firm With 800+ W2 Placements

     

    This well-established staffing and recruiting agency has over 800 placements with all W2 employees. They specialize in offering temporary, temp-to-hire, and direct-hire positions for various industries, including manufacturing, warehousing and distribution. The company offers a wide range of staffing services, including forklift drivers, assembly workers, production workers, pick and pack personnel, and logistics workers. This firm serves a diverse range of clients, including commercial and industrial businesses with warehousing and logistics operations. Notably, the company’s client base includes Fortune 500 companies, indicating its ability to handle large-scale staffing requirements. The dedicated team of 11 staff members includes a Vice President, Payroll Manager, Regional Manager, Area Managers, Office Administrator, and recruiting personnel. The company operates from six locations, comprising one corporate office, three satellite offices, and two on-site offices within client operations. The reason for selling the business is retirement planning. Seller provides general oversight and collaborates with the recruiting team. In order to sweeten the deal the sellers have offered a transition of 1-2 years post-close, and to finance 15% of the purchase price! Priced at $6,600,000, A 10% down payment of $660,000 returns $605,774 in the first year after debt payments! A 91% return on investment! The sellers have identified several growth opportunities, including expanding regionally to reach new markets, and implementing a robust marketing strategy to attract more clients and candidates.

     

    PRICE $6,600,000 CASH FLOW $1,579,707

  • Commercial Roofing – 100% Recurring Clients – No Storm Chasing

     

    This commercial roofing business has nearly 100% repeat customer base – there is no storm chasing. In 2024, there is already $12M in backlog and $6.5M in work in progress. Most of their projects are completed in less than one year, services are varied including, covering membrane roofing, metal roofing, sheet metal, slate & tile steep slope roofing, waterproofing, plaza pavers, and solar installation and repairs. Their well-developed team of 51 is made up of 1 Controller, 1 HR Manager, 1 Superintendent, 2 Project Managers, 3 Estimators, 1 Accounting Assistant, and 42 Laborers. The owner coordinates with the Controller & Superintendent, along with overseeing banking. He is confident that the Controller & Superintendent are qualified and capable of operating the company. With the purchase of this company, a buyer would receive $3.3M in assets, which includes $630K in equipment (forklifts, air compressors, generators, safety equipment, boom lifts, anything needed for their jobs), 16 vehicles, computers, FF&E, office software, and working capital. The business operates out of a 16,000 sq. ft. facility with 4,000 sq. ft. of office space.

    Priced at $7,200,000, this company is poised for a seamless transition. The owner is willing to carry up to 10% of the price and has offered to stay on board for 1-2 years, showing a vested interest in the ongoing success of the company. Currently there is no marketing or outside sales taking place, and there is a lot of untapped potential on the solar side of the business, which will greatly improve revenues and profit margins.

     

     

    PRICE $7,200,000 CASH FLOW $1,795,945

  • Plumbing with repeat GC Client Base: Over 90 Licensed Staff

     

    A very unique plumbing company that specifically works with general contractors and land developers who are neighborhood production builders. There is work in progress of over $64 million dollars, plus a strong backlog. This non-union plumbing company has 98 employees on staff, including 8 in leadership and administration roles, with the other 90 as plumbers and field technicians. The client is never the end user or a home owner, it is 100% B2B. Also, this business does not provide any service or maintenance work, though that could be a great growth opportunity. The business services a 60-mile radius around Sacramento, California with 6 top annually repeating clients. Included in the purchase is working capital of $1M, along with $1.6M in equipment, vehicles, and improvements. The owner is selling due to age and retirement, though they owner is passive already, providing only light oversight as needed and providing payroll. Their position would not need to have any replacement. Priced at $15,500,000, a 10% down payment of $1,550,000 will return $1,400,103 in the first year after debt payments. This shows a huge return on investment! The owner is also willing to hold 15% of the price as either a seller carry or equity roll, or a combination thereof, showing a vested interest in the ongoing success of the company after closing. There are several growth opportunities, including expanding into service & maintenance work, and targeting more apartment complexes for commercial projects. This presents an opportunity for potential buyers who are interested in acquiring an established plumbing business with an incredible team on board and that shows significant growth potential.

     

     

    PRICE $15,500,000 CASH FLOW $5,467,484

  • Commercial Glass and Glazing with 85% Repeat clients

     

    This prominent commercial glass and glazing company, based in Phoenix, has been providing services to their business-to-business client base for 13 years throughout the state of Arizona. Their clients are not the end user but rather the general contractor. They boast an 85% repeat customer base. The focus of their work is on hospitals, schools, office parks and car dealerships - there is no residential clients. They have a spacious 7,700 square foot facility with a large shop for fabrication alongside furnished offices. The staff includes 7 in leadership and 3 admin, along with 9 laborer’s, installers, and glazers. The owner is willing to stay on board for 2-4 years while settling into retirement. The purchase also comes with the necessary amount of vehicles, equipment, and working capital which can range from $500K - $700K.

    Priced at $3,300,000, a 10% down payment of $330,000 will return $461,009 in the first year after debt payments. The seller has offered to carry 10% of the purchase price in order to show their vested interest in the continued success of the business moving forward. In terms of growth, their strategy includes hiring more staff and expanding into the residential sector.

     

    PRICE $3,300,000 CASH FLOW $937,048

  • IT Staffing Firm with Offshore Consultants

     

    This is IT staffing firm has 33 consultants on staff, 12 of which are US based and 21 are offshore in New Delhi, India. The consultant’s scope of work includes software development, information management and documentation systems, plus software analysis and testing for clients in the industries of transportation, medical, and financial. The aging owner is willing to stay on and transition for 1 year, he has also offered to financing 15% of the purchase price plus roll equity of 15% to show his commitment to the success of the future owner. The owner works no more than 2-3 hours per week and there is no physical office space as all contractors are 100% remote making this business highly profitable with no overhead. The cash flow is over $770,000 and is on a 4-year growth trend, the clients are 100% repeat and the average tenure of the client is over 15 years.

    Priced at $2,250,000, with its established reputation and track record, this business is well-positioned for an acquisition. A 10% down payment of $225,000 returns $398,172 in the first year after debt payments! There is no special license or designation required to operate this business. Looking at future growth opportunities, this business could benefit from hiring a business development or marketing person to expand its client list as there is no growth strategy currently being performed. Additionally, a new owner could sponsor visas for the off-shore consultants.

     

    PRICE $2,250,000 CASH FLOW $772,991

  • Midwest Based Truck Driver Training Center

     

    For over 20 years this niche business has been educating students to get their CDL with driver training classes. They have both classroom and active driver training using their 15 Semis. They are also accredited through the DMV as an official 3rd party CDL testing site with a truck driver. Throughout North America, this post high school career path brings students that are 30% from the Midwest states and 70% from across the US. They have a location in Nebraska, strategically located on the I-80 which is the most travelled US interstate for coast-to-coast hauling. The purchase price includes a fleet of 16 Tractor Trailer Semis, buildout classrooms, a full curriculum, plus a full class schedule as truck drivers remain in high demand throughout North America. Additionally, the owner is offering 10% financing plus a 2-year training period to ensure a smooth and successful transition. A tangible growth strategy is to add additional community colleges to their referral partners. After becoming licensed through their program, a driver can now earn $80,000/year for only a $4,000 investment into their tuition. In 2019, the Federal Government mandated that every person applying for a CDL must complete an approved program through a training school. This business is an approved school and fits all requirements for this change. Also, in the state of Nebraska, the Department of Motor Vehicles no longer offers CDL testing and all testing for CDL licenses will be done by 3rd party examiners. This business holds all certifications necessary for this transition as well.

    Priced at $2,950,000, a 10% down payment of $295,000 returns $357,431 in the first year after debt payments. The owner has offered to carry 15% of the purchase price in order to show their vested interest in the continued success of the business moving forward. Many individuals who pursue CDL training may need to travel to Kearney, Nebraska, to attend the program; by providing onsite accommodations or partnering with local lodging establishments, they can offer convenience and comfort to out-oftown students. Additionally, having a restaurant space can provide meals and refreshments during training sessions, further enhancing the overall experience for students.


    PRICE $2,950,000 CASH FLOW $877,942

  • Civil Engineering Practice Focused on Waste Water & Disaster Area Relief

     

     

    Civil engineering firm focused on waste water and disaster relief for suffering communities! Roughly 50% of the work they do comes from infrastructure grants, and 50% comes from referring engineering firms who lack the expertise in this niche of water and wastewater management. The firm does not bid to gain or win work; rather they have a niche in grant application processing. Their team of 11 consists of 2 Licensed Engineers, 5 Non-Licensed Engineers, and 4 in administration. They work out of a 2,600 square foot office space and have the necessary resources to accommodate their operations effectively. They work closely with cities, counties, and special districts to provide expertise in various aspects of engineering related to water and wastewater systems. This includes designing, planning, and implementing infrastructure projects such as water treatment plants, sewage systems, stormwater management, and other related facilities. They primarily serve the Central Valley of California, including clients in Kern County, Modesto, and Stockton. The current owner has decided to sell the firm in order to plan for retirement. The current owner’s responsibilities include general oversight with limited direct interactions with clients. As part of the transition process, he is willing to provide a training period of 1-2 years to ensure a smooth handover of the operation. This will allow the new owners to familiarize themselves with the business operations, client base, and ongoing projects. In addition to the 1-2 year training period, the seller has offered to carry 20% of the purchase price via seller financing and an equity roll.

    Priced at $7,000,000, this business is primed and ready for a new owner to step in and enjoy a reputation that has been built over the last 10 years. A 10% down payment of $700,000 returns $539,232 in the first year after debt payments, which is a 77% return on investment! The current owner provides light oversight, handling hiring processes, and managing invoicing. These responsibilities can be absorbed by the existing staff or delegated to new hires as the business transitions to new ownership. One of the growth opportunities lies in outsourcing the grant writing. With an increasing demand for infrastructure development and maintenance, there is significant potential for expansion in their area.

     

    PRICE $7,000,000 CASH FLOW $1,440,687

  • Infrastructure Contracting Firm with a focus in Roadwork and Water Utilities

    Infrastructure development firm focused on roadways, underground utilities and water/sewer projects that have served all 5 boroughs of New York over the last 20 years. Though they do not have any sort of certification for MBE, WBE, or 8a etc. this firm has proved a successful track record working with various New York City agencies such as the Department of Design and Construction, Department of Environmental Protection, School Construction Authority and Port Authority of NY & NJ. They do not currently undertake private work. The business occupies a 25,000 square foot lot with a 4,000 square foot office space. There are 40-50 fulltime W2 employees, and the field staff are union. The seller is planning for retirement and has offered a training period of 1- 2 years to ensure a smooth handover – he already has 2 VPs in place to take over. In terms of growth opportunities, this business has the potential to take on larger projects. The equipment and vehicles included in the purchase price have been valued at $2,861,000 during a 2023 appraisal.

    Priced at $4,395,000, the seller has offered to carry 10% of the purchase price in addition to a 10% equity roll in order to show his vested interest in the continued success of the business moving forward. A down payment of $439,500 will return $661,918 in the first year after debt payments! With its extensive experience in public bid projects and established relationships with various New York City agencies, the company can leverage its reputation and expertise to secure larger contracts. Expanding their project portfolio can lead to increased revenue and further establish their presence in the construction industry.

     

     

    PRICE $4,395,000 CASH FLOW $1,227,903

  • Manufacturing and Fabrication of Millwork – 100% B2B with $6M in Backlog

     

     

    Operating out of a 14,000 sq, ft. fabricating facility in Salt Lake City, which they recently moved to keep up with the year-over-year growth, in fact, they are experiencing a higher-than-normal backlog of over $6M! Over the last 3 decades, this fabrication & millwork operation has served a repeat base of commercial clients; ranging across schools/universities, hospitals, churches, detention centers and office buildings. Known for high quality, specialized manufacturing of cabinetry and related goods, there is a tenured team of 26, including 5 in Administration, 11 in the Shop, and 6 in the Field. They have an expert leadership team running the day-to-day operations, made up of a General Manager, Shop Foreman, Production Manager, and a Project Manager. The owner is removed from the daily roles, he is more of the “Big Vision” and general oversight of his key people. After 30 years, he is retiring, but is committed to a 2–3-year transition to ensure ongoing success of the business. He is also willing to finance 10- 15% of the purchase price. There is over $3 million in assets with the purchase, which includes CNC routers, horizontal boring machine, gliding saw, table & chip saw, timesaver sander, software, 1 pick-up, 2 trailers, 2 vans, 2 box trucks and all of the additional equipment and tools needed to operate the business. They have a focused service area in the Southwest US. There are no affiliations or special certifications associated with this business, meaning they are not MBE, WBE, veteran owned, union, etc.

    Priced at $3,825,000, this business comes with a proven history, a tenured staff, and reliable client base, allowing for a buyer to step in and continue operating and growing successfully from day one. A 12.5% down payment of $478,125 returns $518,603 in the first year after debt payments!

     

    PRICE $3,825,000 CASH FLOW $1,061,649

  • Wholesale of Niche Goods with 46,000 sq. ft. of Distribution Space

     

    Their distribution facility ships to over 800 B2B customers across the Continental US, made up of truck stops, grocery store chains, ecommerce companies, and more. There is a good mix of wholesale clients versus dropship orders where no inventory is held. The business has a highly diverse portfolio of more than 40 vendors, such as Riddell, WinCraft, and Fremont Die. There is a strong leadership team in place, including a President, Controller, Purchasing Manager, and Sales Director, plus a full warehouse & shipping team. The tenured President will stay in place as operator if the buyer desires. The owner resides out of state and has a very minimal role. The assets included are valued at $2,025,000, these assets are licensed sports team novelty items, a forklift, extensive warehouse shelving, pallet shrink wrapper, packaging equipment, pallet racking, and leasehold improvements. The company produced nearly $9M in revenue in 2022, putting $1.2M to the bottom line. Boasting over 300 types of products ranging across accessories, gifts, home goods, and gear, they have something for every fan. They do not sell shoes, clothes, or sports equipment. Their most popular product brands include products associated with the NFL, MLB, NBA, MLS, NGH, Nascar, US Army, Jack Daniels, and Harley Davidson.

    Priced at $5,700,000, this business includes 2 million in assets, a strong team, and solid reputation and history, putting a new owner in the perfect position to continue operating and growing successfully. Over 3 decades ago, this company started with the teenage owner who sold his first baseball card; now over 30 years later, this business thrives in the distribution of sports products & highly recognizable brands. The owner is willing to finance 10% and/or retain 5% equity, as a show of good faith in the ongoing success of the business. A 10% down payment of $570,000 returns $618,947 in the first year after debt payments!

     

     

    PRICE $5,700,000 CASH FLOW $1,300,112

  • Enviro Services of Drilling Waste: 100% Absentee Owner

     

     

    This company currently has 250 clients, of which 50+ of those are recurring with the typical client being a municipality or utility company. This company handles all aspects of the industrial clean up services and disposal & hauling of drilling waste for oil field productions. Their equipment & vehicles have a value of over $2.6MM and consists of combo vacs, tank trucks, straight vacs, water trucks, mobile steamers, and maintenance units. This variety of equipment also gives them the ability to perform a mixture of maintenance, water delivery, vegetation control, water truck services, & mobile steaming. The Leadership Team is in place & consists of twenty-three employees. There are 5 in Administration (Vice President of Operation, General Manager of Fleet & Dispatch, Billing Manager, Safety Officer, and Dispatch); 13 Operators, and 5 in the Shop. The uniquely qualified team allows the owner to be able to live remote, more than 2 hours away, and only does light oversight of the business. Financing should be a breeze as this company is boasting a 20% Profit Margin and is 100% collateralized, plus there is roughly $375K of working capital that is included in the purchase price as well.

    At the purchase price of $4,950,000 CAD, with a 20% investment from the Buyer, the Seller will show a vested interest in the business’s success by holding a note for 10% and rolling equity of 10% allowing the bank to be at a 60% loan, making the business over 100% collateralized. The business has a focus in Alberta with clients across Canada. The company’s leased space consists of an 11-acre industrial fully fenced yard site, a 750 sq. ft. office with 4 maintenance bays, and a 5-bedroom crew house.

     

    PRICE $4,950,000 CASH FLOW $979,115

  • Architecture Firm in Calgary with 30% VTB

     

    The firm specializes in senior care facilities and commercial mixed-use properties, and in 2023, they nearly grossed 1.8 million in sales with $996,229 in cash flow, resulting in an impressive profit margin of 55%. The team of 9 employees consists of a Senior Project Manager, a Registered Senior Project Architect, an experienced staff architect in the process of acquiring their architecture registration, and 2 administrative employees handling project invoicing and accounting. This Calgary-based architecture firm, with a history of 34 years in the industry, has established itself as a reputable and dependable entity. The firm offers a comprehensive range of services, including architectural and master-planning solutions, from briefing to final certificate. The current owner, who actively works as an architect and oversees the general operations, has generously offered a 3-4-year training and transition period with the necessary retainment salary accounted for in the listed cash flow. Additionally, as a gesture of confidence in the firm's ongoing success, the owner has offered a 30% seller carry. While the firm primarily works with clients in Canada, it boasts an international portfolio, having completed projects in the US, India, China, Malaysia, and other countries. The owner has decided to sell the firm to plan for retirement. In addition to the long-standing reputation, a new owner will acquire a working capital between $300,000 - $500,000, which is included in the purchase price.

    Priced at $1,950,000, with a very low multiple of only 2.25. This architecture firm represents a highly reliable investment opportunity for larger firms looking to expand their portfolio, smaller architecture firms aiming to double in size, or young architects seeking their first step into the professional industry with an established portfolio and reputation.

     

    PRICE $1,950,000 CASH FLOW $996,229

  • Property Management with 85% Multi-Family: Owner will carry 25%

     

    A 15+ year established property management firm where the owner is seeking a strategic minded buyer with business acumen. As a show of good faith and vested interest in the ongoing success of the company the owner has offered to roll equity for up to 25% and provide a 4–5- year transition period. Their client mix is 85% multi-family housing/apartments, 10% single family homes (multi-unit), and 5% commercial made up of Property Investors, focused in multifamily living. The organization has developed a reputable presence, by serving Milwaukee & Kenosha Wisconsin. The owner oversees his leadership team and will do some site sourcing, as he still finds that enjoyable. His staff handles the day-to-day operations. The welldeveloped management team includes a Controller, two Senior Vice Presidents and a Superintendent. There are also 3 Property Managers, 3 in Maintenance, and 1 Office Administrator. The acquisition includes about $450K in assets which are company vehicles, deposits, and AR. Priced at $3,350,000, a 10% down payment will return $333,740 in the first year after debt payments. A 99% return on investment! Two banks have already pre-approved this loan for a qualified buyer with only 10% down and 65% from a lender. The upcoming growth coupled with a 34% profit margin makes this streamlined property management business a great opportunity.

     

    PRICE $3,350,000 CASH FLOW $799,385

  • Expert Witness Prep & Placement for Law Firms

     

    This opportunity is a litigation consulting and expert witness firm that provides business analysis and expert witness reports and testimony. They assist law firms and government agency clients. The focus is on identifying and retaining qualified experts. They are engaged throughout the duration of the case to support those experts. The firm also has special expertise in using social media analysis to develop litigation-ready evidence. This firm’s client base are top, recognizable Corporations, News Channels, and the Department of Justice, that need assistance finding expert witnesses, case analysis, witness reports, and trial strategy & preparation. With a stable team of 12; made up of mostly attorneys, law professors, MBAs, and accountants, the buyer does not need to be an attorney as the current owner is not. The owner has some roles in business development and staff oversight, though he has recently been offloading more of his client facing roles in order to prepare for a smooth transition. The seller has offered a transition period ranging from 1 to 2 years, he is willing to do seller financing or roll equity of 25% as a sign of good faith. All personnel work remotely, which drives their 44% profit margin and allows them to take on clients across the United States and throughout Canada.

    Priced at $6,150,000, this business offers a strategic buyer the opportunity to expand their practice or allows for an individual with legal experience looking to start their own practice. This consulting firm has a stable team, client base, and network that offer extreme growth opportunities moving forward. Options vary and include creating a division of the business to handle opposition research in order to find contradictions or indiscretions that would assist with discrediting the opposition’s expert witness, working with class action cases, and taking on cases for the International Trademark Association.

     

    PRICE $6,150,000 CASH FLOW $1,303,323

  • Architecture Firm with 20+ on Staff – Owner will stay 3 years

     

     

    This architecture firm provides B2B services to corporate clients in the hospitality, entertainment, and senior living industries throughout Toronto. The firm has been established 30+ years and boasts a team of 21 employees, including a CFO, general manager, 9 registered architects, 4 technical draftsmen, and 3 architect interns. They also have 3 contract architects who handle overflow work as needed. Services include interior styling, architecture, and design management. Although they primarily serve the Ontario metropolitan area, they have performed work in the US in the past. The owner have very limited billable hours in the business, providing team and project management as needed. The sellers are seeking a new owner due to succession and retirement planning, but to help ensure the ongoing success of the company, the owners are offering an extended transition period of 3-4 years.

    With the purchase, a buyer would also receive over $480,000 in working capital and all the equipment and software needed. 2023 displayed an incredible profit margin of 64%! The price of $7,800,000 CAD includes a 15% seller promissory note alongside a 10% equity hold to show good faith in the continued success of the business post-close.

     

    PRICE $7,800,000 CASH FLOW $1,563,546

  • Professional PM Firm with over $120 Million in Contracted Work

     

    This professional PM and construction management firm plans and manages renovations and maintenance for military bases across the upper West Coast. Clients are 90% Federal/Government and 10% private hire, including the VA, Navy, US Coast Guard, Army, School Districts, and Apartments/Condos. There are typically 20-30 active jobs concurrently which represents a current WIP of $24,000,000 plus several multi-year contracts in backlog. A highly developed management team is in place where there are about 35 key employees, including a President, CFO, 4 Project Managers, 2 Engineers, 5 Superintendents, 2 Foreman, 5 Estimators, 4 Quality Control, plus Admin, IT, and Assistants. This allows the owner to work remotely, spending only 10 hours per week providing “strategic vision” to the leadership team. They have a 4+ year backlog with multi-year contracts with proprietary deal flow in over $120 Million in contracts. The Seller is willing to stay 2-3 years postclose and will also offer a promissory note and/or equity roll of 30% as a sign of good faith. With the purchase, a buyer would receive $2.9M in assets, including working capital and the vehicles and equipment needed to continue successfully. CapEx remains very low at less than $200K per year. Reoccurring clients are the VA, Federal Government, and the US Military. There will not be any impact on this business should there be a recession, Government shutdown or upcoming election. In fact, due to the passed US Infrastructure Bill, this business will have organic growth as the bill has billions of set asides for our military bases.

     

    PRICE $36,500,000 CASH FLOW $6,802,180

  • Manufacturer of “Everyday Apparel” with Big Box Clients

     

    Priding themselves on what is called “Elevated Everyday Apparel,” which they design, oversee manufacturing, and then distribute to their clients. Their clients are highly reputable and recognizable, including Nordstroms, Burlington, PacSun, and as of last quarter, they are now rolling out Target! The company has manufacturers in Mexico, Guatemala, and China and distribution throughout North America. They have 10 of their own brands, over 50 licenses, and also do white label for retailers. The team is well developed with 4 in management/office administration, 7 in art and design, 3 in sales, and 4 in production. The two owners spend about 20 hours a week in the business, with Owner 1 overseeing the production and sales team, and Owner 2 working with the art department and merchandising. One person easily could perform both roles. This replacement salary is accounted for in the cash flow. As a show of good faith, they are offering a combination of 10% promissory note and a 10% equity roll for a total of 20% proving their vested interest in the continued success of this business.

     

    PRICE $3,300,000 CASH FLOW $890,270

  • Packaging & Wholesale of Holistic Goods: Owner will stay 5 years and carry 40%

    Boasting sales of $30MM, this B2B business has two primary client types: smaller wholesalers and direct to shop owners. Services include wholesale, coordinating manufacturing, packaged development with fulfillment, and arranging logistics through 3rd party freight. This team includes a CFO, General Manager, VP of Sales, Retail Lead, 2 Manufacturing Leads, Warehouse Lead, 4 Warehouse Associates, 5 In House Sales Reps, 24 Packagers, and 19 Outside Sales Reps. They do not have any drivers, all are outsourced. They focus mainly on Distribution and Logistics to other smaller wholesalers which make up 59% of their revenue, while 38% is sold Business to Business to multi location owners; less than 3% is sold direct to the consumer and this is intentional for research and development purposes. The current owner recently reinvested significant amounts of time and money into expanding operations, including moving to a distribution center twice the size to handle the growth. They operate out of a 12,000 sq. ft. distribution facility in Southern California. In 2023 they added another distribution center in Florida. The goal for selling is to expand with a Strategic Buyer or Equity Group who can bring strong business acumen. The owner will remain on board for 4-5 years and is willing to do a 40% carry or equity roll combo as a sign of a vested interest in the business’s success. Currently there are 36 States who have recognized these Low-Dose consumables as a legal product and there are projected to be another 7 states that will follow suit in the next 6-9 months. The business does not sell any traditional cannabis products but rather regulated hemp which allows them to legally sell across state lines.

    This business is priced at $49,000,000, producing a 30% profit margin! There are 43 well-known and respectably sized Private Equity Groups and dozens of publicly traded companies that own very similar businesses! Another growth area is in manufacturing, bringing it in house to boost productivity.

     

    PRICE $49,000,000 CASH FLOW $9,835,970

  • Roof Inspection & Installation: 10 Million in Residential backlog for 2023

     

     

    This residential roofing business has been in service since 2011 and they have $2.4M in receivables! they have 2 locations with their main location in Manassas, VA and the second satellite location an hour away, both locations have a General Manager to ensure smooth individual operations. The services offered include roof inspection and installation, gutter repair, siding, windows, floors, decks, drywall, and storm restoration which are utilized by over 5,000 clients in Virginia, West Virginia, and Maryland. The team consists of 19 employees including 2 office managers, 5 office staff, and 7 sales reps, this roofing business not only has an established chain of command but has also been able to keep their CapEx and liability low by outsourcing all of the labor. Their team works with clients’ insurance companies to ensure that customers get the most out of their claim. The current owner only focuses on the oversite of sales and even with his minimal involvement in day-to-day activities, he is willing to stay on board with the business for 2-3 years post-close to ensure a smooth transition. Coupled with the high levels of customers coming in due to referrals (70%!), and their average online rating of 4.8, this business is primed for growth. The current owner is willing to carry 30% of the $2,900,000 purchase price, to show their established confidence in the company’s ability to continue successfully. A 10% down payment of $290,000 is what Is needed to step into ownership of this projected 10 Million dollar revenue roofing company. In the Northeast U.S., April through September is storm season, which is the busiest time of year for this company. After a hailstorm, there is a 50% chance that a roof will have a leak. They have learned to utilize this information by increasing their marketing to coincide with this optimum business opportunity. Because of this niche market, the business has proven to be pandemic and recession proof. Outside of their already incredible client base, there would be easy expansion into commercial and government work as well.

     

    PRICE $2,900,000 CASH FLOW $803,349

  • Multiple Locations Architecture Practice with 25% Seller Carry

     

    Based in New York City, this business has been able to accumulate an excellent reputation spurred on by happy clients which has led to 90% repeat clientele. A strategic new owner with experience in architecture and engineering would have 3 years of seller transitioning of the business and a foot into the New York market. The firm has nearly 15 years of experience under their belt, and their leadership team has been well mentored. The team consists of 25 employees including Leadership and several architects. This owner is open to a 30% carry showing good faith in the ongoing success and the seller’s vested interest in the success of the business after sale. This architecture firm has a focus on higher education and K-12, with 4.1M in backlog, they are poised for an acquisition. Priced at $4,400,000 this business is primed to return year over year success to anyone in a related industry. Someone that knows how to operate in this field would be able to not only enjoy the expected organic growth pattern brought forward by the world’s focus on education and building new opportunities, but put forth new growth opportunities without having to utilize exponential resources on accumulating additional assets. Included in the purchase of this business is $1,152,000 in assets, this includes AR and the necessary equipment needed to maintain day-to-day operations.

     

    PRICE $4,400,000 CASH FLOW $954,000

  • IT Managed Services with 85% Repeat Client Base

     

     

    This MSP firm provides services including network management, cloud computing, cybersecurity, data backup and recovery, and help desk support. They offer IT managed services including server architecture and design, hosting, system backups, VOIP solutions, network design, dedicated environments, platform hosting, shared servers, and 24/7 monitoring/ crisis control services. Additionally, they offer IT based staffing services which is an add on service only offered to existing clients. The company has an impressive 85% repeat client base, which speaks to the quality of their services and the trust they have built with their clients. For more than a decade this IT business based in Omaha has established itself as a reliable provider in the region, with a strong team in place of 3 IT engineers, 2 in sales and 2 in admin. The owner of the business is willing to carry a larger that standard, 25% of the sale and provide a 2-year transition as a sign of good faith. In 2022 the team earned their best year yet with an annual revenue over $8.7 Million and a 20% profit margin! Their client scope ranges from small to medium sized businesses with a focus in the banking industry. Growth opportunities for this business could include expanding into a tech help desk service.

    Priced at $8,975,000 this business with an excellent reputation for never losing a client is poised to deliver a stable and continually growing opportunity to the new owner. This presents an attractive opportunity for potential buyers looking to enter or expand in this market.

     

    PRICE $8,975,000 CASH FLOW $1,767,484

  • Refrigerated Food Transportation & Distribution with Consistently Reliable Demand

    This transportation and distribution business operates in an industry that is continually high in demand as they handle food products that require a refrigerated and/or climate-controlled environment. This consistency has led to the business seeing continual year over year growth in their gross sales, including in 2020 when many companies struggled to continue their operation. This company boasts an impressive 85% repeat customer base and over 30 years of experience in their industry. While they primarily handle food transportation, they also offer warehousing services which makes up 10% of their annual revenue. There is an abundance of space allotted for physical expansion in their 20,000 square foot facility – 18,800 sq. ft. of this space is for warehousing, with 1,200 sq. ft. being utilized as an office space. Having been extremely well established, this business has accumulated an excellent reputation and industry leading staff. Their team is made up of 28 employees: 3 team leads, 2 dispatchers, 13 long haul drivers, 4 local drivers, and 6 warehouse workers. This full team allows them to self-perform all of their deliveries and eliminates any need for outside contractors.

     

    The purchase of this business includes over $1.3M in assets, including nearly $700K in vehicles and equipment, along with $600K in working capital. The services provided are 100% B2B, serving food production companies all over the US.  Some of these clients have been around since shortly after the company’s inception in 1989!  Even with the heavy percentage of repeating clients, their annual revenue is widely distributed across several different clients, resulting in minimal customer concentration. They also consistently add new clients to the mix as well, allowing for year over year growth in revenue over the last several years. 

     

    While both owners do have some involvement in the business, both are committed to seeing the business continue successfully and would be willing to stay on for 1-3 years post-close.  During this time, they will train and transition the business to new ownership, while also finding and training any replacement needed. To further demonstrate their vested dedication in the ongoing success of this business, they are willing to offer a seller carry rate of 15%, which is above the industry standard of 10%.

     

    Priced at $3,415,000, this business is ready for new ownership to take over and continue the pattern of growth to build on their current long-standing legacy.

     

    PRICE $3,415,000 CASH FLOW $854,730

  • Parks, Roads Infrastructure with 62 million in Backlog

     

     

    This Civil based Infrastructure business performs Site Prep for Parks, Roads and School Districts with a focus in paving. Their repeat client base includes the DOT, Department of Parks & Rec and the Port Authorities. The proof is in the performance with this NYC business as they have never defaulted on a project in their 43-year history. This business currently has over $62M in backlog – the highest they have ever had! The assets are valued over 4 million, which include $2,350,000 in heavy equipment, $1.3 million in vehicles and they will leave $500,000 in Working Capital! This makes the loan over-collateralized plus there is a bank loan already pre-approved for a qualified buyer! The team consists of 20 core people, there is no shortage of trained professionals at hand, including office staff, project managers, and foremen plus 30-50 union laborers. The owner currently works about 25 hours a week and will provide transition for 2-3 years. The owner is ready to retire but has a vested interest in the continuing success of this business, to show good faith he is willing to finance and/or hold a 30% Equity Roll. The business utilizes a 12,000 sq. ft. building which includes an office, shop, machines, storage with 8,000 sq. ft. of unused space that could be used for expansion! Priced at $5,100,000, this business is primed and ready for a new owner to step in and enjoy a backlog that has surpassed their all time high. Their work falls under the municipal umbrella: meaning if there should be a recession, their workflow will not be impacted. In fact, due to the recently passed US Infrastructure Bill, this business will grow significantly as $66 Billion dollars has been set aside for public transportation infrastructure work. A new owner could add plumbing, precast, fencing and hardscaping to the list of services as these are all growth opportunities. A buyer must qualify for a Minority, Woman or Veteran designation to own majority of this business.

     

    PRICE $5,100,000 CASH FLOW $1,128,352

  • Multi Location Architecture Firm: Owners will carry 25%

     

    This architecture firm largely serves the K-12, collegiate, and multifamily sectors. They have provided their services to over 80 campuses across the US! They have the ability to work on 20-25 projects at a time, which has allowed both great customer diversity and an incredible 90% client return rate! With 2 prime locations and over $5M in backlog, this firm is currently working with clients in Arkansas, Oklahoma, Texas, Colorado, Florida, Connecticut, New Mexico, Kansas, Missouri, and in the New England Area. There is a robust team of 24 including 1 CFO/Senior Executive, 6 Project Managers/Lead Architects, 12 Architectural Designers, 1 Interior Designer, 1 Marketing Director, 1 Marketing Assistant, 1 Office Administrator, and 1 Student Intern. The owner is willing to provide a seller carry or roll equity for up to 25% of the purchase in addition to a 4-year transition to show good faith and vested interest in the continued success of the business after closing. This firm has an immaculate reputation after 30+ years in the market.

    Priced at $3,950,000, strong growth opportunities exist for this architectural firm, with only a small percentage of the regional school district market tapped and a lot of space for winning additional multifamily contracts. All of the employees are full-time and experienced in their positions, and their leadership team has been well mentored. This firm’s extensive experience allows them to regularly win projects over larger national entities. Focused largely on K-12 and University work, they will flourish with the new infrastructure bill and will not fall victim to any looming recession.

     

     

    PRICE $3,950,000 CASH FLOW $1,193,986

  • 30-year-old Chip Sealing Business with 15 on staff

     

    Based in South Dakota, this Chip Sealing business offers services including asphalt paving (5%), surface treatments and crack repair (5%), and chip sealing/ armor coating (90%). The current work in progress for this company exceeds $7.5M and included in the purchase of this business is over $4M in assets. Their fleet consists of work trucks ($479k), oil distributors ($796k), chip spreaders ($519k), dump trucks ($437k), tractors, trailers, rollers, and tanker trucks this business is primed for the work ahead. Having been established over 30 years ago, this asphalt and paving business has built an excellent staff and management system which will allow new ownership the opportunity for passive ownership. The team consists of 15 FT W2 Employees + 12 seasonal laborers, while the General Manager operates the company by providing support for billing, supply ordering, A/P and A/R, reporting, and contractual agreements. The employees waste no time and often complete smaller projects while in the area for contracted larger projects. These small projects can be completed in as little as one day, and they complete their largest projects within 10 days. Their client base is made up of primarily State, County, and Municipal Governments as well as Corp of Engineers and they also handle some residential work. Billing is also done in a timely manner, with invoices going out on the day of completion of the project. On smaller, private projects, the cost is collected before the project even begins!

     

    Many of their projects come from throughout South Dakota and Nebraska, filling up their schedule by April by winning bids in each area. With enough current equipment to support an additional team, the resources are ready to go to expand the business if desired! Priced at $5,625,000, a down payment of $843,750 would return $393,189 in the first year. The assets associated with this business collateralize over 75% of the purchase. This South Dakota asphalt paving business is ready for their next step and is an excellent opportunity for any new owner, as the current responsibilities of the owner consist of only project oversight!

    PRICE $5,625,000 CASH FLOW $1,617,882

  • Moving Company with Diversity in Corporate, Military, And Residential Packing, Hauling, or Storing

    This moving company has been serving Oregon and Washington for 2 decades expanding in over 10 strategic locations. Their services range from office/business moving, contracted military moves, some residential; they also offer packing/crating and warehousing in their storage sites. Consistently growing between 5-10% in revenue is attributed to their very strong organization chart of a P.T. resident CFO, leadership team and regional managers. This allows for passive ownership with the current owner only needing to be present for 2 meetings per month as all of his roles have been absorbed for the last several years. Conservatively projecting $31,000,000 in revenue this year, they will earn 14% profit margin from the clear processes and procedures their divisions have in place. These include call centers, sales, marketing and IT, and drivers.

     

    The business has recently started a mobile pod division, allowing them to provide further services to different types of clients and continue the overall growth.  Other opportunities include small, inexpensive acquisitions to expand the territory, also they are adding server farm moving and hauling. With their excellent reputation as well as their existing client base and locations they have a service area spanning across local, interstate, and international clients. At a purchase price of $26,000,000, there is an option for the seller to not only provide a 10% seller carry, but to also retain 15% in equity if desired. This is being done to show the vested interest in the ongoing success of the business post-close.  

    PRICE $26,000,000 CASH FLOW $4,340,000

  • Pet Nutrition Manufacturer, Competent Staff and High Reputation

    This business manufacturers custom pet supplements for clients who then private label the product and sell it under their name on ecommerce sites such as Amazon. The clients do not own the formulations, they only private label. This business is stable, with the current owner willing to carry 20% of the financing as a show of faith, and also is willing to consult long-term with the new owner. The extremely capable team gives a new owner the flexibility to move to absentee ownership, or alternatively to focus on growth.

     

    The business sells custom-order to 20+ clients, who then sell the product through ecommerce sites. Product categories include pet treat supplements, dog probiotics and dental sticks, and powder supplements. The close-knit six-person staff is extremely competent, with the number one employee capable of managing all day-to-day operations. The owner currently mostly offers high-level direction and works 20 hours a week. A new owner has the freedom to become more or less involved than this as they please.

     

    If the new owner chooses to invest into growth, several promising routes are available. Currently this business does absolutely no sales, so bringing on a salesperson is one option. Launching the company’s own brand is another exciting avenue, as well as expanding into other product and animal categories.

     

    This business comes with $950,000 of tangible assets including pet nutrition product mixers and a new dog dental product machine.

     

    Priced at $2,935,000, a 15% down payment of $440,250 returns $407,034 in the first year after debt payments! 

    PRICE $2,935,000 CASH FLOW $839,202

  • Maintenance in Commercial Roofing: Reoccurring

     

    Their client base is made up of 100% commercial clients including consultants, general contractors, private real estate owners, construction managers, and municipalities, 65% of whom are repeat clients. With 95 W2 Employees, this commercial roofing business is able to self-perform 100% of their labor. With $16M already lined up in backlog (committed contracts), they are on target to have the best year ever in 2023, and there is no sign of slowing down in 2023! Their services include reroofing/scheduled replacement (50%), new construction (40%), and general repair & maintenance (10%) and are able to service a wide service area including a 75-mile radius of Akron. The sale of this business includes $5M in assets, including 30+ trucks & trailers, and $2.6M in equipment. This means that new ownership would be able to easily build on current growth opportunities without needing to invest excessive resources to do so. Growth opportunities include going after more maintenance/service work, sheet metal projects, and the recently approved US Infrastructure Bill will also provide growth across the municipal clients they work with. The company is a mixture of union and non-union, with the union side making up 80% of their total sales and 60% of their current projects. Generally, they are the largest employer on a month-tomonth basis in the union, they employ an average of 44 roofers and 15 sheet metal workers per day with a fairly even split of new construction vs. renovation, and mostly in the public sector. There are a large number of institutions in the area that require union members to perform their projects. The non-union side is more in the private sector, with 80% of their revenue comprised of new construction. Priced at $14,950,000, this business is primed for new ownership with already long-standing client relationships in place, an excellent reputation, and a strong word of mouth job pipeline. The owners are looking forward to retiring out of state, but the two active owners are more than happy to stay on board post-close to ensure a smooth transition. Owner 1 handles the oversight and management, as well as review of estimates and would stay for 1 year, Owner 2 handles the day-to-day operations and would stay for 2 years, and Owner 3 (absentee) does not need replacing. They would be willing to retain equity or carry a note for 15%, showing their vested interest in the ongoing success on the company.

    PRICE $14,950,000 CASH FLOW $2,592,337

  • Passive Des Moines Home Renovation Company

     

    This passive Des Moines based home renovation company is stable and has huge growth potential! Boasting an amazing reputation which leads to repeat clients and referrals, this company has more than $1,600,000 in the pipeline for Q1 alone, which annualizes out to $6.4M in projected revenue! There is nearly $1M in assets including the company’s 14 vans, power tools, and inventory. This well-built operation is passive – with the owner dedicating only 5 to 7 hours a week to the business - but also boasts room to grow if an ambitious new owner wants to lean into growth opportunities. A well-executed hiring campaign to increase the volume of work, as well as possibly opening a satellite location, could drive this business even higher. 

     

    This experienced team provides a “one-stop-shop” approach to residential kitchen and bath remodels. This business controls the quality and timeliness of every installation by completing all work in house except for countertop instillation. Their complete showroom and an onsite designer provide 3D renderings for projects that allows for stress-free selections. Most projects happen in the kitchen (45%), the bathroom (45%), as well as other remodeling projects throughout the home. A 12% down payment of $677,829 returns $718,052 in the first year even after debt payments!

     

    An incredible asset of this business is the well-trained and experienced team who are cross-trained in many different skills and many of whom have a long tenure with the company. Leads manage the projects, and the general manager handles the day-to-day operations with the help of an office manager. The team works out of a 4,000 sq. ft. office building. The owner of the business owns the facility under a separate entity and is willing to lease to the next owner. With a solid reputation in the area, the business has a long-standing relationship with customers; they are able to keep their service area within a 30-mile radius of the Des Moines metro.

    PRICE $5,648,580 CASH FLOW $1,569,050

  • Import and Distribution of Lifestyle Clothing and Apparel

     

    This private label clothing design and distribution company designs lifestyle apparel and imports and manufactures the apparel under private labels. With over 20 years of experience in the industry and three individual brands under their parent umbrella, this company has seen significant growth with an annualized revenue of over $10 million in 2022. The current owner works remotely, and his responsibilities include general oversight of the company and approving product designs, neither of which require much time in person. This business works with three international factories in China, India, and Pakistan and serves a wide variety of retail clients in the United States, Canada, and Europe. Specializing in creating lifestyle men’s wear including t-shirts, shorts, hoodies, long sleeves, and button-ups, this could be an excellent investment and consolidation opportunity for current clothing distributors struggling to break into men’s wear. Their skilled team includes 7 industry leading employees specializing in different necessary areas including design, marketing, sales, merchandising, and logistics. This business has nearly $800,000 of business equity included in the asking price based on the fair market value and the current owner has agreed to stay with the company for 1 to 2 years in order to ensure a smooth transition. On top of this, not only are the current owners offering to finance 10% of the purchase, but with the asking down payment of 15%, new owners can anticipate a 138% return on investment in the first year! The purchase of this business also includes nearly $500,000 in business equity based on the fair market value. There are also ample growth opportunities for new ownership to move into the women’s and children’s clothing fields utilizing their existing client relationships and thriving reputation for high quality and uniquely styled clothing.

    While this company’s sales are primarily to private label business, they also have a well-established online shop where consumers can buy products. This online shop ships products to 8 different countries, including Germany and France. They also collaborate with up-and-coming musical artists to offer exposure for not only the artist but also for their brand. There is currently 20+ ambassadors who proudly display their clothing at concerts, musical festivals, and other public events. As far as industry uniqueness goes, they focus on keeping products “complex but simple” and stay ahead of the market.

    With a price of $3,000,000, this business not only offers exponential financial assets included in the asking price, it also shows great promise moving forward as it continues to preserve essential clients and is looking for new ownership.

    PRICE $3,000,000 CASH FLOW $990,629

  • Web Based Marketing and Brand Development Service

    This primarily web based multi-faceted branding, advertising, and marketing firm is located in NYC and has clients dispersed nationwide. These clients primarily consist of financial services, national insurance agencies, technology, communications, and health care businesses. This agency provides all of the marketing services that a company could need including brand strategy, campaign development and implementation, web development, content marketing in television, print, digital, and social media, media planning and buying, and account-based marketing. Their core staff is comprised of seasoned senior executives who have worked for large global advertising agencies and, thanks to their ability work with consultants and freelancers as needed, they are able to adapt to any market ebb and flow. With over $1.9M in assets and over $8M in annual revenue for the past 3 consecutive years, the possibilities that new owners have with this business are seemingly endless and their 29% profit margin displays the payoff of having an experienced team and dedication to their field.

     

    Their core team consists of 30 full-time senior creative copy, creative art, strategy, and client service staff. The typical project scope runs from $20,000 to $150,000. With current assets and staff, low-cost growth opportunities include continuing to build client relationships with blue chip clients, and expanding outside of the current clientele focus. The three owners currently handle client relationships, financial management, and creative products; they are willing to stay on for up to three years and do a promissory note of 5% plus an equity roll of 10%.

     

    Priced at $10,900,000, this company is primed for purchase for anyone who wants to get involved in something proven and profitable. By continuing to build new client relationships, while cultivating existing connections, a new owner could certainly take this company to the next level.

    PRICE $10,900,000 CASH FLOW $2,206,622

  • Combined Listing – Firearm Sales & Services + Posh Restaurant with $5M in Revenue

     

    Something you don’t see every day – one owner selling two businesses!  For the price of $5.19M, you would be getting both a Firearm Sales & Services AND Posh Restaurant with $5M in Revenue!  By purchasing the two together, a buyer would be saving $200K Both businesses are located in the same strip center in Mechanicsburg, Pennsylvania, bringing in regular foot traffic and destination shoppers alike.

     

    At the firearms store, there are 5 FT employees and 1 PT.  The owner’s son is the managing member, and he is willing to stay on full time for the next owner.  That salary is accounted for in our cash flow.  The restaurant has 50 employees on staff, including a full management team for front of house and back of house.  The owner is willing to train and transition for 3-6 months at both businesses, as needed for the buyer.

     

    The COVID-19 pandemic forced the restaurant to close from mid-March to mid-April 2020, but they quickly bounced back with the introduction of curbside pickup (that is still presently utilized) and were back to full capacity by the middle of summer. The current owner provides general oversight for the day-to-day operations, filling roles and positions as needed during peak hours. With minimal online marketing, a significant growth opportunity exists for a new owner, with a current owner training period dependent on the experience and needs of the buyer.

     

    Customers of all types frequent the store – avid gun collectors, hunters, recreational shooters, people looking for a home protection firearm, local law enforcement agencies, first responders, and military personnel can find something to fit their needs. The revenue is generally split evenly between the sale of firearms vs. accessories. They also do firearm trade-ins, basic gunsmithing, scope installation, night sight installation, and total tear-down, cleaning, reassembly, and function checks. They sell approximately 3,000 firearms per year, with 1,000 of those sold to repeat customers.

     

    This combined listing is a unique opportunity to get into two very different industries at the same time!

    PRICE $5,190,000 CASH FLOW $1,373,804

  • E-commerce Drop-Shipping Office Supply Retailer with Specialty Software

     

     

    This dropship e-commerce company, priced at $4,700,000, has over 20 vendors and 75+ manufacturers, which is why they are able to offer over 400,000 SkU’s, focused on office and janitorial supplies. They primarily service B2B customers, made up of small to medium sized businesses purchasing office and janitorial supplies. In addition to their success, they were awarded a contract to sell office supplies to a network of over 250 hospitals and 350,000 shipping locations nationwide, including doctors’ offices. Their software, Channel Advisor, can manage up to 1 million SkU’s, allowing the new ownership significant room for growth. Being a dropship company, they carry little overhead, and with the extremely efficient team of 7 crosstrained employees, this order fulfillment company can be run from anywhere in the United States. This is proven, as the owner currently lives in Tampa but has relocated to 3 different states over the last 10 years. Their website is highly secure with the Green Address Bar SSL Certificate (highest in industry standard, equal to bank standard) and is tested daily to ensure its durability. The business is positioned to grow and expand in the online retail space. They are qualified for Amazon Seller Prime but are not currently using it – taking advantage of this qualification would lead to a substantial increase in traffic and revenue. The current owner is looking to sell this business due to health concerns as he is preparing to undergo back surgery but is confident of the continual success of this business and has offered a much larger than normal Promissory note of 25%, plus 1 year of training!


    PRICE $4,700,000 CASH FLOW $1,238,004

  • Earthwork, Shoreline Protection, Site Prep in Texas – 90+ FT Employees

    This Earthwork & Industrial Site Prep business completes 225 jobs per year, with a minimum of 20 active projects at one time!  Located in Victoria, Texas and with 90+ FT employees, their average client tenure is 13 years. Sale size ranges from $10k to $1.5M, with an average of $350k. With $9.4M in WIP and over $3M in their pipeline, work is plentiful for this well-diversified team. They offer a vast array of heavy civil construction services, including  building streets, subdivisions, commercial site preparation, and industrial work at petrochemical plants, as well as utility system construction, earthwork, site preparation, coastal erosion control, shoreline protection, and general maintenance. Clients are comprised of private developers, industrial, city, county, and state governments, and GC’s. This versatile offering of services and diverse client base works in this company’s favor, as they don’t rely heavily on one client or sector. Approximately 30% of their work is as the GC, primarily for the county, city, or state. The other 70% involves working for the GC on a project as the sub. While they do have a go-to list of subcontractors when needed, the majority of the time, it’s their own 90+ person team completing the work, which boosts profit margin.

     

    Over $7M in assets includes $5M in heavy equipment, $1.2M in vehicles, $57k worth of trailers, tools valued at $365k, and office furniture & software worth $379k. The team works out of a 6,000 sq. ft. office building located on 5 acres of land; their facilities also include 1 heavy equipment shop, 1 truck shop (2,000 sq. ft. each), and 1 fuel & oil shed (1,200 sq. ft.). The owner of the business owns the facility under a separate entity and leases it back to the business for $9,000/month; this rate would be kept the same under new ownership. With a solid reputation in the area, the business has long-standing relationships with customers and GC’s alike; they are able to keep their service area within a 100-mile radius of the office. 

     

    Utilizing top notch ComputerEase, HCSS, AGTEK, and Trimble software, this well-respected team receives invites to bid from GC’s they’ve worked with over the years where they have a 75% win rate; they also subscribe to websites that send notices of upcoming projects that are up for public bidding, with a 25% success rate on those. Priced at $20,250,000, there is ample opportunity for growth. Expanding the service area to other gulf states for high margin erosion control projects and actively pursuing more bids would certainly lead to an increase in revenue. There is currently a very limited sales team and little to no marketing. Working Capital is $2.1M and would transfer to the new owner.

    PRICE $20,250,000 CASH FLOW $4,154,501

  • Fire Protection Engineering Firm in Texas – 60% Profit Margin

    The current Senior Consultant for this fire protection engineering firm has over 20 years of experience and would be able to assume the role of CEO under new ownership! With a 60% profit margin and year-over-year growth in sales for 3 years, this Dallas company has a highly skilled team of employees already in place who run the day-to-day operations.  Established for over 25 years, this firm provides a wide array of services in all phases of fire protection engineering, including building & fire code consulting & engineering, fire alarm systems, automatic sprinkler systems, smoke exhaust systems, fire modeling, plan review, and systems testing. Their diverse client base consists of design professionals (55%), contractors (25%), federal government (10%), and private owners (10%), with their service area covering primarily Texas and surrounding states. The collaborative team of 7 includes the owner, a licensed Fire Protection Engineer, along with 1 Senior Consultant, 1 Senior Designer, 3 Engineers, and 1 Administrative Assistant. The team is based out of 2,300 sq. ft. office in Dallas, with a small 200 sq. ft. satellite office in San Antonio.

     

    Plan review customers are a portion of their ongoing client base; plan review services provide recurring monthly revenue, as it is a service in constant demand and yields steady cash flow for the company, accounting for approximately 20% of their total revenue per year. The average plan review fee ranges from $500-$1,000. Project sale sizes range anywhere from $2k-$200k, with an average sale size of around $10k. The firm uses state-of-the-art software packages such as AutoCAD, Revit, HydraCAD, AutoSPRINK, CFAST, FDS, Egress, and Intelligibility.

     

    Priced at $5,900,000, this firm has seen year-over-year growth in sales for 3 years and a 5-year average profit margin of 47%. A solid team is already in place; they run the day-to-day operations, handle clients regularly, and complete projects successfully. Over the years, this firm has gained a  reputation for providing some of the best services when it comes to fire protection and planning, giving them steady word-of-mouth referrals. Pursuing more projects in colleges & universities, school districts, and in the industrial sector would certainly lead to continued growth.

    PRICE $5,900,000 CASH FLOW $1,239,860

  • Commercial AC & Refrigeration Repair & Installation Service

    Established in 1997, this HVAC company located on Maui is known as the #1 refrigeration and air-conditioning company. Well known in the area for their excellent and prompt service and customer care, their excellent team consists of 16 employees, including trusted technicians, office staff, and installation managers. Due to the excellent reputation and efficient team, the owner of this successful HVAC company enjoys 3-4 months out of state each year! The business’s services are equally split between equipment service and installation. Their client base is made up of 90% commercial clients including condos, shopping centers, restaurants, and office buildings. They also service premium private residents. While the business had a small dip in revenue in 2020 due to covid, with a gross revenue of $4.8M in 2021 this business has already beat their pre-pandemic numbers and 2022 has continued to show growth and is expected to have a revenue of $5.2M.

     

    Having been in business for over 20 years, the owner has been able to train personnel to manage the business in his absence for 3-4 months per year and his current responsibilities consist of financial oversite and general management. To show vested interest in the business and assist with a smooth transition of ownership, the owner has offered a 1-year training period. Operations are managed from a large 6,000 square feet location in the Kahului area. The office has 2,000 square feet of space and the remaining 4,000 square feet is dedicated to their warehouse and sheet metal shop.

     

    Priced at $2,850,000, there is tremendous growth potential for a new owner. The company does almost no marketing; their only advertisement efforts being from their website and ads on their trucks. Over the years, all of their business has come from word of mouth due to the excellent service provided. A 12.5% down payment of $356,250 returns $410,069 in the first year after debt payments – a 115% return on investment! The current owner has also offered a 12.5% equity roll or financing to demonstrate his faith and continued investment in the success of the business. 

    PRICE $2,850,000 CASH FLOW $1,357,546

  • Mechanical Advisory Firm: Recurring Clients are 90% of Revenue

    With 90% of revenue coming from recurring clients, this mechanical advisory company subcontracts almost all their labor. They have been serving major commercial clients since 1992 in HVAC, mechanical, and plumbing and 80% of their business is from new construction with the remaining 20% coming from maintenance & repairs work. Deemed an essential business amid the pandemic, this company’s largest customers are food processing facilities and Amazon distribution centers, with a strong foothold in the logistical and institutional sectors. Their highly experienced team with 5+ year tenures, has over 100 years of combined experience; it consists of the owner, who acts as General Manager, plus 1 Project Manager, 1 Estimator, 1 Office Manager/Bookkeeper, and subcontractors as needed (3 of which are exclusive to this company).

    Using proprietary software that tracks the breakdown of all of their costs for each individual project has set them apart from the competition; it allows them to be exceptionally cost-conscious and pursue jobs that match their skill set, while being cost-effective. Clients know this company will always stay on budget. In addition, they have never lost money on a project due to their scientific approach to pricing.

    Established in 1992, they are a legacy company in the construction world; they receive invitations from the contracting and construction communities to bid a job and have a current win rate on bids of 50%!   This company does not market and advertising as 100% of their customers come from referrals from existing customers. With a current backlog of $6.5M, the team is committed to seeing a job through from beginning to end, from the bidding process to coordinating the resources and installation needed for the project. Services include plumbing, heating, ventilation, air conditioning, sprinklers, industrial gas fitting, steam fitting, process piping, and pneumatics.

    This would be a fantastic bolt-on opportunity for a control’s contractor, electrician, or civil contractor. Creating synergy between two companies would be an incredible opportunity to expand the market share and boost revenue.

     

    PRICE $11,750,000 CASH FLOW $2,416,800

  • Rail Terminal Services for Inbound & Outbound Freight with $5M in Assets

     

    Serving the Mid-Atlantic & Northeast region of the US for 30+ years, services offered include railroad terminal operation for inbound & outbound freight clients, clerical & inspection, equipment maintenance & repair, and transloading of commodities such as swamp mats, propane, residual waste, hazmat materials, and agricultural biproducts. The diverse customer base consists of transportation providers, agriculture industry, PennDOT, the energy sector, and plastics & lumber clients. Corporate headquarters are in Scranton; which is where all accounting/bookkeeping, insurance needs, and HR are done. There is an intermodal terminal operation located in Pennsylvania, and a bulk rail facility in New York that is a short line railroad and is project-oriented, handling everything from mats for pipelines, re-bar for road construction, and utility poles for the power industry. They also have a rail facility in PA with a certified truck scale and multiple conveyors. All locations are strategically located, and the employees are all cross trained to work at any location. The reason for sale is an aging owner, who resides out of state and is absentee from the business. The well-developed leadership team allows for passive ownership. The staff is comprised of an Operations Manager, VP of Business Development, 1 Controller, 1 Accounting/HR, 1 Safety Officer/Project Oversight, plus a number of day and night managers, mechanics, transload operators, crane operators, truck drivers, and clerical staff. Assets include 9 sand trans loaders/conveyers, 4 hostler trucks, 2 overhead gantry cranes, a vacuum life, and a variety of heavy lifting equipment, construction pieces, and scales. There is also working capital included of nearly $800K, plus land improvements and deposits. All assets included total over $5M! This type of business is recession-resistant, as the recently passed US Infrastructure Bill allows for natural growth. Billions of dollars are being dedicated to the improvement of the US infrastructure. Freight supports the delivery of materials directly related to road and bridge work. Expanding their service area further south, adding another fully functional terminal, increasing commodities, and looking further into increasing residual waste services all offer clear routes to further growth for an already strong operation.

    Priced at $5,700,000, the seller is willing to carry 1.4M of the purchase price. This shows the seller’s faith in the ongoing success of the company. She is willing to stay on board for up to 1 year after closing as well to ensure a strong and smooth training and transition.

     

    PRICE $5,700,000 CASH FLOW $1,257,891

  • Management of Residential & Commercial Improvement Projects

    With little to no overhead and a 129% return on investment, this well-established company offers one-stop project management services for residential, commercial, and government clients. This business has been serving Seattle and surrounding areas since 2004, launching as a franchise in 2019 to become more community-focused; offering expert training and support for all operational aspects of the business, their company goal is 100% franchisee satisfaction. Outsourcing all facility improvements, the current team  includes 4 Project Managers, 1 Sales Representative, and 1 Project Team Admin. All hands-on work is completed by subcontractors, reducing the need for large equipment investments, inventory storage, or a large team. This asset-light company uses digital management programs to manage and execute projects, keeping up-front costs down and profit margins up. The current owner does some project management, along with oversight of operations.

     

    With a well-established clientele, the company specializes in the management of construction projects which includes roofing, concrete or asphalt, turf installation, landscape construction, and snow removal.  Aside from snow removal, most services are large ticket construction services such as outdoor living spaces, concrete projects, repaving parking lots, or landscape construction.  They also provide Coronavirus Protective Services, including interior & exterior sanitation, physical barrier installation, board-up services, emergency electrical services, and emergency plumbing services.

    Great growth is possible through networking and building the customer base, targeted advertising, or expanding the territory as allowed. All territories can be managed with a team of four or less, and with minimal office space per territory.

    PRICE $5,300,000 CASH FLOW $1,533,254

  • Environmental & Biological Firm with a 36% Profit Margin

    This full-service environmental advisory firm has 80% private clients & public agencies and 20% federal government contracts and over 25 years of experience! Specializing in the preparation of CEQA/NEPA documents, biological, regulatory and cultural services, they are known as intellectual leaders in the environmental community. This highly focused team of 23 professionals with decades of experience leads clients through complex local, state and federal agency processes with excellence and maintains their business year over year. The seller is also willing to remain on for 2-4 years. They have a 36% profit margin and $5M in the pipeline!

    They serve a myriad of clients, working on jobs ranging from smaller development projects to $1.8 billion transportation improvements. Clients include builders/developers, cities, counties, water districts, school districts, the State of California, Caltrans, and metropolitan planning organizations throughout Southern California.

    This firm is focused on providing superior service to existing clients, identifying new potential clients and participating in the Women Transportation Seminar, American Planning Association and Association of Environmental Professionals.

    The owner currently works on business development and project/ financial oversight. Growth opportunities include the expansion of cultural and CEQA services as they become leading divisions for the company. 

     

    PRICE $9,225,000 CASH FLOW $1,688,412

  • Environmental Based Services - Lead, Mold & Asbestos

     

    A 12.5% down payment of $681,250 returns $691,301 in the first year after debt payments!  The seller is willing to hold 15% of the note and is willing to do either a seller carry or equity hold for that amount.  With a team of 90+ employees, this company allows for passive ownership. The team of well-trained specialists provide exceptional asbestos abatement, lead and mold remediation services.   With most projects one to two weeks in duration, this company completes 800 jobs per year.   Annually, there are typically one or two very large projects that bring in over 10% of income, but the projects and customers vary from year-to-year.  The diverse customer base includes industrial businesses (<5%), commercial companies (90%) and homeowners (<10%).   

     

    Leveraging their $3,004,099 in assets as well as their team of 75 union workers, this well-established company is efficient, driven, and well-respected for their industry knowledge.  They are often called upon to successfully complete projects that others consider exceedingly technical, challenging, or too large.  Located in a large facility, the warehouse has storage space for all equipment and inventory, while the office can house the 17-member administrative team comfortably.  This location will be for sale outside the sale of the business.

     

    The owners are not involved in the day-to-day operations, rather lending their skills to business analysis, financial management, and process improvement. 

     

    PRICE $5,450,000 CASH FLOW $1,456,295

  • Commercial Roofing with 16 Million in Backlog

     

     

    After 30 years in business, this 100% commercial roofing company has over 16 million in backlog and does 70% maintenance work! Their team includes 25 administrative staff members and a combined 60 metal workers and craftsman. The business will use subcontractors on a rare and minimal scale for specialty work. Their client base spans over a 120-mile radius of Erie, PA and consists of exclusively commercial clients, which, coupled with their excellent reputation, has led to their customer pool being made up of 60% recurring clients. Having been open for over 30 years, this business and team have been able to acquire an excellent reputation with their clients and have established profitable partnerships in their community and surrounding areas which keeps word of mouth marketing effective all year round. Though the owner is active in oversight and management, he is willing to stay on for 2 years post-close to not only train & transition, but to help find and train his replacement if the buyer desires. With over $6 million of assets included in the purchase, new ownership can expect to continue this business’s ongoing growth pattern without investing excessive resources into expanding opportunities. They fully self-perform all labor and have an extensive staff and established chain of command.

     

    This area is well known for their requirements of union-based employees and businesses for construction or repair work. Thankfully, this business is well intertwined with local unions, and 75% of their current projects come from those established partnerships. While they do some public work with these ties, expanding their partnerships and open bids to include more municipal work would be a huge opportunity for growth. Other opportunities would include expanding into residential work or growing the new installation side of business as their current primary focus is maintenance and repair.

     

    Priced at $14,950,000 a 10% down payment of $1,495,000 returns $1,619,957 in the first year after debt payments. The current owner is selling as part of his retirement strategy. 

     

    PRICE $14,950,000 CASH FLOW $3,615,422

Logistics/Distribution/Procurement (11)

  • Rail Terminal Services for Inbound & Outbound Freight with $5M in Assets

     

    Serving the Mid-Atlantic & Northeast region of the US for 30+ years, services offered include railroad terminal operation for inbound & outbound freight clients, clerical & inspection, equipment maintenance & repair, and transloading of commodities such as swamp mats, propane, residual waste, hazmat materials, and agricultural biproducts. The diverse customer base consists of transportation providers, agriculture industry, PennDOT, the energy sector, and plastics & lumber clients. Corporate headquarters are in Scranton; which is where all accounting/bookkeeping, insurance needs, and HR are done. There is an intermodal terminal operation located in Pennsylvania, and a bulk rail facility in New York that is a short line railroad and is project-oriented, handling everything from mats for pipelines, re-bar for road construction, and utility poles for the power industry. They also have a rail facility in PA with a certified truck scale and multiple conveyors. All locations are strategically located, and the employees are all cross trained to work at any location. The reason for sale is an aging owner, who resides out of state and is absentee from the business. The well-developed leadership team allows for passive ownership. The staff is comprised of an Operations Manager, VP of Business Development, 1 Controller, 1 Accounting/HR, 1 Safety Officer/Project Oversight, plus a number of day and night managers, mechanics, transload operators, crane operators, truck drivers, and clerical staff. Assets include 9 sand trans loaders/conveyers, 4 hostler trucks, 2 overhead gantry cranes, a vacuum life, and a variety of heavy lifting equipment, construction pieces, and scales. There is also working capital included of nearly $800K, plus land improvements and deposits. All assets included total over $5M! This type of business is recession-resistant, as the recently passed US Infrastructure Bill allows for natural growth. Billions of dollars are being dedicated to the improvement of the US infrastructure. Freight supports the delivery of materials directly related to road and bridge work. Expanding their service area further south, adding another fully functional terminal, increasing commodities, and looking further into increasing residual waste services all offer clear routes to further growth for an already strong operation.

    Priced at $5,700,000, the seller is willing to carry 1.4M of the purchase price. This shows the seller’s faith in the ongoing success of the company. She is willing to stay on board for up to 1 year after closing as well to ensure a strong and smooth training and transition.

     

    PRICE $5,700,000 CASH FLOW $1,257,891

  • Midwest Based Truck Driver Training Center

     

    For over 20 years this niche business has been educating students to get their CDL with driver training classes. They have both classroom and active driver training using their 15 Semis. They are also accredited through the DMV as an official 3rd party CDL testing site with a truck driver. Throughout North America, this post high school career path brings students that are 30% from the Midwest states and 70% from across the US. They have a location in Nebraska, strategically located on the I-80 which is the most travelled US interstate for coast-to-coast hauling. The purchase price includes a fleet of 16 Tractor Trailer Semis, buildout classrooms, a full curriculum, plus a full class schedule as truck drivers remain in high demand throughout North America. Additionally, the owner is offering 10% financing plus a 2-year training period to ensure a smooth and successful transition. A tangible growth strategy is to add additional community colleges to their referral partners. After becoming licensed through their program, a driver can now earn $80,000/year for only a $4,000 investment into their tuition. In 2019, the Federal Government mandated that every person applying for a CDL must complete an approved program through a training school. This business is an approved school and fits all requirements for this change. Also, in the state of Nebraska, the Department of Motor Vehicles no longer offers CDL testing and all testing for CDL licenses will be done by 3rd party examiners. This business holds all certifications necessary for this transition as well.

    Priced at $2,950,000, a 10% down payment of $295,000 returns $357,431 in the first year after debt payments. The owner has offered to carry 15% of the purchase price in order to show their vested interest in the continued success of the business moving forward. Many individuals who pursue CDL training may need to travel to Kearney, Nebraska, to attend the program; by providing onsite accommodations or partnering with local lodging establishments, they can offer convenience and comfort to out-oftown students. Additionally, having a restaurant space can provide meals and refreshments during training sessions, further enhancing the overall experience for students.


    PRICE $2,950,000 CASH FLOW $877,942

  • Fabrication of Doors, Cabinets, and Lockers – No Installation

     

    A fabrication business that specializes in the manufacturing of cabinet, louvre and locker doors for over 40 years. They primarily operate as a business-to-business (B2B) company, with approximately 98% of their sales being made to other businesses with a niche in health clubs and golf courses. They produce raw products, but do not engage in the design process. Instead, the B2B clients submit the design, which is then brought to life through their manufacturing capabilities. This company does not install the doors, nor do they work with the end user. The established team in place consists of a a Bookkeeper and 8 Fabrication Technicians. Additionally, the seller has agreed to a 1-year transition period in order to provide a smooth transition. The assets included in the purchase price have a replacement value of $1,880,240 and the current backlog is at $203,428. This business is located in the growing community of Montrose Colorado, which is roughly 45 minutes away from Grand Junction. The spacious facility is 14,298 square foot with ample room for expansion.

    Priced at $890,000, this business has established itself as a reputable player in the door manufacturing industry. The current owner is selling this business in order to plan for retirement and has offered to carry 10% of the purchase price in order to show vested interest in the continued success of the business. A 10% down payment of $89,000 returns $246,001 in the first year after debt payments! They do not engage in metalwork or plastics. Additionally, they do not provide any hardware or finishing services. Their manufacturing process solely involves working with raw materials and does not require the use of chemicals or spray finishes.

     

    PRICE $890,000 CASH FLOW $300,218

  • Manufacturing and Fabrication of Millwork – 100% B2B with $6M in Backlog

     

     

    Operating out of a 14,000 sq, ft. fabricating facility in Salt Lake City, which they recently moved to keep up with the year-over-year growth, in fact, they are experiencing a higher-than-normal backlog of over $6M! Over the last 3 decades, this fabrication & millwork operation has served a repeat base of commercial clients; ranging across schools/universities, hospitals, churches, detention centers and office buildings. Known for high quality, specialized manufacturing of cabinetry and related goods, there is a tenured team of 26, including 5 in Administration, 11 in the Shop, and 6 in the Field. They have an expert leadership team running the day-to-day operations, made up of a General Manager, Shop Foreman, Production Manager, and a Project Manager. The owner is removed from the daily roles, he is more of the “Big Vision” and general oversight of his key people. After 30 years, he is retiring, but is committed to a 2–3-year transition to ensure ongoing success of the business. He is also willing to finance 10- 15% of the purchase price. There is over $3 million in assets with the purchase, which includes CNC routers, horizontal boring machine, gliding saw, table & chip saw, timesaver sander, software, 1 pick-up, 2 trailers, 2 vans, 2 box trucks and all of the additional equipment and tools needed to operate the business. They have a focused service area in the Southwest US. There are no affiliations or special certifications associated with this business, meaning they are not MBE, WBE, veteran owned, union, etc.

    Priced at $3,825,000, this business comes with a proven history, a tenured staff, and reliable client base, allowing for a buyer to step in and continue operating and growing successfully from day one. A 12.5% down payment of $478,125 returns $518,603 in the first year after debt payments!

     

    PRICE $3,825,000 CASH FLOW $1,061,649

  • Wholesale of Niche Goods with 46,000 sq. ft. of Distribution Space

     

    Their distribution facility ships to over 800 B2B customers across the Continental US, made up of truck stops, grocery store chains, ecommerce companies, and more. There is a good mix of wholesale clients versus dropship orders where no inventory is held. The business has a highly diverse portfolio of more than 40 vendors, such as Riddell, WinCraft, and Fremont Die. There is a strong leadership team in place, including a President, Controller, Purchasing Manager, and Sales Director, plus a full warehouse & shipping team. The tenured President will stay in place as operator if the buyer desires. The owner resides out of state and has a very minimal role. The assets included are valued at $2,025,000, these assets are licensed sports team novelty items, a forklift, extensive warehouse shelving, pallet shrink wrapper, packaging equipment, pallet racking, and leasehold improvements. The company produced nearly $9M in revenue in 2022, putting $1.2M to the bottom line. Boasting over 300 types of products ranging across accessories, gifts, home goods, and gear, they have something for every fan. They do not sell shoes, clothes, or sports equipment. Their most popular product brands include products associated with the NFL, MLB, NBA, MLS, NGH, Nascar, US Army, Jack Daniels, and Harley Davidson.

    Priced at $5,700,000, this business includes 2 million in assets, a strong team, and solid reputation and history, putting a new owner in the perfect position to continue operating and growing successfully. Over 3 decades ago, this company started with the teenage owner who sold his first baseball card; now over 30 years later, this business thrives in the distribution of sports products & highly recognizable brands. The owner is willing to finance 10% and/or retain 5% equity, as a show of good faith in the ongoing success of the business. A 10% down payment of $570,000 returns $618,947 in the first year after debt payments!

     

     

    PRICE $5,700,000 CASH FLOW $1,300,112

  • Enviro Services of Drilling Waste: 100% Absentee Owner

     

     

    This company currently has 250 clients, of which 50+ of those are recurring with the typical client being a municipality or utility company. This company handles all aspects of the industrial clean up services and disposal & hauling of drilling waste for oil field productions. Their equipment & vehicles have a value of over $2.6MM and consists of combo vacs, tank trucks, straight vacs, water trucks, mobile steamers, and maintenance units. This variety of equipment also gives them the ability to perform a mixture of maintenance, water delivery, vegetation control, water truck services, & mobile steaming. The Leadership Team is in place & consists of twenty-three employees. There are 5 in Administration (Vice President of Operation, General Manager of Fleet & Dispatch, Billing Manager, Safety Officer, and Dispatch); 13 Operators, and 5 in the Shop. The uniquely qualified team allows the owner to be able to live remote, more than 2 hours away, and only does light oversight of the business. Financing should be a breeze as this company is boasting a 20% Profit Margin and is 100% collateralized, plus there is roughly $375K of working capital that is included in the purchase price as well.

    At the purchase price of $4,950,000 CAD, with a 20% investment from the Buyer, the Seller will show a vested interest in the business’s success by holding a note for 10% and rolling equity of 10% allowing the bank to be at a 60% loan, making the business over 100% collateralized. The business has a focus in Alberta with clients across Canada. The company’s leased space consists of an 11-acre industrial fully fenced yard site, a 750 sq. ft. office with 4 maintenance bays, and a 5-bedroom crew house.

     

    PRICE $4,950,000 CASH FLOW $979,115

  • Manufacturer of “Everyday Apparel” with Big Box Clients

     

    Priding themselves on what is called “Elevated Everyday Apparel,” which they design, oversee manufacturing, and then distribute to their clients. Their clients are highly reputable and recognizable, including Nordstroms, Burlington, PacSun, and as of last quarter, they are now rolling out Target! The company has manufacturers in Mexico, Guatemala, and China and distribution throughout North America. They have 10 of their own brands, over 50 licenses, and also do white label for retailers. The team is well developed with 4 in management/office administration, 7 in art and design, 3 in sales, and 4 in production. The two owners spend about 20 hours a week in the business, with Owner 1 overseeing the production and sales team, and Owner 2 working with the art department and merchandising. One person easily could perform both roles. This replacement salary is accounted for in the cash flow. As a show of good faith, they are offering a combination of 10% promissory note and a 10% equity roll for a total of 20% proving their vested interest in the continued success of this business.

     

    PRICE $3,300,000 CASH FLOW $890,270

  • Packaging & Wholesale of Holistic Goods: Owner will stay 5 years and carry 40%

    Boasting sales of $30MM, this B2B business has two primary client types: smaller wholesalers and direct to shop owners. Services include wholesale, coordinating manufacturing, packaged development with fulfillment, and arranging logistics through 3rd party freight. This team includes a CFO, General Manager, VP of Sales, Retail Lead, 2 Manufacturing Leads, Warehouse Lead, 4 Warehouse Associates, 5 In House Sales Reps, 24 Packagers, and 19 Outside Sales Reps. They do not have any drivers, all are outsourced. They focus mainly on Distribution and Logistics to other smaller wholesalers which make up 59% of their revenue, while 38% is sold Business to Business to multi location owners; less than 3% is sold direct to the consumer and this is intentional for research and development purposes. The current owner recently reinvested significant amounts of time and money into expanding operations, including moving to a distribution center twice the size to handle the growth. They operate out of a 12,000 sq. ft. distribution facility in Southern California. In 2023 they added another distribution center in Florida. The goal for selling is to expand with a Strategic Buyer or Equity Group who can bring strong business acumen. The owner will remain on board for 4-5 years and is willing to do a 40% carry or equity roll combo as a sign of a vested interest in the business’s success. Currently there are 36 States who have recognized these Low-Dose consumables as a legal product and there are projected to be another 7 states that will follow suit in the next 6-9 months. The business does not sell any traditional cannabis products but rather regulated hemp which allows them to legally sell across state lines.

    This business is priced at $49,000,000, producing a 30% profit margin! There are 43 well-known and respectably sized Private Equity Groups and dozens of publicly traded companies that own very similar businesses! Another growth area is in manufacturing, bringing it in house to boost productivity.

     

    PRICE $49,000,000 CASH FLOW $9,835,970

  • Import and Distribution of Lifestyle Clothing and Apparel

     

    This private label clothing design and distribution company designs lifestyle apparel and imports and manufactures the apparel under private labels. With over 20 years of experience in the industry and three individual brands under their parent umbrella, this company has seen significant growth with an annualized revenue of over $10 million in 2022. The current owner works remotely, and his responsibilities include general oversight of the company and approving product designs, neither of which require much time in person. This business works with three international factories in China, India, and Pakistan and serves a wide variety of retail clients in the United States, Canada, and Europe. Specializing in creating lifestyle men’s wear including t-shirts, shorts, hoodies, long sleeves, and button-ups, this could be an excellent investment and consolidation opportunity for current clothing distributors struggling to break into men’s wear. Their skilled team includes 7 industry leading employees specializing in different necessary areas including design, marketing, sales, merchandising, and logistics. This business has nearly $800,000 of business equity included in the asking price based on the fair market value and the current owner has agreed to stay with the company for 1 to 2 years in order to ensure a smooth transition. On top of this, not only are the current owners offering to finance 10% of the purchase, but with the asking down payment of 15%, new owners can anticipate a 138% return on investment in the first year! The purchase of this business also includes nearly $500,000 in business equity based on the fair market value. There are also ample growth opportunities for new ownership to move into the women’s and children’s clothing fields utilizing their existing client relationships and thriving reputation for high quality and uniquely styled clothing.

    While this company’s sales are primarily to private label business, they also have a well-established online shop where consumers can buy products. This online shop ships products to 8 different countries, including Germany and France. They also collaborate with up-and-coming musical artists to offer exposure for not only the artist but also for their brand. There is currently 20+ ambassadors who proudly display their clothing at concerts, musical festivals, and other public events. As far as industry uniqueness goes, they focus on keeping products “complex but simple” and stay ahead of the market.

    With a price of $3,000,000, this business not only offers exponential financial assets included in the asking price, it also shows great promise moving forward as it continues to preserve essential clients and is looking for new ownership.

    PRICE $3,000,000 CASH FLOW $990,629

  • Barcode Solutions and Integration: 50% Collateralized

    With over $420,000 in assets included in purchase, this barcode solutions and integration business opportunity is over 50% collateralized. In addition to the hard assets offered with the business, this company has over 1,800 active customers in their client base made up of 55% resellers and 45% end-users! With services including barcode system integration, equipment maintenance, fulfillment, troubleshooting, and solutions, this business is able to operate nationwide and has some international customers as well. The bulk of their sales (65%) consists of media/consumables (labels, thermal transfer ribbons, thermal tags, warehouse signs); they also sell software (asset tracking, barcode label printing, inventory control/WMS software), and hardware (barcode scanners, label printers, receipt printers, etc.). The current staff is made up of 5 employees including 1 office and marketing manager, 1 east coast manager (based in Georgia), 1 part-time employee, 1 1099 sales representative (based in Chicago), and one owner who handles general oversite and some accounting and order processing. This owner has offered a training/ transition period of 3-5 years and their salary for this time period has been accounted for in the cash flow analysis.

     

    The company currently places their orders with nearly 240 vendors and keeps approximately $103K worth of inventory on hand at any given time. They pack and ship customer-specific orders daily and distribute the shipments locally as well as nationwide using United Parcel Service and LTL freight companies. This small but efficient team produced nearly $2M in sales in 2020 and is on track to make $2.4M in 2022. A new owner has the opportunity to expand into new industries or continue to run this successful business as-is.

     

    Priced at $815,000, a new owner is expected to see a 233% return on investment in the first year after debt payments based on the 2022 annualized cash flow and the loan needed for this purchase will be over 50% collateralized. Growth is unlimited, as there are untapped markets across the country. Small businesses all the way up to large retail chains need these services to keep up with ever-evolving technology while maintaining profitability and keeping costs low.

    PRICE $815,000 CASH FLOW $368,815

  • E-commerce Drop-Shipping Office Supply Retailer with Specialty Software

     

     

    This dropship e-commerce company, priced at $4,700,000, has over 20 vendors and 75+ manufacturers, which is why they are able to offer over 400,000 SkU’s, focused on office and janitorial supplies. They primarily service B2B customers, made up of small to medium sized businesses purchasing office and janitorial supplies. In addition to their success, they were awarded a contract to sell office supplies to a network of over 250 hospitals and 350,000 shipping locations nationwide, including doctors’ offices. Their software, Channel Advisor, can manage up to 1 million SkU’s, allowing the new ownership significant room for growth. Being a dropship company, they carry little overhead, and with the extremely efficient team of 7 crosstrained employees, this order fulfillment company can be run from anywhere in the United States. This is proven, as the owner currently lives in Tampa but has relocated to 3 different states over the last 10 years. Their website is highly secure with the Green Address Bar SSL Certificate (highest in industry standard, equal to bank standard) and is tested daily to ensure its durability. The business is positioned to grow and expand in the online retail space. They are qualified for Amazon Seller Prime but are not currently using it – taking advantage of this qualification would lead to a substantial increase in traffic and revenue. The current owner is looking to sell this business due to health concerns as he is preparing to undergo back surgery but is confident of the continual success of this business and has offered a much larger than normal Promissory note of 25%, plus 1 year of training!


    PRICE $4,700,000 CASH FLOW $1,238,004

Hospitality/Events/Restaurants (11)

  • Luxury Black Car Service for Corporate Clients: Focused on Airport Travel

     

    Not everyone wants to use a ride share app such as Uber or Lyft, and before ride share, not all people wanted to use a taxi, which is why for more than 25 years, this luxury transportation and black car service business has withstood the test of time! The company is located in Tampa and operates in about a 50-mile radius. This company’s primary clients are corporate/business travelers with prearranged car service to and from the airport. This makes up 70% of their revenue. An additional 15% comes from black car or limo service, which take professionals to and from meetings or are booked by a luxury hotel concierge service for their guests. The last 15% is from the school transport division, which takes students to field trips or after school activities. In the purchase of this business is 15+ vehicles, including luxury sedans, luxury SUVs, executive vans, SUVs, minivan, passenger van valued at $332,000. The team consists of 1 Customer Service Manager, 1 Customer Service Rep, 1 Dispatch Manager, 1 Mechanic, and 40-50 contract drivers. Currently, the owner is only responsible for general oversight and handling AP, which the CSR Manager would be easily able to wrap into their current job responsibilities. The owner is ready to “turn over the keys” to the next owner so he can ease into retirement while he stays on board for 1 year during a transition period.

    With a multiple of 3.8, this business is priced at $1,025,000. The owner is willing to carry 10% of the note, showing a vested interest in the ongoing success of the company. There is also space to expand service into nonemergency medical transportation.

    PRICE $1,025,000 CASH FLOW $270,864

  • Vinyl Fabrication with 100% Wholesale to Distributors

     

     

    This vinyl fabrication company distributes raw vinyl products to wholesalers and large advertising firms, their customer is not the end user. The production facility is a spacious 8,100 sq. ft. uniquely modified fabrication space. The owner has lived out of state for over 3 years, and what allows him to do this is the President who operates the company and has been there nearly 20 years. Also included on their staff is an Art Director, Sales Manager, Production Manager, several Finishers, along with Customer Service Associates. The product mix is 33% vinyl banners, 33% trade show displays, and 33% specialty graphics. The distribution network they have built is nationwide with a hyper focus in the Southwest region. This business has been 100% SBA approved for a qualified buyer who has 10% cash down. A buyer who puts down 10% of the purchase price will receive a return of $256K after their loan payment – this is an incredible rate of return! The cash flow for the last twelve months is $577K, which is a 27% profit margin. There is little to no advertising, marketing, or business development, and this company is successfully operating and growing year over year by simply servicing their existing client base. Priced at $2,150,000, this business is primed and ready for a new owner who is looking to expand into the design space. The owner has offered 10% Seller Financing to show his vested interest in the continued success of the business moving forward in addition to a transition period of 6 months to 1 year.

     

     

    PRICE $2,150,000 CASH FLOW $566,116

  • Architecture Firm with 20+ on Staff – Owner will stay 3 years

     

     

    This architecture firm provides B2B services to corporate clients in the hospitality, entertainment, and senior living industries throughout Toronto. The firm has been established 30+ years and boasts a team of 21 employees, including a CFO, general manager, 9 registered architects, 4 technical draftsmen, and 3 architect interns. They also have 3 contract architects who handle overflow work as needed. Services include interior styling, architecture, and design management. Although they primarily serve the Ontario metropolitan area, they have performed work in the US in the past. The owner have very limited billable hours in the business, providing team and project management as needed. The sellers are seeking a new owner due to succession and retirement planning, but to help ensure the ongoing success of the company, the owners are offering an extended transition period of 3-4 years.

    With the purchase, a buyer would also receive over $480,000 in working capital and all the equipment and software needed. 2023 displayed an incredible profit margin of 64%! The price of $7,800,000 CAD includes a 15% seller promissory note alongside a 10% equity hold to show good faith in the continued success of the business post-close.

     

    PRICE $7,800,000 CASH FLOW $1,563,546

  • Event Backdrop with Pipe and Drape Services

    This production company has been providing pipe and drape services to produce beautiful back drops for events within a 100-mile radius of Houston for over 20 years. Their target client is 40% Corporate Events, 35% comes from referrals from audio visual companies, 25% comes from fundraising, non-profit and private events such as showers and quinceaneras. The venue type that this special event company flourishes in are at large banquet halls or convention centers, trade shows, Gala’s and pageant stages. In fact, they do pageants for the entire state of Texas. Income breakout is about 75% from pipe and drape rentals and because they own all of the inventory this has a very high margin, the other 25% of the business comes from planning and coordinating sub-contractors. They do not do any sort of floral, AV, DJ or music, or catering and liquor. Though these are all great growth opportunities to work closely with these types businesses and create more referrals. The owner is selling as she is in her 60s and entering retirement, she is happy to stay on train and transition for 6 months to one year. Additionally, she is willing to finance 10% to show her vested interest in the success of the business moving forward. The overhead is very low as there are only 4 storage units which is $450/ month. Though they have a large pool of contractors that they work with, there is a core team of 6 that they are working with on a regular basis. The purchase comes with 2 box trucks and a trailer used to haul all of the rental pieces, an abundant amount of inventory such as drapery, linens and table decor and there is almost $60K in customer deposits that will transfer over for upcoming events.

    Priced at $520,000, with a diverse client base consisting of corporate entities, audiovisual companies, fundraisers, and private events, has built a solid reputation in the Houston area. A 10% down payment of $52,000 returns $70,277 in the first year after debt payments! They cater to roughly 125 events per year and this is good for a brand-new business owner or for someone who has been in hospitality for a number of years.

     

    PRICE $520,000 CASH FLOW $145,147

  • Versatile Restaurant Space Ready for Turnkey Operation

    This restaurant space is a prime opportunity for entrepreneurs seeking a turnkey operation that can be opened immediately. With a focus on assets, this space boasts high-end finishes and brand-new equipment, creating an upscale space for customers. Included in the sale are over $300,000 in assets and an $800,000 buildout. This would be an amazing start for anyone looking to enter the restaurant space, as it has recently been updated and is ready to go, which is a rare opportunity.

    Priced at $285,000, this business purchase comes with a versatile space and an abundance of assets, while also being in a prime location. The space is located in an area right off the interstate, bustling with foot traffic, and surrounded by strip malls with a number of thriving businesses. One growth opportunity includes the concept of an American Grill restaurant, as no other exists near the area. With the ability to re-imagine the concept, this space offers an exciting opportunity in the restaurant field.

    PRICE $285,000

  • Residential Playground Equipment: Sales and Installation

     

     

    Focused on Sports Courts and Playgrounds (both residential and commercial) and trampoline systems. This is an allencompassing project management company that begins with customer consultation, design & layout, logistics & delivery; then implementation followed by annual maintenance and equipment additions. Proven over the test of time, this business will turn 30 this year and there is no stop in sight as they are projecting higher sales than last years $3.2 million (which was the highest year)! There are 10 on staff, with 3 sales associates, 1 receptionist and greeter, and 6 installers (2 full time, 2 seasonal, and 2 subs). There is plenty of room to display all the recreation this company can bring to a backyard in their 20,000 sq. ft. facility; which includes offices, warehouse space and a showroom. The assets included in the purchase of this business are valued at $572,916 and this includes hoops, trampolines, playground equipment, vehicles and more.

    Priced at $2,425,000, the current owner has offered a transition/ training period of up to one year to ensure a smooth transition. With growth opportunities including partnering with small schools, public parks, and growing the commercial side of business and by adding other product lines such as ninja warrior courses, gazebos, picnic tables, and firepits. With a 10% down payment of $242,500, a buyer can expect a return of $177,336 in the first year after debt payments.

     

    PRICE $2,425,000 CASH FLOW $494,502

  • Combined Listing – Firearm Sales & Services + Posh Restaurant with $5M in Revenue

     

    Something you don’t see every day – one owner selling two businesses!  For the price of $5.19M, you would be getting both a Firearm Sales & Services AND Posh Restaurant with $5M in Revenue!  By purchasing the two together, a buyer would be saving $200K Both businesses are located in the same strip center in Mechanicsburg, Pennsylvania, bringing in regular foot traffic and destination shoppers alike.

     

    At the firearms store, there are 5 FT employees and 1 PT.  The owner’s son is the managing member, and he is willing to stay on full time for the next owner.  That salary is accounted for in our cash flow.  The restaurant has 50 employees on staff, including a full management team for front of house and back of house.  The owner is willing to train and transition for 3-6 months at both businesses, as needed for the buyer.

     

    The COVID-19 pandemic forced the restaurant to close from mid-March to mid-April 2020, but they quickly bounced back with the introduction of curbside pickup (that is still presently utilized) and were back to full capacity by the middle of summer. The current owner provides general oversight for the day-to-day operations, filling roles and positions as needed during peak hours. With minimal online marketing, a significant growth opportunity exists for a new owner, with a current owner training period dependent on the experience and needs of the buyer.

     

    Customers of all types frequent the store – avid gun collectors, hunters, recreational shooters, people looking for a home protection firearm, local law enforcement agencies, first responders, and military personnel can find something to fit their needs. The revenue is generally split evenly between the sale of firearms vs. accessories. They also do firearm trade-ins, basic gunsmithing, scope installation, night sight installation, and total tear-down, cleaning, reassembly, and function checks. They sell approximately 3,000 firearms per year, with 1,000 of those sold to repeat customers.

     

    This combined listing is a unique opportunity to get into two very different industries at the same time!

    PRICE $5,190,000 CASH FLOW $1,373,804

  • 100% Delivery & Take Out – Omaha Pizza Franchise Location

     

    This Omaha pizza franchise location is currently 100% delivery & take out and is still seeing an increase in revenue through COVID! This location for sale has been in business since 1980, and under current ownership since 2006. There are around 21 employees, with FT Shift Leaders, and PT Kitchen Staff, Front Counter, and Delivery Drivers. All employees start at $11/hr., with Shift Leader pay at $18-18.50/hr. 80% of all employees are trained to full completion through the corporate online training. As the restaurant is franchised, a 5% portion of the revenue is paid out to the corporation, in addition to a small fee of $61/month for a customer loyalty program, in which a customer can earn free items as they accumulate points through the restaurant’s app. Their POS, Speedline, is fully integrated through Tillster, so the push of one button sets delivery in motion. Approximately 77% of the revenue is from dinner orders (after 4:00).

     

    Post-COVID, the restaurant has transitioned to be fully delivery and take-out based, with sales vastly improving over 2019. Currently, the dining area is still closed, and thus would be a perfect growth opportunity for a new owner, as the present dining area furniture was reupholstered during the COVID shutdown. Other key assets include two Middleby Marshall ovens, a make table, 60 qt. Hobart mixer, cooler, a Somerset dough sheeter, and POS systems. A great deal of local marketing is already done, with an advertising co-op being headed by local owners, and advertising partnerships done with local schools. The current owner provides general management and oversight for the location, opening the restaurant on Mondays and overall working 25-30 hours per week.

     

    Priced at just $535,000, a 15% down payment of $80,250 returns $88,861 in the first year after debt payments – a 111% return on investment!  A new owner could certainly boost revenue by obtaining a liquor license and re-opening the dining room.

    PRICE $535,000 CASH FLOW $156,707

  • Floral Boutique with 22% Profit Margin in Omaha

    Established floral studio and store with over $500,000 in gross sales. Situated in a well-trafficked strip mall in Omaha, this anchor store has become a staple since its opening in 2003. Delivering within the Omaha metro, this store has a customer retention rate of 80%. Sales have been at a steady clip over the last few years, bolstered by daily orders and contracts. The current owner has recently been signed for a large event that is expected to invoice over $6,000, and any ownership transition should not interrupt this deal.

    All staff are well-trained and capable, working within set hours and with the understood need for some seasonal flexibility. Currently there are three full-timers and one part-timer employed in the studio, in addition to two alternating delivery drivers. Employees are encouraged to help in the creation of custom floral designs that are then featured for sale. The seller is also assisted by a part-time bookkeeper who logs invoices into ShopKeep Point of Sale software.

    The 2,000-square foot building is leased at $11.25 per square foot, which is half of what most stores pay in this particular development. Leasing is all inclusive, covering the shop’s common area as well. Included in the sale is a delivery vehicle with around 50,000 in mileage.

    With the right buyer, this already successful business could increase sales through improving web traffic and revamping marketing materials. Seller is willing to finance 20%, and with a down payment of $24,000, a new owner may expect to see a three-fold return and a profit of $95,749 the first year.

    PRICE $120,000 CASH FLOW $113,432

  • 105-Person Capacity Bar with Kitchen

    In business for 14 years, this business has $180,000 in buildout with a capacity of 105 people! They added a cozy fenced in patio with wind protection for smokers. Equipment totals $60,000 and includes a walk-in freezer/fridge, a kitchen hood, dishwasher, and miscellaneous furniture, fixtures, and equipment. There are two full time bartenders/ servers and five part-time servers/bartenders that take care of the customers. The lease is $4,635 per month for 2,500 square feet and a new owner would only have to put forth a down payment of $40,000.

    Selling the business as a part of a planned retirement strategy, the current owner is responsible for cleaning, inventory management, vendor relations, bookkeeping, bank deposits and payroll. There are growth opportunities in advertising on social media, establishing B2B relationships with nearby businesses and other forms of low cost or free advertising.

    With continual development in the area, this bar and grill is in the prime location for success! When it comes to the developing areas in Omaha, this is one to watch.  The neighboring $200MM project will bring apartment complexes, 300,000 sq. ft. of office space and neighborhood retail and an amphitheater near this retail hot spot. Sporting a unique theme that lures in a mix of consistent locals and fresh out of town visitors, the bar hosts competitive dart leagues throughout the week, Keno and karaoke on the weekends to keep the place busy.


    PRICE $115,000

  • Award-Wiinning Eatery near Omaha

    This eatery very close to Omaha does not only have great-tasting food, but also happens to be in a location full of growth potential!! A new big-box department store has just been approved nearby along with a new street sign, leading to more traffic and MORE customers! This eatery has won “Best Of” in their current location. It has also already grown 24.1% since last year 

    PRICE $137,000 CASH FLOW $90,403

Selfcare/Childcare (10)

  • Non-Medical Home Health & Recession Resistant

     

     

    This home health business handles the non-medical care of clients across 5 different counties! This agency has more than 50 caregivers employed and a top leadership team of 3 managers that allow the seller to work a minimal 15 hours per week. Not only are the clients for this business diversified, they will need the care offered by this establishment regardless of the current economic status, meaning this business is essentially recession resistant. The client type for this in-home care company consists of people who require more assistance within their day-day activities. Seniors, respite patients, those with dementia, and veterans are their main focus. This companion care business recently received a contract with the VA in 2021, expanding their already diverse client base. Located in Omaha, NE, their service area currently includes the Omaha Metropolitan Area and surrounding cities, reaching as far as Fremont, Ralston, Bellevue, and Council Bluffs. Primarily these caregivers are in the homes of their clients, allowing this business to operate out of a 2,800 sq. ft. office space which in return keeps the overhead cost low. The current owner is selling due to deterring health unfortunately.

    Priced at $849,000, the current owner has offered 10% financing as a show of good faith in the continued success of the business after sale. This investment has exponential growth including further development the Fremont and Council Bluffs client bases, developing the newly awarded VA contract, and creating partnerships with workman’s compensation divisions. While each of these opportunities could provide significant growth with minimal additional investment, a buyer could also have the chance to enjoy their 18% profit margin if they wanted to be passive and not do anything to improve!

     

    PRICE $849,000 CASH FLOW $239,207

  • Production Lab for Dental Implants

     

    The current owner of this dental implant production lab is willing to stay on with the business for 2 years after the sale, and their salary has been accounted for in the listed cash flow! This business is a stable investment into the dental industry and can be viewed as an essential economic need which is clearly shown in their continually growing revenue, even during the pandemic. This Omaha based business has been in service over 20 years and has a diverse list of services offered including designing and producing custom dental fixtures such as Implant Restorations, 3D Printing & Milling, Crowns, Custom Shades, Diagnostic Wax-Ups, Dentures, Metal Frame, Flexible Partials, Retainers, Veneers and many more. This full-service dental lab not only has all of the services that any doctor, dentist, or oral surgeon could nee, but also offers an experienced and efficient team including 6 technicians and 1 driver who collectively have a tenure of 3 or more years with the business! This is a business that clients depend on and integrate into their practices. The dental studio helps doctors and dentists increase patient retention and referrals by reducing chair time and increasing satisfaction. This implements success for not only the client, but for the company as well.

     

    Due to the first-rate custom products this studio provides, most of their clients are recurring and long-lasting! There is an Instagram page, but no true marketing has ever been done. The studio owner prefers to keep business local, but in the past has had clients in states across the U.S. and has the resources and space in their 1,600 sq. ft. lab to bring this practice back now. These resources include over $250k in assets such as 3D printers, compressors, scanners, a delivery vehicle and more.

     

    At a purchase price of $945,000, a buyer can expect a $197,487 return in the first year after debt payments! This laboratory has plenty of growth opportunities, including offering services to doctors and dentists nationally and an increase in general marketing and advertisements. A great reputation and a highly experienced team have resulted in this business being perfect for transitioning a new owner to continue the reputable dental laboratory.

    PRICE $945,000 CASH FLOW $360,154

  • Craniofacial Practice with Over 90% Referral Based Clients

     

    This practice specializes in Craniofacial care for clients with TMJ, sleep apnea, migraines, and headaches. Craniofacial care is the specialized care of pain and sleep disorders specific to the neck and above. You do not need to be a DDS or MD to own this business. To ensure a smooth transition of ownership and continuity of operations, the current owner is willing to provide training and support for a period of one to two years. They have also expressed their willingness to extend this period if the new owner requires further assistance. The seller is approaching retirement age which has prompted the decision to sell the business. This presents an opportunity for a new owner to take over and continue providing specialized care to patients in need. The current owner completes 20 hours per week - aiding in the lab and assessing patients. The client base consists of professional referrals from referring physicians, dentists, and physical therapists or chiropractors. The Breakdown of services is as follows: 50% craniofacial pain, 30% dental sleep medicine, 20% dental facial orthopedics & orthodontics. The team consists of 1 FT receptionist who handles administrative tasks and manages patient appointments, 2 dental assistants who assist in providing care to patients and 1 FT lab technician. The business operates from a spacious 2,100 square feet facility with 4 treatment rooms, a reception area, 2 offices, a break room, lab, and utility room. Included in the purchase price is $185,000 worth of instruments, supplies and furnishings. Located in Lincoln, Nebraska this center has been providing comprehensive services for craniofacial pain since 2011.

    Priced at $440,000, with a 10% down payment of $44,000 a buyer can expect a return of $65,045 in the first year after debt payments. This opportunity presents a relatively high margin with a low multiple of 3.4 and due to the assets valued at $185,000, the bank loan is over 50% collateralized! There are several growth opportunities that can be explored. One potential avenue for expansion is to introduce cosmetic dental services, catering to clients seeking aesthetic improvements. Additionally, expanding into cosmetic injectables such as Botox!

     

    PRICE $440,000 CASH FLOW $128,396

  • Absentee Owned Laundromat with Full Service Drop Off

     

     

    Strategically located in Williston, ND, which is a temporary home for over 100,000 laborers who migrate to the region for work in the agriculture, fields, and energy industries, and reside in temporary homes who need the access to do laundry. This 3,600 sq ft facility offers self-service laundry, shower facilities and drop-off services where employees will wash, dry and fold laundry for the customer. The owner lives out of state and only visits a few times a year. The business has 1 general manager along with 4-5 laundry techs. This spacious laundromat was established in 2012 and competition in the area is very low. The pay-per-load machines utilize a card service as opposed to cash and coin which is much more secure and safe, especially for the outof-state owner. Included is over $474,000 in hard assets, with the bank loan being $490,000 this is nearly 100% collateralized. An SBA lender has pre-approved this deal structure. North Dakota is ranked 2nd, after Texas, as the highest oil producing state. Due to this fact, many oil companies will send swathes of contractors to this area and this business is noted as a preferred laundromat for their employees.

    Priced at $765,000, a 15% down payment of $114,750 returns $93,940 in the first year after debt payments! Plus, the owner is offering a 10% promissory note and 6 months of training, as a sign of good faith. This activity has brought the business to a 38% profit margin. A new owner could boost revenue by offering starching and dry-cleaning services or by offering pick up services in the area and nearby towns.

     

    PRICE $765,000 CASH FLOW $198,271

  • Spa & Massage- Non-Medical- Passive Owner

     

     

    This business is home to a 3,000 square feet location with 11 treatment rooms that are not at maximum capacity. They have an established chain of command, which includes 28 team members as well as 3 Team Leads. This day spa performed 60% massage and 40% skincare with a reoccurring active client base. The services in skincare include facials, body treatments, spray tans, waxing, and more. Their clients include both men and women of all ages, with 591 active monthly members. The spa location is perfectly placed in the middle of a very accessible and busy area! The current owner handles oversight, but Team Leads operate the daily business. The aging owner has some medical concerns and is looking to sell; as a sign of good faith, she is offering a 15% note and 6 months of training!

    Priced at $519,000 this establishment offers a buyer the opportunity to purchase a well-known business in a prime location with support and training from both the owner and from the national franchise, making it a high rate for success!

     

    PRICE $519,000 CASH FLOW $177,728

  • Packaging & Wholesale of Holistic Goods: Owner will stay 5 years and carry 40%

    Boasting sales of $30MM, this B2B business has two primary client types: smaller wholesalers and direct to shop owners. Services include wholesale, coordinating manufacturing, packaged development with fulfillment, and arranging logistics through 3rd party freight. This team includes a CFO, General Manager, VP of Sales, Retail Lead, 2 Manufacturing Leads, Warehouse Lead, 4 Warehouse Associates, 5 In House Sales Reps, 24 Packagers, and 19 Outside Sales Reps. They do not have any drivers, all are outsourced. They focus mainly on Distribution and Logistics to other smaller wholesalers which make up 59% of their revenue, while 38% is sold Business to Business to multi location owners; less than 3% is sold direct to the consumer and this is intentional for research and development purposes. The current owner recently reinvested significant amounts of time and money into expanding operations, including moving to a distribution center twice the size to handle the growth. They operate out of a 12,000 sq. ft. distribution facility in Southern California. In 2023 they added another distribution center in Florida. The goal for selling is to expand with a Strategic Buyer or Equity Group who can bring strong business acumen. The owner will remain on board for 4-5 years and is willing to do a 40% carry or equity roll combo as a sign of a vested interest in the business’s success. Currently there are 36 States who have recognized these Low-Dose consumables as a legal product and there are projected to be another 7 states that will follow suit in the next 6-9 months. The business does not sell any traditional cannabis products but rather regulated hemp which allows them to legally sell across state lines.

    This business is priced at $49,000,000, producing a 30% profit margin! There are 43 well-known and respectably sized Private Equity Groups and dozens of publicly traded companies that own very similar businesses! Another growth area is in manufacturing, bringing it in house to boost productivity.

     

    PRICE $49,000,000 CASH FLOW $9,835,970

  • Dog Day Care & Boarding with Passive Ownership

    Boasting a 67% profit margin with an annual cash flow of $186,913, this is a great opportunity for pet lovers and entrepreneurs alike. A 10% down payment of $61,500 returns $95,567 dollars in the first year after loan payments! Located in Kearney Nebraska since 2016, this dog boarding business has a well-located facility offering boarding, daycare, grooming and training to their loyal clients. The 5-person team is extremely competent, with each team member equipped with the knowledge and know-how when it comes to training and caring for pets. The owner of this pet boarding and training facility spends about 10 hours a week overseeing operations making this a passive opportunity. This business is poised to continue growing with a new, relocated indoor facility capable of housing 50+ dogs which allows plenty of space for training and the 24 included large kennels. To show good faith in the continued success of this business, the current owner has offered to finance 10% of the purchase price and has agreed to stay on with the company for 6 months to 1 year to ensure a smooth transition. The niche is in their academy, which offers programs tailored for service dogs and behavioral training courses.

    PRICE $615,000 CASH FLOW $186,913

  • Residential Playground Equipment: Sales and Installation

     

     

    Focused on Sports Courts and Playgrounds (both residential and commercial) and trampoline systems. This is an allencompassing project management company that begins with customer consultation, design & layout, logistics & delivery; then implementation followed by annual maintenance and equipment additions. Proven over the test of time, this business will turn 30 this year and there is no stop in sight as they are projecting higher sales than last years $3.2 million (which was the highest year)! There are 10 on staff, with 3 sales associates, 1 receptionist and greeter, and 6 installers (2 full time, 2 seasonal, and 2 subs). There is plenty of room to display all the recreation this company can bring to a backyard in their 20,000 sq. ft. facility; which includes offices, warehouse space and a showroom. The assets included in the purchase of this business are valued at $572,916 and this includes hoops, trampolines, playground equipment, vehicles and more.

    Priced at $2,425,000, the current owner has offered a transition/ training period of up to one year to ensure a smooth transition. With growth opportunities including partnering with small schools, public parks, and growing the commercial side of business and by adding other product lines such as ninja warrior courses, gazebos, picnic tables, and firepits. With a 10% down payment of $242,500, a buyer can expect a return of $177,336 in the first year after debt payments.

     

    PRICE $2,425,000 CASH FLOW $494,502

  • Hair School Financial Literacy Educational Program

    This extremely efficient business focuses on financial literacy educational programs for hair school students. The operation requires only the owner, resulting in an extremely high 77% average profit margin over the past three years, and devotes less than 10 hours per week. The business offers a curriculum package to hair schools which is an admission tool to get more enrollments and increase graduation rates by teaching financial literacy. The curriculum consists of textbooks authored by the owner, updated every 2-3 years, and a huge collection of videos teaching financial topics. The business is currently partnered with around 35 schools, so there is ample opportunity for growth. This program is the secret weapon to reduce drops, boost enrollments, improve attendance, and lower default rates.

     

    This business was created specifically for the beauty and cosmetology industry and uses an illustrated course book, animated videos, and turn-key lesson plans to teach financial lessons to benefit students in the future. This program will allow you to finally differentiate yourself from other schools and - at the same time - lower the number of drops in your school. The program has nothing to do with changing the curriculum, hiring new staff, or lowering tuition. First and foremost, this business is an admissions tool to get more enrollments.

     

    Priced at $990,000, this company will result in a 204% return on the investment in the first year. This program gives you a way to differentiate yourself from other schools in your area and be able to justify a higher price in order to stop students from “price shopping” schools.

    PRICE $990,000 CASH FLOW $352,441

  • Audiology Clinic Serving a 100 Mile Radius

     

     

    This audiology clinic is based out of two locations in Nebraska one of which is located at an owned building in West Point. This business is built on strong relationships with over 200 clients, as well as existing contracts with nursing homes and veteran facilities. The clinic serves a huge 100 mile radius centered at West Point! At the purchase price of $407,000, a 10% down payment of $40,700 returns $81,207 in the first year after debt payments, which is a nearly 200% return on investment!

     

    This company provides audiology and hearing aid services for all ages including comprehensive hearing evaluations, hearing aid consultations and fittings, and special diagnostic tests. The current owner is the audiologist, providing all patient services. Alongside the owner is one full-time employee, the office manager, who handles all communication with patients, dedicates reports, troubleshoots, and recommends hearing items for patients, and works with insurance companies for claim submissions.

     

    The West Point location is a 1,000 square feet stand-alone building specifically built for a medical clinic and is owned by the current owner. The office is open Monday through Friday from 9:00am-5:00pm by appointment and walk-in. The Fremont location is a single 10x12 foot office in a shared office building with the current lease is being $300/month and is by appointment only.

     

    This audiology clinic is not tied to a physician or private practitioner, which gives the company freedom to be its own private practice and see clients as they wish. Some areas for growth include moving away from paper charting and expand on marketing as well as telehealth, nursing home, and pediatric services.

     

    PRICE $407,000 CASH FLOW $133,690

Rentals/Transportation/Automotive (8)

  • Towing & Recovery, Auto Repairs in Northern Ontario

    Generating over $2M in annual revenue, with $1M virtually guaranteed from roadside services, this Ontario-based business has been established for over 20 years! Providing towing and recovery services for roadside companies, law enforcement agencies, municipal fleets, public vehicles, emergency vehicles, and local individuals, they also provide expert automotive repairs including brakes, steering, engine diagnostics, and heavy truck repairs. 72% of revenue is from towing services and 28% is from auto repair services.  The 18-person team includes 8 full-time drivers, 3 mechanics, 3 apprentices, an office manager, a dispatcher, a part-time bookkeeper, and a payroll clerk with most employees having 6+ years tenure. The current owner commissions for towing jobs and handles high-level management functions, he is not doing any of the labor or driving. The business is well positioned to dominate the market with opportunities to expand the towing business and expand geographically into the Soo area.

     

    There is over $500K worth of equipment with $192K capex that would be included in the sale. The roadside and auto repair divisions have created niche segments that help protect the work and a large moat has been created by tying up the larger roadside contracts within the district. This makes it hard for other companies to get a foot hold.

     

    In addition, the garage has the only heavy mechanic shop within 55 km and they have multiple light and heavy licenses. Most of their revenue comes from long-term contracts with roadside service companies and referrals from local law enforcement agencies.  The largest towing customer operates on negotiated three-year contracts and they have been a loyal customer for over 21 years. Their website and word-of-mouth advertising from loyal and long-standing clientele help them obtain new clients on a regular basis.

    PRICE $2,625,000 CASH FLOW $742,319

  • Midwest Based Truck Driver Training Center

     

    For over 20 years this niche business has been educating students to get their CDL with driver training classes. They have both classroom and active driver training using their 15 Semis. They are also accredited through the DMV as an official 3rd party CDL testing site with a truck driver. Throughout North America, this post high school career path brings students that are 30% from the Midwest states and 70% from across the US. They have a location in Nebraska, strategically located on the I-80 which is the most travelled US interstate for coast-to-coast hauling. The purchase price includes a fleet of 16 Tractor Trailer Semis, buildout classrooms, a full curriculum, plus a full class schedule as truck drivers remain in high demand throughout North America. Additionally, the owner is offering 10% financing plus a 2-year training period to ensure a smooth and successful transition. A tangible growth strategy is to add additional community colleges to their referral partners. After becoming licensed through their program, a driver can now earn $80,000/year for only a $4,000 investment into their tuition. In 2019, the Federal Government mandated that every person applying for a CDL must complete an approved program through a training school. This business is an approved school and fits all requirements for this change. Also, in the state of Nebraska, the Department of Motor Vehicles no longer offers CDL testing and all testing for CDL licenses will be done by 3rd party examiners. This business holds all certifications necessary for this transition as well.

    Priced at $2,950,000, a 10% down payment of $295,000 returns $357,431 in the first year after debt payments. The owner has offered to carry 15% of the purchase price in order to show their vested interest in the continued success of the business moving forward. Many individuals who pursue CDL training may need to travel to Kearney, Nebraska, to attend the program; by providing onsite accommodations or partnering with local lodging establishments, they can offer convenience and comfort to out-oftown students. Additionally, having a restaurant space can provide meals and refreshments during training sessions, further enhancing the overall experience for students.


    PRICE $2,950,000 CASH FLOW $877,942

  • Enviro Services of Drilling Waste: 100% Absentee Owner

     

     

    This company currently has 250 clients, of which 50+ of those are recurring with the typical client being a municipality or utility company. This company handles all aspects of the industrial clean up services and disposal & hauling of drilling waste for oil field productions. Their equipment & vehicles have a value of over $2.6MM and consists of combo vacs, tank trucks, straight vacs, water trucks, mobile steamers, and maintenance units. This variety of equipment also gives them the ability to perform a mixture of maintenance, water delivery, vegetation control, water truck services, & mobile steaming. The Leadership Team is in place & consists of twenty-three employees. There are 5 in Administration (Vice President of Operation, General Manager of Fleet & Dispatch, Billing Manager, Safety Officer, and Dispatch); 13 Operators, and 5 in the Shop. The uniquely qualified team allows the owner to be able to live remote, more than 2 hours away, and only does light oversight of the business. Financing should be a breeze as this company is boasting a 20% Profit Margin and is 100% collateralized, plus there is roughly $375K of working capital that is included in the purchase price as well.

    At the purchase price of $4,950,000 CAD, with a 20% investment from the Buyer, the Seller will show a vested interest in the business’s success by holding a note for 10% and rolling equity of 10% allowing the bank to be at a 60% loan, making the business over 100% collateralized. The business has a focus in Alberta with clients across Canada. The company’s leased space consists of an 11-acre industrial fully fenced yard site, a 750 sq. ft. office with 4 maintenance bays, and a 5-bedroom crew house.

     

    PRICE $4,950,000 CASH FLOW $979,115

  • Luxury Black Car Service for Corporate Clients: Focused on Airport Travel

     

    Not everyone wants to use a ride share app such as Uber or Lyft, and before ride share, not all people wanted to use a taxi, which is why for more than 25 years, this luxury transportation and black car service business has withstood the test of time! The company is located in Tampa and operates in about a 50-mile radius. This company’s primary clients are corporate/business travelers with prearranged car service to and from the airport. This makes up 70% of their revenue. An additional 15% comes from black car or limo service, which take professionals to and from meetings or are booked by a luxury hotel concierge service for their guests. The last 15% is from the school transport division, which takes students to field trips or after school activities. In the purchase of this business is 15+ vehicles, including luxury sedans, luxury SUVs, executive vans, SUVs, minivan, passenger van valued at $332,000. The team consists of 1 Customer Service Manager, 1 Customer Service Rep, 1 Dispatch Manager, 1 Mechanic, and 40-50 contract drivers. Currently, the owner is only responsible for general oversight and handling AP, which the CSR Manager would be easily able to wrap into their current job responsibilities. The owner is ready to “turn over the keys” to the next owner so he can ease into retirement while he stays on board for 1 year during a transition period.

    With a multiple of 3.8, this business is priced at $1,025,000. The owner is willing to carry 10% of the note, showing a vested interest in the ongoing success of the company. There is also space to expand service into nonemergency medical transportation.

    PRICE $1,025,000 CASH FLOW $270,864

  • Refrigerated Food Transportation & Distribution with Consistently Reliable Demand

    This transportation and distribution business operates in an industry that is continually high in demand as they handle food products that require a refrigerated and/or climate-controlled environment. This consistency has led to the business seeing continual year over year growth in their gross sales, including in 2020 when many companies struggled to continue their operation. This company boasts an impressive 85% repeat customer base and over 30 years of experience in their industry. While they primarily handle food transportation, they also offer warehousing services which makes up 10% of their annual revenue. There is an abundance of space allotted for physical expansion in their 20,000 square foot facility – 18,800 sq. ft. of this space is for warehousing, with 1,200 sq. ft. being utilized as an office space. Having been extremely well established, this business has accumulated an excellent reputation and industry leading staff. Their team is made up of 28 employees: 3 team leads, 2 dispatchers, 13 long haul drivers, 4 local drivers, and 6 warehouse workers. This full team allows them to self-perform all of their deliveries and eliminates any need for outside contractors.

     

    The purchase of this business includes over $1.3M in assets, including nearly $700K in vehicles and equipment, along with $600K in working capital. The services provided are 100% B2B, serving food production companies all over the US.  Some of these clients have been around since shortly after the company’s inception in 1989!  Even with the heavy percentage of repeating clients, their annual revenue is widely distributed across several different clients, resulting in minimal customer concentration. They also consistently add new clients to the mix as well, allowing for year over year growth in revenue over the last several years. 

     

    While both owners do have some involvement in the business, both are committed to seeing the business continue successfully and would be willing to stay on for 1-3 years post-close.  During this time, they will train and transition the business to new ownership, while also finding and training any replacement needed. To further demonstrate their vested dedication in the ongoing success of this business, they are willing to offer a seller carry rate of 15%, which is above the industry standard of 10%.

     

    Priced at $3,415,000, this business is ready for new ownership to take over and continue the pattern of growth to build on their current long-standing legacy.

     

    PRICE $3,415,000 CASH FLOW $854,730

  • Rail Terminal Services for Inbound & Outbound Freight with $5M in Assets

     

    Serving the Mid-Atlantic & Northeast region of the US for 30+ years, services offered include railroad terminal operation for inbound & outbound freight clients, clerical & inspection, equipment maintenance & repair, and transloading of commodities such as swamp mats, propane, residual waste, hazmat materials, and agricultural biproducts. The diverse customer base consists of transportation providers, agriculture industry, PennDOT, the energy sector, and plastics & lumber clients. Corporate headquarters are in Scranton; which is where all accounting/bookkeeping, insurance needs, and HR are done. There is an intermodal terminal operation located in Pennsylvania, and a bulk rail facility in New York that is a short line railroad and is project-oriented, handling everything from mats for pipelines, re-bar for road construction, and utility poles for the power industry. They also have a rail facility in PA with a certified truck scale and multiple conveyors. All locations are strategically located, and the employees are all cross trained to work at any location. The reason for sale is an aging owner, who resides out of state and is absentee from the business. The well-developed leadership team allows for passive ownership. The staff is comprised of an Operations Manager, VP of Business Development, 1 Controller, 1 Accounting/HR, 1 Safety Officer/Project Oversight, plus a number of day and night managers, mechanics, transload operators, crane operators, truck drivers, and clerical staff. Assets include 9 sand trans loaders/conveyers, 4 hostler trucks, 2 overhead gantry cranes, a vacuum life, and a variety of heavy lifting equipment, construction pieces, and scales. There is also working capital included of nearly $800K, plus land improvements and deposits. All assets included total over $5M! This type of business is recession-resistant, as the recently passed US Infrastructure Bill allows for natural growth. Billions of dollars are being dedicated to the improvement of the US infrastructure. Freight supports the delivery of materials directly related to road and bridge work. Expanding their service area further south, adding another fully functional terminal, increasing commodities, and looking further into increasing residual waste services all offer clear routes to further growth for an already strong operation.

    Priced at $5,700,000, the seller is willing to carry 1.4M of the purchase price. This shows the seller’s faith in the ongoing success of the company. She is willing to stay on board for up to 1 year after closing as well to ensure a strong and smooth training and transition.

     

    PRICE $5,700,000 CASH FLOW $1,257,891

  • Trailer Manufacturing, Painting, & Maintenance

     

    The bank loan would be 100% collateralized from the included business assets with the purchase of this trailer manufacturing, painting & maintenance company. Operating out of an 18k sq. ft. facility in Southern Saskatchewan, the highly skilled team does custom trailer engineering and fabrication,  along with trailer maintenance, refurbishing, and supplying fabricated replacement parts. The average sale size is $52,500 per trailer; trailers include gravel, belly dump, clam shell, flat decks, and more, each with a variety of dimensions that can be customized. Refurbishing work consists of sandblasting, painting, and general welding repairs, and the company also supplies fabricated replacement parts such as stoppers, fifth wheel replacements, air cylinders, and tarps. Included in purchase price is over $313,354 worth of assets, including equipment such as band saws, jigs, a forklift, hoists, a payloader, welders, a shearer, an iron worker, a hydraulic press, trailer rotisserie stands, bench grinders, a paint system, and a Caterpillar 950 Payloader.

     

    Sales are conducted by two dealers in Canada and the owner, with most sales being done over the phone and no travel. Personnel includes four experienced employees: 1 owner, 2 full-time welders/fabricators, and 1 full-time office/shop assistant. The current owner oversees operations, conducts some sales, and assists in the shop when needed.

     

    The ability to customize dimensions for various trailer styles sets this business apart from competitors. Priced at $435,000, opportunities for growth include expanding the current website and social media presence to attract a wider range of customers. There is also an opportunity to take advantage of a more streamlined process through the Alberta government; instead of doing a bid system, the business could get on a short list to be approved to provide services/products on request.

    PRICE $435,000 CASH FLOW $124,517

  • Concrete Pumping for Schools & Hospitals – 90% Recurring Clients

    With over $10M in hard assets, this growing concrete business has 4 locations, 36 concrete pumps, a 90% recurring client base, and 57 employees in Southern California and Texas. The bulk of its contracts are municipal projects, such as K-12 Schools, Universities, Hospitals, and Government Agencies. With its specialized equipment and experienced teams, this business is able to take on projects that would be too large or too difficult for other contractors. The company’s customers are loyal, and since larger public projects and public works are rarely affected by economic changes, the business has been able to weather economic changes and continue to grow while other contractors have failed.

     

    The business boasts over $10M in hard assets and equipment, including 36 concrete pumps, making them one of the largest concrete companies in the nation. Moreover, the current owners have been efficient in their operations and have focused on sustainable and responsible growth. The owners approach this in two important ways: (1) They purchase all new equipment without incurring any long-term debt, and (2) The owners import their replacement parts from producers and wholesalers worldwide, which allows them to save 30-45% off what their competitors have to pay. Using these approaches, the company has over $2M in accounts receivable and ongoing work, and typically over 90% of AR is paid within 90 days. All this while remaining DEBT FREE!

     

    Well-trained managers and project leads are in place and the supporting administrative staff is knowledgeable and capable to handle day-to-day operations. A lot of new equipment was purchased in 2016 & 2017; generally, CapEx is less than $150,000/year.

     

    The owner is involved in daily operations as a manager and in an oversight capacity, and he is willing to stay on as president for 3-4 years. This is an excellent opportunity for any buyer, regardless of construction experience, as Seller will give you all the tools to succeed. Truly a turnkey business opportunity.

    With over $10M in hard assets, this growing concrete business has 4 locations, 36 concrete pumps, a 90% recurring client base, and 57 employees in Southern California and Texas. The bulk of its contracts are municipal projects, such as K-12 Schools, Universities, Hospitals, and Government Agencies. With its specialized equipment and experienced teams, this business is able to take on projects that would be too large or too difficult for other contractors. The company’s customers are loyal, and since larger public projects and public works are rarely affected by economic changes, the business has been able to weather economic changes and continue to grow while other contractors have failed.

     

    The business boasts over $10M in hard assets and equipment, including 36 concrete pumps, making them one of the largest concrete companies in the nation. Moreover, the current owners have been efficient in their operations and have focused on sustainable and responsible growth. The owners approach this in two important ways: (1) They purchase all new equipment without incurring any long-term debt, and (2) The owners import their replacement parts from producers and wholesalers worldwide, which allows them to save 30-45% off what their competitors have to pay. Using these approaches, the company has over $2M in accounts receivable and ongoing work, and typically over 90% of AR is paid within 90 days. All this while remaining DEBT FREE!

     

    Well-trained managers and project leads are in place and the supporting administrative staff is knowledgeable and capable to handle day-to-day operations. A lot of new equipment was purchased in 2016 & 2017; generally, CapEx is less than $150,000/year.

     

    The owner is involved in daily operations as a manager and in an oversight capacity, and he is willing to stay on as president for 3-4 years. This is an excellent opportunity for any buyer, regardless of construction experience, as Seller will give you all the tools to succeed. Truly a turnkey business opportunity.

     

    PRICE $17,250,000 CASH FLOW $2,367,719

Selfcare/Childcare (10)

  • Non-Medical Home Health & Recession Resistant

     

     

    This home health business handles the non-medical care of clients across 5 different counties! This agency has more than 50 caregivers employed and a top leadership team of 3 managers that allow the seller to work a minimal 15 hours per week. Not only are the clients for this business diversified, they will need the care offered by this establishment regardless of the current economic status, meaning this business is essentially recession resistant. The client type for this in-home care company consists of people who require more assistance within their day-day activities. Seniors, respite patients, those with dementia, and veterans are their main focus. This companion care business recently received a contract with the VA in 2021, expanding their already diverse client base. Located in Omaha, NE, their service area currently includes the Omaha Metropolitan Area and surrounding cities, reaching as far as Fremont, Ralston, Bellevue, and Council Bluffs. Primarily these caregivers are in the homes of their clients, allowing this business to operate out of a 2,800 sq. ft. office space which in return keeps the overhead cost low. The current owner is selling due to deterring health unfortunately.

    Priced at $849,000, the current owner has offered 10% financing as a show of good faith in the continued success of the business after sale. This investment has exponential growth including further development the Fremont and Council Bluffs client bases, developing the newly awarded VA contract, and creating partnerships with workman’s compensation divisions. While each of these opportunities could provide significant growth with minimal additional investment, a buyer could also have the chance to enjoy their 18% profit margin if they wanted to be passive and not do anything to improve!

     

    PRICE $849,000 CASH FLOW $239,207

  • Production Lab for Dental Implants

     

    The current owner of this dental implant production lab is willing to stay on with the business for 2 years after the sale, and their salary has been accounted for in the listed cash flow! This business is a stable investment into the dental industry and can be viewed as an essential economic need which is clearly shown in their continually growing revenue, even during the pandemic. This Omaha based business has been in service over 20 years and has a diverse list of services offered including designing and producing custom dental fixtures such as Implant Restorations, 3D Printing & Milling, Crowns, Custom Shades, Diagnostic Wax-Ups, Dentures, Metal Frame, Flexible Partials, Retainers, Veneers and many more. This full-service dental lab not only has all of the services that any doctor, dentist, or oral surgeon could nee, but also offers an experienced and efficient team including 6 technicians and 1 driver who collectively have a tenure of 3 or more years with the business! This is a business that clients depend on and integrate into their practices. The dental studio helps doctors and dentists increase patient retention and referrals by reducing chair time and increasing satisfaction. This implements success for not only the client, but for the company as well.

     

    Due to the first-rate custom products this studio provides, most of their clients are recurring and long-lasting! There is an Instagram page, but no true marketing has ever been done. The studio owner prefers to keep business local, but in the past has had clients in states across the U.S. and has the resources and space in their 1,600 sq. ft. lab to bring this practice back now. These resources include over $250k in assets such as 3D printers, compressors, scanners, a delivery vehicle and more.

     

    At a purchase price of $945,000, a buyer can expect a $197,487 return in the first year after debt payments! This laboratory has plenty of growth opportunities, including offering services to doctors and dentists nationally and an increase in general marketing and advertisements. A great reputation and a highly experienced team have resulted in this business being perfect for transitioning a new owner to continue the reputable dental laboratory.

    PRICE $945,000 CASH FLOW $360,154

  • Craniofacial Practice with Over 90% Referral Based Clients

     

    This practice specializes in Craniofacial care for clients with TMJ, sleep apnea, migraines, and headaches. Craniofacial care is the specialized care of pain and sleep disorders specific to the neck and above. You do not need to be a DDS or MD to own this business. To ensure a smooth transition of ownership and continuity of operations, the current owner is willing to provide training and support for a period of one to two years. They have also expressed their willingness to extend this period if the new owner requires further assistance. The seller is approaching retirement age which has prompted the decision to sell the business. This presents an opportunity for a new owner to take over and continue providing specialized care to patients in need. The current owner completes 20 hours per week - aiding in the lab and assessing patients. The client base consists of professional referrals from referring physicians, dentists, and physical therapists or chiropractors. The Breakdown of services is as follows: 50% craniofacial pain, 30% dental sleep medicine, 20% dental facial orthopedics & orthodontics. The team consists of 1 FT receptionist who handles administrative tasks and manages patient appointments, 2 dental assistants who assist in providing care to patients and 1 FT lab technician. The business operates from a spacious 2,100 square feet facility with 4 treatment rooms, a reception area, 2 offices, a break room, lab, and utility room. Included in the purchase price is $185,000 worth of instruments, supplies and furnishings. Located in Lincoln, Nebraska this center has been providing comprehensive services for craniofacial pain since 2011.

    Priced at $440,000, with a 10% down payment of $44,000 a buyer can expect a return of $65,045 in the first year after debt payments. This opportunity presents a relatively high margin with a low multiple of 3.4 and due to the assets valued at $185,000, the bank loan is over 50% collateralized! There are several growth opportunities that can be explored. One potential avenue for expansion is to introduce cosmetic dental services, catering to clients seeking aesthetic improvements. Additionally, expanding into cosmetic injectables such as Botox!

     

    PRICE $440,000 CASH FLOW $128,396

  • Absentee Owned Laundromat with Full Service Drop Off

     

     

    Strategically located in Williston, ND, which is a temporary home for over 100,000 laborers who migrate to the region for work in the agriculture, fields, and energy industries, and reside in temporary homes who need the access to do laundry. This 3,600 sq ft facility offers self-service laundry, shower facilities and drop-off services where employees will wash, dry and fold laundry for the customer. The owner lives out of state and only visits a few times a year. The business has 1 general manager along with 4-5 laundry techs. This spacious laundromat was established in 2012 and competition in the area is very low. The pay-per-load machines utilize a card service as opposed to cash and coin which is much more secure and safe, especially for the outof-state owner. Included is over $474,000 in hard assets, with the bank loan being $490,000 this is nearly 100% collateralized. An SBA lender has pre-approved this deal structure. North Dakota is ranked 2nd, after Texas, as the highest oil producing state. Due to this fact, many oil companies will send swathes of contractors to this area and this business is noted as a preferred laundromat for their employees.

    Priced at $765,000, a 15% down payment of $114,750 returns $93,940 in the first year after debt payments! Plus, the owner is offering a 10% promissory note and 6 months of training, as a sign of good faith. This activity has brought the business to a 38% profit margin. A new owner could boost revenue by offering starching and dry-cleaning services or by offering pick up services in the area and nearby towns.

     

    PRICE $765,000 CASH FLOW $198,271

  • Spa & Massage- Non-Medical- Passive Owner

     

     

    This business is home to a 3,000 square feet location with 11 treatment rooms that are not at maximum capacity. They have an established chain of command, which includes 28 team members as well as 3 Team Leads. This day spa performed 60% massage and 40% skincare with a reoccurring active client base. The services in skincare include facials, body treatments, spray tans, waxing, and more. Their clients include both men and women of all ages, with 591 active monthly members. The spa location is perfectly placed in the middle of a very accessible and busy area! The current owner handles oversight, but Team Leads operate the daily business. The aging owner has some medical concerns and is looking to sell; as a sign of good faith, she is offering a 15% note and 6 months of training!

    Priced at $519,000 this establishment offers a buyer the opportunity to purchase a well-known business in a prime location with support and training from both the owner and from the national franchise, making it a high rate for success!

     

    PRICE $519,000 CASH FLOW $177,728

  • Packaging & Wholesale of Holistic Goods: Owner will stay 5 years and carry 40%

    Boasting sales of $30MM, this B2B business has two primary client types: smaller wholesalers and direct to shop owners. Services include wholesale, coordinating manufacturing, packaged development with fulfillment, and arranging logistics through 3rd party freight. This team includes a CFO, General Manager, VP of Sales, Retail Lead, 2 Manufacturing Leads, Warehouse Lead, 4 Warehouse Associates, 5 In House Sales Reps, 24 Packagers, and 19 Outside Sales Reps. They do not have any drivers, all are outsourced. They focus mainly on Distribution and Logistics to other smaller wholesalers which make up 59% of their revenue, while 38% is sold Business to Business to multi location owners; less than 3% is sold direct to the consumer and this is intentional for research and development purposes. The current owner recently reinvested significant amounts of time and money into expanding operations, including moving to a distribution center twice the size to handle the growth. They operate out of a 12,000 sq. ft. distribution facility in Southern California. In 2023 they added another distribution center in Florida. The goal for selling is to expand with a Strategic Buyer or Equity Group who can bring strong business acumen. The owner will remain on board for 4-5 years and is willing to do a 40% carry or equity roll combo as a sign of a vested interest in the business’s success. Currently there are 36 States who have recognized these Low-Dose consumables as a legal product and there are projected to be another 7 states that will follow suit in the next 6-9 months. The business does not sell any traditional cannabis products but rather regulated hemp which allows them to legally sell across state lines.

    This business is priced at $49,000,000, producing a 30% profit margin! There are 43 well-known and respectably sized Private Equity Groups and dozens of publicly traded companies that own very similar businesses! Another growth area is in manufacturing, bringing it in house to boost productivity.

     

    PRICE $49,000,000 CASH FLOW $9,835,970

  • Dog Day Care & Boarding with Passive Ownership

    Boasting a 67% profit margin with an annual cash flow of $186,913, this is a great opportunity for pet lovers and entrepreneurs alike. A 10% down payment of $61,500 returns $95,567 dollars in the first year after loan payments! Located in Kearney Nebraska since 2016, this dog boarding business has a well-located facility offering boarding, daycare, grooming and training to their loyal clients. The 5-person team is extremely competent, with each team member equipped with the knowledge and know-how when it comes to training and caring for pets. The owner of this pet boarding and training facility spends about 10 hours a week overseeing operations making this a passive opportunity. This business is poised to continue growing with a new, relocated indoor facility capable of housing 50+ dogs which allows plenty of space for training and the 24 included large kennels. To show good faith in the continued success of this business, the current owner has offered to finance 10% of the purchase price and has agreed to stay on with the company for 6 months to 1 year to ensure a smooth transition. The niche is in their academy, which offers programs tailored for service dogs and behavioral training courses.

    PRICE $615,000 CASH FLOW $186,913

  • Residential Playground Equipment: Sales and Installation

     

     

    Focused on Sports Courts and Playgrounds (both residential and commercial) and trampoline systems. This is an allencompassing project management company that begins with customer consultation, design & layout, logistics & delivery; then implementation followed by annual maintenance and equipment additions. Proven over the test of time, this business will turn 30 this year and there is no stop in sight as they are projecting higher sales than last years $3.2 million (which was the highest year)! There are 10 on staff, with 3 sales associates, 1 receptionist and greeter, and 6 installers (2 full time, 2 seasonal, and 2 subs). There is plenty of room to display all the recreation this company can bring to a backyard in their 20,000 sq. ft. facility; which includes offices, warehouse space and a showroom. The assets included in the purchase of this business are valued at $572,916 and this includes hoops, trampolines, playground equipment, vehicles and more.

    Priced at $2,425,000, the current owner has offered a transition/ training period of up to one year to ensure a smooth transition. With growth opportunities including partnering with small schools, public parks, and growing the commercial side of business and by adding other product lines such as ninja warrior courses, gazebos, picnic tables, and firepits. With a 10% down payment of $242,500, a buyer can expect a return of $177,336 in the first year after debt payments.

     

    PRICE $2,425,000 CASH FLOW $494,502

  • Hair School Financial Literacy Educational Program

    This extremely efficient business focuses on financial literacy educational programs for hair school students. The operation requires only the owner, resulting in an extremely high 77% average profit margin over the past three years, and devotes less than 10 hours per week. The business offers a curriculum package to hair schools which is an admission tool to get more enrollments and increase graduation rates by teaching financial literacy. The curriculum consists of textbooks authored by the owner, updated every 2-3 years, and a huge collection of videos teaching financial topics. The business is currently partnered with around 35 schools, so there is ample opportunity for growth. This program is the secret weapon to reduce drops, boost enrollments, improve attendance, and lower default rates.

     

    This business was created specifically for the beauty and cosmetology industry and uses an illustrated course book, animated videos, and turn-key lesson plans to teach financial lessons to benefit students in the future. This program will allow you to finally differentiate yourself from other schools and - at the same time - lower the number of drops in your school. The program has nothing to do with changing the curriculum, hiring new staff, or lowering tuition. First and foremost, this business is an admissions tool to get more enrollments.

     

    Priced at $990,000, this company will result in a 204% return on the investment in the first year. This program gives you a way to differentiate yourself from other schools in your area and be able to justify a higher price in order to stop students from “price shopping” schools.

    PRICE $990,000 CASH FLOW $352,441

  • Audiology Clinic Serving a 100 Mile Radius

     

     

    This audiology clinic is based out of two locations in Nebraska one of which is located at an owned building in West Point. This business is built on strong relationships with over 200 clients, as well as existing contracts with nursing homes and veteran facilities. The clinic serves a huge 100 mile radius centered at West Point! At the purchase price of $407,000, a 10% down payment of $40,700 returns $81,207 in the first year after debt payments, which is a nearly 200% return on investment!

     

    This company provides audiology and hearing aid services for all ages including comprehensive hearing evaluations, hearing aid consultations and fittings, and special diagnostic tests. The current owner is the audiologist, providing all patient services. Alongside the owner is one full-time employee, the office manager, who handles all communication with patients, dedicates reports, troubleshoots, and recommends hearing items for patients, and works with insurance companies for claim submissions.

     

    The West Point location is a 1,000 square feet stand-alone building specifically built for a medical clinic and is owned by the current owner. The office is open Monday through Friday from 9:00am-5:00pm by appointment and walk-in. The Fremont location is a single 10x12 foot office in a shared office building with the current lease is being $300/month and is by appointment only.

     

    This audiology clinic is not tied to a physician or private practitioner, which gives the company freedom to be its own private practice and see clients as they wish. Some areas for growth include moving away from paper charting and expand on marketing as well as telehealth, nursing home, and pediatric services.

     

    PRICE $407,000 CASH FLOW $133,690

  • Event Backdrop with Pipe and Drape Services

    This production company has been providing pipe and drape services to produce beautiful back drops for events within a 100-mile radius of Houston for over 20 years. Their target client is 40% Corporate Events, 35% comes from referrals from audio visual companies, 25% comes from fundraising, non-profit and private events such as showers and quinceaneras. The venue type that this special event company flourishes in are at large banquet halls or convention centers, trade shows, Gala’s and pageant stages. In fact, they do pageants for the entire state of Texas. Income breakout is about 75% from pipe and drape rentals and because they own all of the inventory this has a very high margin, the other 25% of the business comes from planning and coordinating sub-contractors. They do not do any sort of floral, AV, DJ or music, or catering and liquor. Though these are all great growth opportunities to work closely with these types businesses and create more referrals. The owner is selling as she is in her 60s and entering retirement, she is happy to stay on train and transition for 6 months to one year. Additionally, she is willing to finance 10% to show her vested interest in the success of the business moving forward. The overhead is very low as there are only 4 storage units which is $450/ month. Though they have a large pool of contractors that they work with, there is a core team of 6 that they are working with on a regular basis. The purchase comes with 2 box trucks and a trailer used to haul all of the rental pieces, an abundant amount of inventory such as drapery, linens and table decor and there is almost $60K in customer deposits that will transfer over for upcoming events.

    Priced at $520,000, with a diverse client base consisting of corporate entities, audiovisual companies, fundraisers, and private events, has built a solid reputation in the Houston area. A 10% down payment of $52,000 returns $70,277 in the first year after debt payments! They cater to roughly 125 events per year and this is good for a brand-new business owner or for someone who has been in hospitality for a number of years.

     

    PRICE $520,000 CASH FLOW $145,147

  • Floor to Ceiling Interior Design and Renovation

     

     

    This interior design company was established in 1990 and has served clients within a 100-mile radius of North Platte ever since. With over three decades of experience, they have built a strong reputation for providing full-service interior design solutions from floor to ceiling. They have a team of skilled professionals who can transform any room into a beautiful and functional space. The dedicated team includes: two carpenters, one designer, one marketing professional, and one bookkeeper. The owner is full time, overseeing the operations, providing estimates, and meeting with clients. Whether it's a small powder room, a luxurious master bedroom, or a functional kitchen used to entertain, they can handle all aspects of the remodeling process. Their services primarily cater to residential clients, but they also undertake the occasional commercial project upon request. The business operates out of a spacious 2,400 square foot showroom located in North Platte. The showroom provides clients with an opportunity to explore various design options and visualize their projects before making any decisions. The lease for the showroom is only $1,887 per month, allowing them to showcase their work in a professional and inviting environment. The reason for selling is the owner's retirement planning. After many years of successfully running the business, the seller has decided to retire and is looking for a suitable buyer to take over the operations. The owner is willing to finance 10% of the purchase price and provide a training period of up to one year to ensure a smooth transition of ownership.

    Priced at $1,690,000, a 10% down payment of $169,000 will return $252,648 in the first year after debt payments! A 149% return on investment! Their full-service approach covers all aspects of interior design, including bathroom remodeling, cabinet installation, and home design.

     

    PRICE $1,690,000 CASH FLOW $495,975

  • Well-Established Appliance Retailer with Installation Services

     

     

    Established over 90 years, this retail appliance business has an excellent local reputation and deep roots within their community. The business is situated in Iowa City and serves clients in various small towns within a 50-mile radius. The staff consists of a total of 8 members, including 1 service lead, 2 service technicians, 1 installation lead, 1 installation technician, 2 office managers, and 1 delivery assistant. With this well-established team in place, the owner is able to take a more passive role, providing oversight and management support as necessary. The business operates out of two separate buildings. The first building has a designated area of 1,600 square feet for parts and service, along with a showroom spanning 2,000 square feet. The second building, which houses the appliances, has a total area of 4,000 square feet. The purchase of this business includes $471,327 in assets, which overcollateralizes the loan, including vehicles, trailers, equipment, inventory, and accounts receivable.

    Priced at $270,000, this business is a great opportunity for a new owner to step in and enjoy a passive business venture! While there are a few other appliance stores in the area, very few offer installation and maintenance services, which sets this business apart from its competitors. As a show of good faith, the owner has offered 10% seller financing and will stay on board for 6 months-1 year post-close. The loan is 100% over-collateralized!

     

    PRICE $270,000 CASH FLOW $84,651

  • Luxury Black Car Service for Corporate Clients: Focused on Airport Travel

     

    Not everyone wants to use a ride share app such as Uber or Lyft, and before ride share, not all people wanted to use a taxi, which is why for more than 25 years, this luxury transportation and black car service business has withstood the test of time! The company is located in Tampa and operates in about a 50-mile radius. This company’s primary clients are corporate/business travelers with prearranged car service to and from the airport. This makes up 70% of their revenue. An additional 15% comes from black car or limo service, which take professionals to and from meetings or are booked by a luxury hotel concierge service for their guests. The last 15% is from the school transport division, which takes students to field trips or after school activities. In the purchase of this business is 15+ vehicles, including luxury sedans, luxury SUVs, executive vans, SUVs, minivan, passenger van valued at $332,000. The team consists of 1 Customer Service Manager, 1 Customer Service Rep, 1 Dispatch Manager, 1 Mechanic, and 40-50 contract drivers. Currently, the owner is only responsible for general oversight and handling AP, which the CSR Manager would be easily able to wrap into their current job responsibilities. The owner is ready to “turn over the keys” to the next owner so he can ease into retirement while he stays on board for 1 year during a transition period.

    With a multiple of 3.8, this business is priced at $1,025,000. The owner is willing to carry 10% of the note, showing a vested interest in the ongoing success of the company. There is also space to expand service into nonemergency medical transportation.

    PRICE $1,025,000 CASH FLOW $270,864

  • Spa & Massage- Non-Medical- Passive Owner

     

     

    This business is home to a 3,000 square feet location with 11 treatment rooms that are not at maximum capacity. They have an established chain of command, which includes 28 team members as well as 3 Team Leads. This day spa performed 60% massage and 40% skincare with a reoccurring active client base. The services in skincare include facials, body treatments, spray tans, waxing, and more. Their clients include both men and women of all ages, with 591 active monthly members. The spa location is perfectly placed in the middle of a very accessible and busy area! The current owner handles oversight, but Team Leads operate the daily business. The aging owner has some medical concerns and is looking to sell; as a sign of good faith, she is offering a 15% note and 6 months of training!

    Priced at $519,000 this establishment offers a buyer the opportunity to purchase a well-known business in a prime location with support and training from both the owner and from the national franchise, making it a high rate for success!

     

    PRICE $519,000 CASH FLOW $177,728

  • Roof Inspection & Installation: 10 Million in Residential backlog for 2023

     

     

    This residential roofing business has been in service since 2011 and they have $2.4M in receivables! they have 2 locations with their main location in Manassas, VA and the second satellite location an hour away, both locations have a General Manager to ensure smooth individual operations. The services offered include roof inspection and installation, gutter repair, siding, windows, floors, decks, drywall, and storm restoration which are utilized by over 5,000 clients in Virginia, West Virginia, and Maryland. The team consists of 19 employees including 2 office managers, 5 office staff, and 7 sales reps, this roofing business not only has an established chain of command but has also been able to keep their CapEx and liability low by outsourcing all of the labor. Their team works with clients’ insurance companies to ensure that customers get the most out of their claim. The current owner only focuses on the oversite of sales and even with his minimal involvement in day-to-day activities, he is willing to stay on board with the business for 2-3 years post-close to ensure a smooth transition. Coupled with the high levels of customers coming in due to referrals (70%!), and their average online rating of 4.8, this business is primed for growth. The current owner is willing to carry 30% of the $2,900,000 purchase price, to show their established confidence in the company’s ability to continue successfully. A 10% down payment of $290,000 is what Is needed to step into ownership of this projected 10 Million dollar revenue roofing company. In the Northeast U.S., April through September is storm season, which is the busiest time of year for this company. After a hailstorm, there is a 50% chance that a roof will have a leak. They have learned to utilize this information by increasing their marketing to coincide with this optimum business opportunity. Because of this niche market, the business has proven to be pandemic and recession proof. Outside of their already incredible client base, there would be easy expansion into commercial and government work as well.

     

    PRICE $2,900,000 CASH FLOW $803,349

  • Firearm Supply Store with Absentee Owner

     

    Selling over 3,000 firearms last year, the seller is guaranteeing $1,200,000 in wholesale goods. Their inventory includes a wide variety of new and used firearms for sports, protection, and recreational use, plus ammunition, scopes, sites, holsters, safes, and more. They operate a beautiful and large shop over 3,000 Sq. Ft. with a lot of storage space for secured inventory. Another incredible asset of the business is the well-trained and experienced team who all have a long tenure within the company. The general manager of this company fully handles business operations, including online sales, which allows the business to be passively owned. The revenue, both online and in store, is generally split evenly between the sale of firearms and accessories. Their diverse outreach of customers includes local law enforcement agencies, first responders, military personnel, hunters, recreational shooters, people wanting to protect their home. With a decade of experience in the firearms industry, they are a full-service business offering services like firearm sales, gun trading, gunsmithing & cleaning to prepare firearms for off-season storage, scope installation, night sight installation, cleaning, reassembly, and function checks of firearms.

    Priced at $1,900,000, with a 4-year average cash flow of $563,292 and a low multiple of 3.1, plus the 80% collateralized loan with $1,250,000 in guaranteed assets, this business is primed for new ownership.

     

    PRICE $1,900,000 CASH FLOW $563,292

  • E-commerce Drop-Shipping Office Supply Retailer with Specialty Software

     

     

    This dropship e-commerce company, priced at $4,700,000, has over 20 vendors and 75+ manufacturers, which is why they are able to offer over 400,000 SkU’s, focused on office and janitorial supplies. They primarily service B2B customers, made up of small to medium sized businesses purchasing office and janitorial supplies. In addition to their success, they were awarded a contract to sell office supplies to a network of over 250 hospitals and 350,000 shipping locations nationwide, including doctors’ offices. Their software, Channel Advisor, can manage up to 1 million SkU’s, allowing the new ownership significant room for growth. Being a dropship company, they carry little overhead, and with the extremely efficient team of 7 crosstrained employees, this order fulfillment company can be run from anywhere in the United States. This is proven, as the owner currently lives in Tampa but has relocated to 3 different states over the last 10 years. Their website is highly secure with the Green Address Bar SSL Certificate (highest in industry standard, equal to bank standard) and is tested daily to ensure its durability. The business is positioned to grow and expand in the online retail space. They are qualified for Amazon Seller Prime but are not currently using it – taking advantage of this qualification would lead to a substantial increase in traffic and revenue. The current owner is looking to sell this business due to health concerns as he is preparing to undergo back surgery but is confident of the continual success of this business and has offered a much larger than normal Promissory note of 25%, plus 1 year of training!


    PRICE $4,700,000 CASH FLOW $1,238,004

  • Temp Staffing with some Direct Hire Placement

     

    This staffing firm places full-service, temp-to-hire, and direct hire staffing ranging from part-time, short-term, or long-term opportunities, and several placements have remained in their positions for 10-15 years after placement. The agency specializes in fulfilling the needs of their diverse client base in the professional and clerical fields. Having been established 18 years ago, this agency is well respected and are currently receiving 5-10 new orders on a weekly basis, with a turnaround time of 2 weeks to 2 months. Servicing customers that range from small businesses to large corporations, they offer multiple routes of staffing solutions to fulfill any business’s needs. The team consists of 2 FT employees, 1 staffing specialist, and 1 on-call staffing coordinator as well as 55-60 temp employees on assignment. Located in Providence Rhode Island, the current staff operates out of a 1,100 square foot leased building with a reception area and private offices that are perfect for interviews and different skills or communication tests. The current owner has offered 1-2 years for a transition/training period to ensure as smooth a move as possible for staff, clients, and the new owner.

    Priced at $490,000, this business already has an established client pipeline in place with the majority of new business coming from word-of-mouth referrals. Partnering with this staffing firm resulted in direct hire business for the VP of Human Resources, Business Analysts, Business Consultants, Instructional Designer, and recruiting personnel including skill assessments and language assessments. A simple opportunity for new ownership to grow the business, and their current pipeline, would be to establish an internet presence consisting of both a website and social media accounts.

     

    PRICE $490,000 CASH FLOW $91,320

  • Kitchen & Bath Remodeling/Renovating – 27% Profit Margin

    The population is booming in this Western North Carolina region, keeping demand incredibly high for home remodeling & renovation projects! Boasting consistent profit margins over 20%, this company is projecting over $1.6M in sales in 2021. Using top-of-the-line Matterport 3D camera and software, which is extremely valuable in the restoration world, they are able to cut down on estimating time by 50%-60%. Established for 20 years, this business specializes in renovations, reconstruction, kitchen/bath remodels, and additions, with a client base consisting primarily of residential customers (90%).  The highly skilled team includes the owner, who handles sales, estimating, and client relations, as well as a Superintendent of Operations and Carpenter, with a loyal base of 18-20 go-to subcontractors. Based out of a leased 1,200 sq. ft. facility in Buncombe County, all business is done locally within a 1-hour radius of the warehouse. Assets include every piece of equipment necessary to take on a remodel project or custom home building, a fully-equipped box truck, Ford F-250, Ford F-550, and a 6x12 open trailer.

     

    They have a solid marketing strategy already in place, using an SEO campaign run by Wordjack Media through Facebook, Google Ads, and their own well-established website. The company prides itself on personal service, communication, attention to detail, and professionalism; their solid name and reputation leads to word-of-mouth referrals in the community.

     

    Construction workers have been deemed essential, and with the drop in interest rates for construction loans & home loans, this company has plenty of work on the horizon with no end in sight. Priced at $1,000,000, it would be an excellent roll-up opportunity for an existing restoration company because of the knowledge and skill already in place. The current owner will stay on for 1-2 years to ensure a smooth transition and to see all current projects in the pipeline completed. The largest growth opportunities are in branching out more into custom homes, spec homes, and insurance work. With the right capital behind the company, revenue could triple in the next 2 years. A 12.5% down payment of $125,000 returns $219,901 in the first year after debt payments – a 176% return on investment.

    PRICE $1,000,000 CASH FLOW $439,791

  • Drapery & Blinds Business: Only $20,000 Down

     

     

    This design business focuses on window coverings and was founded in 1996, serving the community for nearly three decades. Specializing in custom curtains, shades, and blinds, this business offers a wide range of services including blind installation, window treatments, shutter installation, and drapery installation. The majority of their clients are regular homeowners, accounting for approximately 80% of their customer base. They also have some commercial work including Schools and Fire Houses, making up the remaining 20% of their projects. The owner manages the day-to-day operations and utilizes a subcontractor for all installations. The seller is planning for retirement and is willing to provide a comprehensive training period to ensure a smooth transition of ownership. This is a part time business where the owner enjoys assisting clients. She measures windows, helps select their products, provides an estimate, and places the order for the client. One potential avenue for expansion is through increased advertising efforts in the neighboring communities. Additionally, expanding the geographic region served by the business and pursuing more commercial work can open up new opportunities for growth.

    You can buy this with $20,000 down and make $81,907 in the first year! This is a well-established business in Columbus, Nebraska, offering a range of services. With a majority of residential clients and some commercial projects, the company has built a solid reputation over its 25 years of operation. As the owner plans for retirement, this acquisition presents an excellent opportunity for a new owner to take over and capitalize on growth opportunities such as expanding into new communities and pursuing more commercial work.

     

    PRICE $90,000 CASH FLOW $81,907

  • Fabrication of Doors, Cabinets, and Lockers – No Installation

     

    A fabrication business that specializes in the manufacturing of cabinet, louvre and locker doors for over 40 years. They primarily operate as a business-to-business (B2B) company, with approximately 98% of their sales being made to other businesses with a niche in health clubs and golf courses. They produce raw products, but do not engage in the design process. Instead, the B2B clients submit the design, which is then brought to life through their manufacturing capabilities. This company does not install the doors, nor do they work with the end user. The established team in place consists of a a Bookkeeper and 8 Fabrication Technicians. Additionally, the seller has agreed to a 1-year transition period in order to provide a smooth transition. The assets included in the purchase price have a replacement value of $1,880,240 and the current backlog is at $203,428. This business is located in the growing community of Montrose Colorado, which is roughly 45 minutes away from Grand Junction. The spacious facility is 14,298 square foot with ample room for expansion.

    Priced at $890,000, this business has established itself as a reputable player in the door manufacturing industry. The current owner is selling this business in order to plan for retirement and has offered to carry 10% of the purchase price in order to show vested interest in the continued success of the business. A 10% down payment of $89,000 returns $246,001 in the first year after debt payments! They do not engage in metalwork or plastics. Additionally, they do not provide any hardware or finishing services. Their manufacturing process solely involves working with raw materials and does not require the use of chemicals or spray finishes.

     

    PRICE $890,000 CASH FLOW $300,218

  • Absentee Owned Laundromat with Full Service Drop Off

     

     

    Strategically located in Williston, ND, which is a temporary home for over 100,000 laborers who migrate to the region for work in the agriculture, fields, and energy industries, and reside in temporary homes who need the access to do laundry. This 3,600 sq ft facility offers self-service laundry, shower facilities and drop-off services where employees will wash, dry and fold laundry for the customer. The owner lives out of state and only visits a few times a year. The business has 1 general manager along with 4-5 laundry techs. This spacious laundromat was established in 2012 and competition in the area is very low. The pay-per-load machines utilize a card service as opposed to cash and coin which is much more secure and safe, especially for the outof-state owner. Included is over $474,000 in hard assets, with the bank loan being $490,000 this is nearly 100% collateralized. An SBA lender has pre-approved this deal structure. North Dakota is ranked 2nd, after Texas, as the highest oil producing state. Due to this fact, many oil companies will send swathes of contractors to this area and this business is noted as a preferred laundromat for their employees.

    Priced at $765,000, a 15% down payment of $114,750 returns $93,940 in the first year after debt payments! Plus, the owner is offering a 10% promissory note and 6 months of training, as a sign of good faith. This activity has brought the business to a 38% profit margin. A new owner could boost revenue by offering starching and dry-cleaning services or by offering pick up services in the area and nearby towns.

     

    PRICE $765,000 CASH FLOW $198,271

  • Wholesale of Niche Goods with 46,000 sq. ft. of Distribution Space

     

    Their distribution facility ships to over 800 B2B customers across the Continental US, made up of truck stops, grocery store chains, ecommerce companies, and more. There is a good mix of wholesale clients versus dropship orders where no inventory is held. The business has a highly diverse portfolio of more than 40 vendors, such as Riddell, WinCraft, and Fremont Die. There is a strong leadership team in place, including a President, Controller, Purchasing Manager, and Sales Director, plus a full warehouse & shipping team. The tenured President will stay in place as operator if the buyer desires. The owner resides out of state and has a very minimal role. The assets included are valued at $2,025,000, these assets are licensed sports team novelty items, a forklift, extensive warehouse shelving, pallet shrink wrapper, packaging equipment, pallet racking, and leasehold improvements. The company produced nearly $9M in revenue in 2022, putting $1.2M to the bottom line. Boasting over 300 types of products ranging across accessories, gifts, home goods, and gear, they have something for every fan. They do not sell shoes, clothes, or sports equipment. Their most popular product brands include products associated with the NFL, MLB, NBA, MLS, NGH, Nascar, US Army, Jack Daniels, and Harley Davidson.

    Priced at $5,700,000, this business includes 2 million in assets, a strong team, and solid reputation and history, putting a new owner in the perfect position to continue operating and growing successfully. Over 3 decades ago, this company started with the teenage owner who sold his first baseball card; now over 30 years later, this business thrives in the distribution of sports products & highly recognizable brands. The owner is willing to finance 10% and/or retain 5% equity, as a show of good faith in the ongoing success of the business. A 10% down payment of $570,000 returns $618,947 in the first year after debt payments!

     

     

    PRICE $5,700,000 CASH FLOW $1,300,112

  • Well-Established Appliance Retailer with Installation Services

     

     

    Established over 90 years, this retail appliance business has an excellent local reputation and deep roots within their community. The business is situated in Iowa City and serves clients in various small towns within a 50-mile radius. The staff consists of a total of 8 members, including 1 service lead, 2 service technicians, 1 installation lead, 1 installation technician, 2 office managers, and 1 delivery assistant. With this well-established team in place, the owner is able to take a more passive role, providing oversight and management support as necessary. The business operates out of two separate buildings. The first building has a designated area of 1,600 square feet for parts and service, along with a showroom spanning 2,000 square feet. The second building, which houses the appliances, has a total area of 4,000 square feet. The purchase of this business includes $471,327 in assets, which overcollateralizes the loan, including vehicles, trailers, equipment, inventory, and accounts receivable.

    Priced at $270,000, this business is a great opportunity for a new owner to step in and enjoy a passive business venture! While there are a few other appliance stores in the area, very few offer installation and maintenance services, which sets this business apart from its competitors. As a show of good faith, the owner has offered 10% seller financing and will stay on board for 6 months-1 year post-close. The loan is 100% over-collateralized!

     

    PRICE $270,000 CASH FLOW $84,651

  • Manufacturer of “Everyday Apparel” with Big Box Clients

     

    Priding themselves on what is called “Elevated Everyday Apparel,” which they design, oversee manufacturing, and then distribute to their clients. Their clients are highly reputable and recognizable, including Nordstroms, Burlington, PacSun, and as of last quarter, they are now rolling out Target! The company has manufacturers in Mexico, Guatemala, and China and distribution throughout North America. They have 10 of their own brands, over 50 licenses, and also do white label for retailers. The team is well developed with 4 in management/office administration, 7 in art and design, 3 in sales, and 4 in production. The two owners spend about 20 hours a week in the business, with Owner 1 overseeing the production and sales team, and Owner 2 working with the art department and merchandising. One person easily could perform both roles. This replacement salary is accounted for in the cash flow. As a show of good faith, they are offering a combination of 10% promissory note and a 10% equity roll for a total of 20% proving their vested interest in the continued success of this business.

     

    PRICE $3,300,000 CASH FLOW $890,270

  • Packaging & Wholesale of Holistic Goods: Owner will stay 5 years and carry 40%

    Boasting sales of $30MM, this B2B business has two primary client types: smaller wholesalers and direct to shop owners. Services include wholesale, coordinating manufacturing, packaged development with fulfillment, and arranging logistics through 3rd party freight. This team includes a CFO, General Manager, VP of Sales, Retail Lead, 2 Manufacturing Leads, Warehouse Lead, 4 Warehouse Associates, 5 In House Sales Reps, 24 Packagers, and 19 Outside Sales Reps. They do not have any drivers, all are outsourced. They focus mainly on Distribution and Logistics to other smaller wholesalers which make up 59% of their revenue, while 38% is sold Business to Business to multi location owners; less than 3% is sold direct to the consumer and this is intentional for research and development purposes. The current owner recently reinvested significant amounts of time and money into expanding operations, including moving to a distribution center twice the size to handle the growth. They operate out of a 12,000 sq. ft. distribution facility in Southern California. In 2023 they added another distribution center in Florida. The goal for selling is to expand with a Strategic Buyer or Equity Group who can bring strong business acumen. The owner will remain on board for 4-5 years and is willing to do a 40% carry or equity roll combo as a sign of a vested interest in the business’s success. Currently there are 36 States who have recognized these Low-Dose consumables as a legal product and there are projected to be another 7 states that will follow suit in the next 6-9 months. The business does not sell any traditional cannabis products but rather regulated hemp which allows them to legally sell across state lines.

    This business is priced at $49,000,000, producing a 30% profit margin! There are 43 well-known and respectably sized Private Equity Groups and dozens of publicly traded companies that own very similar businesses! Another growth area is in manufacturing, bringing it in house to boost productivity.

     

    PRICE $49,000,000 CASH FLOW $9,835,970

  • Trademarked Online Retail Business with Wholesale Partnerships

    This unique novelty retail business has over 1,500 established wholesale client partnerships! They carry a niche bathroom product focusing on molecularly battling unsavory smells leaving behind only the pleasant and masculine smell of a customer’s choosing. Finally, a trademarked brand focused on offering the guys an option they can be comfortable with. Obviously, the market was craving such an option as they have quickly wracked up business partners offering their product on shelves. There are currently three owners. All of these owners have full-time careers and consider this their “hobby” business. A new owner could easily run this business in less than 10 hours per week as they outsource production and only handle fulfillment. This business finds new clients and customers primarily via tradeshows and their website, where individual consumers can place an order. This business would offer a current male consumer focused enterprise an opportunity to expand products with a well-known brand and range of smells. It would also offer an individual owner the opportunity to run a part-time business with huge growth opportunities and the chance to unironically call your job crappy.

     

    While this business has excellent “mom and pop shop” representation across the United States, there are still multiple growth opportunities for new ownership. One would be focusing on stepping into the big box store realm, specifically focusing on gift shops and home good stores. Another could include expanding on current trade show schedules or building on existing partnerships to increase the wholesale side of business.

     

    This relocatable business, outsources all of its product manufacturing. This means that new ownership could be located anywhere and continue this business’s reputation for unique and manly products saving guys from choking on noxious bathroom gases and overbearingly floral facilities one fart joke at a time.

    PRICE $98,000

  • Audiology Clinic Serving a 100 Mile Radius

     

     

    This audiology clinic is based out of two locations in Nebraska one of which is located at an owned building in West Point. This business is built on strong relationships with over 200 clients, as well as existing contracts with nursing homes and veteran facilities. The clinic serves a huge 100 mile radius centered at West Point! At the purchase price of $407,000, a 10% down payment of $40,700 returns $81,207 in the first year after debt payments, which is a nearly 200% return on investment!

     

    This company provides audiology and hearing aid services for all ages including comprehensive hearing evaluations, hearing aid consultations and fittings, and special diagnostic tests. The current owner is the audiologist, providing all patient services. Alongside the owner is one full-time employee, the office manager, who handles all communication with patients, dedicates reports, troubleshoots, and recommends hearing items for patients, and works with insurance companies for claim submissions.

     

    The West Point location is a 1,000 square feet stand-alone building specifically built for a medical clinic and is owned by the current owner. The office is open Monday through Friday from 9:00am-5:00pm by appointment and walk-in. The Fremont location is a single 10x12 foot office in a shared office building with the current lease is being $300/month and is by appointment only.

     

    This audiology clinic is not tied to a physician or private practitioner, which gives the company freedom to be its own private practice and see clients as they wish. Some areas for growth include moving away from paper charting and expand on marketing as well as telehealth, nursing home, and pediatric services.

     

    PRICE $407,000 CASH FLOW $133,690

  • Floral Boutique with 22% Profit Margin in Omaha

    Established floral studio and store with over $500,000 in gross sales. Situated in a well-trafficked strip mall in Omaha, this anchor store has become a staple since its opening in 2003. Delivering within the Omaha metro, this store has a customer retention rate of 80%. Sales have been at a steady clip over the last few years, bolstered by daily orders and contracts. The current owner has recently been signed for a large event that is expected to invoice over $6,000, and any ownership transition should not interrupt this deal.

    All staff are well-trained and capable, working within set hours and with the understood need for some seasonal flexibility. Currently there are three full-timers and one part-timer employed in the studio, in addition to two alternating delivery drivers. Employees are encouraged to help in the creation of custom floral designs that are then featured for sale. The seller is also assisted by a part-time bookkeeper who logs invoices into ShopKeep Point of Sale software.

    The 2,000-square foot building is leased at $11.25 per square foot, which is half of what most stores pay in this particular development. Leasing is all inclusive, covering the shop’s common area as well. Included in the sale is a delivery vehicle with around 50,000 in mileage.

    With the right buyer, this already successful business could increase sales through improving web traffic and revamping marketing materials. Seller is willing to finance 20%, and with a down payment of $24,000, a new owner may expect to see a three-fold return and a profit of $95,749 the first year.

    PRICE $120,000 CASH FLOW $113,432

  • Bar and Grill

    This Omaha Metro Area’s Newest Bar and Grill has really brought a fun and upbeat spot for many to relax and dine in.  The owner had more than 20 years of industry experience owning and operating other bars in which this location was established in November of 2008. Individuals enjoy delicious American food favorites with cold beverages from the bar and grill. This facility features a casual dining atmosphere with great food and drink selections.  It has also been a great attraction for many to watch the fine world of sports. 

    PRICE $210,000 CASH FLOW $72,000

  • Event Backdrop with Pipe and Drape Services

    This production company has been providing pipe and drape services to produce beautiful back drops for events within a 100-mile radius of Houston for over 20 years. Their target client is 40% Corporate Events, 35% comes from referrals from audio visual companies, 25% comes from fundraising, non-profit and private events such as showers and quinceaneras. The venue type that this special event company flourishes in are at large banquet halls or convention centers, trade shows, Gala’s and pageant stages. In fact, they do pageants for the entire state of Texas. Income breakout is about 75% from pipe and drape rentals and because they own all of the inventory this has a very high margin, the other 25% of the business comes from planning and coordinating sub-contractors. They do not do any sort of floral, AV, DJ or music, or catering and liquor. Though these are all great growth opportunities to work closely with these types businesses and create more referrals. The owner is selling as she is in her 60s and entering retirement, she is happy to stay on train and transition for 6 months to one year. Additionally, she is willing to finance 10% to show her vested interest in the success of the business moving forward. The overhead is very low as there are only 4 storage units which is $450/ month. Though they have a large pool of contractors that they work with, there is a core team of 6 that they are working with on a regular basis. The purchase comes with 2 box trucks and a trailer used to haul all of the rental pieces, an abundant amount of inventory such as drapery, linens and table decor and there is almost $60K in customer deposits that will transfer over for upcoming events.

    Priced at $520,000, with a diverse client base consisting of corporate entities, audiovisual companies, fundraisers, and private events, has built a solid reputation in the Houston area. A 10% down payment of $52,000 returns $70,277 in the first year after debt payments! They cater to roughly 125 events per year and this is good for a brand-new business owner or for someone who has been in hospitality for a number of years.

     

    PRICE $520,000 CASH FLOW $145,147

  • Vinyl Fabrication with 100% Wholesale to Distributors

     

     

    This vinyl fabrication company distributes raw vinyl products to wholesalers and large advertising firms, their customer is not the end user. The production facility is a spacious 8,100 sq. ft. uniquely modified fabrication space. The owner has lived out of state for over 3 years, and what allows him to do this is the President who operates the company and has been there nearly 20 years. Also included on their staff is an Art Director, Sales Manager, Production Manager, several Finishers, along with Customer Service Associates. The product mix is 33% vinyl banners, 33% trade show displays, and 33% specialty graphics. The distribution network they have built is nationwide with a hyper focus in the Southwest region. This business has been 100% SBA approved for a qualified buyer who has 10% cash down. A buyer who puts down 10% of the purchase price will receive a return of $256K after their loan payment – this is an incredible rate of return! The cash flow for the last twelve months is $577K, which is a 27% profit margin. There is little to no advertising, marketing, or business development, and this company is successfully operating and growing year over year by simply servicing their existing client base. Priced at $2,150,000, this business is primed and ready for a new owner who is looking to expand into the design space. The owner has offered 10% Seller Financing to show his vested interest in the continued success of the business moving forward in addition to a transition period of 6 months to 1 year.

     

     

    PRICE $2,150,000 CASH FLOW $566,116

  • Architecture Firm with 20+ on Staff – Owner will stay 3 years

     

     

    This architecture firm provides B2B services to corporate clients in the hospitality, entertainment, and senior living industries throughout Toronto. The firm has been established 30+ years and boasts a team of 21 employees, including a CFO, general manager, 9 registered architects, 4 technical draftsmen, and 3 architect interns. They also have 3 contract architects who handle overflow work as needed. Services include interior styling, architecture, and design management. Although they primarily serve the Ontario metropolitan area, they have performed work in the US in the past. The owner have very limited billable hours in the business, providing team and project management as needed. The sellers are seeking a new owner due to succession and retirement planning, but to help ensure the ongoing success of the company, the owners are offering an extended transition period of 3-4 years.

    With the purchase, a buyer would also receive over $480,000 in working capital and all the equipment and software needed. 2023 displayed an incredible profit margin of 64%! The price of $7,800,000 CAD includes a 15% seller promissory note alongside a 10% equity hold to show good faith in the continued success of the business post-close.

     

    PRICE $7,800,000 CASH FLOW $1,563,546

  • Luxury Black Car Service for Corporate Clients: Focused on Airport Travel

     

    Not everyone wants to use a ride share app such as Uber or Lyft, and before ride share, not all people wanted to use a taxi, which is why for more than 25 years, this luxury transportation and black car service business has withstood the test of time! The company is located in Tampa and operates in about a 50-mile radius. This company’s primary clients are corporate/business travelers with prearranged car service to and from the airport. This makes up 70% of their revenue. An additional 15% comes from black car or limo service, which take professionals to and from meetings or are booked by a luxury hotel concierge service for their guests. The last 15% is from the school transport division, which takes students to field trips or after school activities. In the purchase of this business is 15+ vehicles, including luxury sedans, luxury SUVs, executive vans, SUVs, minivan, passenger van valued at $332,000. The team consists of 1 Customer Service Manager, 1 Customer Service Rep, 1 Dispatch Manager, 1 Mechanic, and 40-50 contract drivers. Currently, the owner is only responsible for general oversight and handling AP, which the CSR Manager would be easily able to wrap into their current job responsibilities. The owner is ready to “turn over the keys” to the next owner so he can ease into retirement while he stays on board for 1 year during a transition period.

    With a multiple of 3.8, this business is priced at $1,025,000. The owner is willing to carry 10% of the note, showing a vested interest in the ongoing success of the company. There is also space to expand service into nonemergency medical transportation.

    PRICE $1,025,000 CASH FLOW $270,864

  • Residential Playground Equipment: Sales and Installation

     

     

    Focused on Sports Courts and Playgrounds (both residential and commercial) and trampoline systems. This is an allencompassing project management company that begins with customer consultation, design & layout, logistics & delivery; then implementation followed by annual maintenance and equipment additions. Proven over the test of time, this business will turn 30 this year and there is no stop in sight as they are projecting higher sales than last years $3.2 million (which was the highest year)! There are 10 on staff, with 3 sales associates, 1 receptionist and greeter, and 6 installers (2 full time, 2 seasonal, and 2 subs). There is plenty of room to display all the recreation this company can bring to a backyard in their 20,000 sq. ft. facility; which includes offices, warehouse space and a showroom. The assets included in the purchase of this business are valued at $572,916 and this includes hoops, trampolines, playground equipment, vehicles and more.

    Priced at $2,425,000, the current owner has offered a transition/ training period of up to one year to ensure a smooth transition. With growth opportunities including partnering with small schools, public parks, and growing the commercial side of business and by adding other product lines such as ninja warrior courses, gazebos, picnic tables, and firepits. With a 10% down payment of $242,500, a buyer can expect a return of $177,336 in the first year after debt payments.

     

    PRICE $2,425,000 CASH FLOW $494,502

  • Floral Boutique with 22% Profit Margin in Omaha

    Established floral studio and store with over $500,000 in gross sales. Situated in a well-trafficked strip mall in Omaha, this anchor store has become a staple since its opening in 2003. Delivering within the Omaha metro, this store has a customer retention rate of 80%. Sales have been at a steady clip over the last few years, bolstered by daily orders and contracts. The current owner has recently been signed for a large event that is expected to invoice over $6,000, and any ownership transition should not interrupt this deal.

    All staff are well-trained and capable, working within set hours and with the understood need for some seasonal flexibility. Currently there are three full-timers and one part-timer employed in the studio, in addition to two alternating delivery drivers. Employees are encouraged to help in the creation of custom floral designs that are then featured for sale. The seller is also assisted by a part-time bookkeeper who logs invoices into ShopKeep Point of Sale software.

    The 2,000-square foot building is leased at $11.25 per square foot, which is half of what most stores pay in this particular development. Leasing is all inclusive, covering the shop’s common area as well. Included in the sale is a delivery vehicle with around 50,000 in mileage.

    With the right buyer, this already successful business could increase sales through improving web traffic and revamping marketing materials. Seller is willing to finance 20%, and with a down payment of $24,000, a new owner may expect to see a three-fold return and a profit of $95,749 the first year.

    PRICE $120,000 CASH FLOW $113,432

Franchise (4)

  • Management of Residential & Commercial Improvement Projects

    With little to no overhead and a 129% return on investment, this well-established company offers one-stop project management services for residential, commercial, and government clients. This business has been serving Seattle and surrounding areas since 2004, launching as a franchise in 2019 to become more community-focused; offering expert training and support for all operational aspects of the business, their company goal is 100% franchisee satisfaction. Outsourcing all facility improvements, the current team  includes 4 Project Managers, 1 Sales Representative, and 1 Project Team Admin. All hands-on work is completed by subcontractors, reducing the need for large equipment investments, inventory storage, or a large team. This asset-light company uses digital management programs to manage and execute projects, keeping up-front costs down and profit margins up. The current owner does some project management, along with oversight of operations.

     

    With a well-established clientele, the company specializes in the management of construction projects which includes roofing, concrete or asphalt, turf installation, landscape construction, and snow removal.  Aside from snow removal, most services are large ticket construction services such as outdoor living spaces, concrete projects, repaving parking lots, or landscape construction.  They also provide Coronavirus Protective Services, including interior & exterior sanitation, physical barrier installation, board-up services, emergency electrical services, and emergency plumbing services.

    Great growth is possible through networking and building the customer base, targeted advertising, or expanding the territory as allowed. All territories can be managed with a team of four or less, and with minimal office space per territory.

    PRICE $5,300,000 CASH FLOW $1,533,254

  • Spa & Massage- Non-Medical- Passive Owner

     

     

    This business is home to a 3,000 square feet location with 11 treatment rooms that are not at maximum capacity. They have an established chain of command, which includes 28 team members as well as 3 Team Leads. This day spa performed 60% massage and 40% skincare with a reoccurring active client base. The services in skincare include facials, body treatments, spray tans, waxing, and more. Their clients include both men and women of all ages, with 591 active monthly members. The spa location is perfectly placed in the middle of a very accessible and busy area! The current owner handles oversight, but Team Leads operate the daily business. The aging owner has some medical concerns and is looking to sell; as a sign of good faith, she is offering a 15% note and 6 months of training!

    Priced at $519,000 this establishment offers a buyer the opportunity to purchase a well-known business in a prime location with support and training from both the owner and from the national franchise, making it a high rate for success!

     

    PRICE $519,000 CASH FLOW $177,728

  • 100% Delivery & Take Out – Omaha Pizza Franchise Location

     

    This Omaha pizza franchise location is currently 100% delivery & take out and is still seeing an increase in revenue through COVID! This location for sale has been in business since 1980, and under current ownership since 2006. There are around 21 employees, with FT Shift Leaders, and PT Kitchen Staff, Front Counter, and Delivery Drivers. All employees start at $11/hr., with Shift Leader pay at $18-18.50/hr. 80% of all employees are trained to full completion through the corporate online training. As the restaurant is franchised, a 5% portion of the revenue is paid out to the corporation, in addition to a small fee of $61/month for a customer loyalty program, in which a customer can earn free items as they accumulate points through the restaurant’s app. Their POS, Speedline, is fully integrated through Tillster, so the push of one button sets delivery in motion. Approximately 77% of the revenue is from dinner orders (after 4:00).

     

    Post-COVID, the restaurant has transitioned to be fully delivery and take-out based, with sales vastly improving over 2019. Currently, the dining area is still closed, and thus would be a perfect growth opportunity for a new owner, as the present dining area furniture was reupholstered during the COVID shutdown. Other key assets include two Middleby Marshall ovens, a make table, 60 qt. Hobart mixer, cooler, a Somerset dough sheeter, and POS systems. A great deal of local marketing is already done, with an advertising co-op being headed by local owners, and advertising partnerships done with local schools. The current owner provides general management and oversight for the location, opening the restaurant on Mondays and overall working 25-30 hours per week.

     

    Priced at just $535,000, a 15% down payment of $80,250 returns $88,861 in the first year after debt payments – a 111% return on investment!  A new owner could certainly boost revenue by obtaining a liquor license and re-opening the dining room.

    PRICE $535,000 CASH FLOW $156,707

  • Award-Wiinning Eatery near Omaha

    This eatery very close to Omaha does not only have great-tasting food, but also happens to be in a location full of growth potential!! A new big-box department store has just been approved nearby along with a new street sign, leading to more traffic and MORE customers! This eatery has won “Best Of” in their current location. It has also already grown 24.1% since last year 

    PRICE $137,000 CASH FLOW $90,403

Thinking of Selling?
When selecting an M&A firm, please use the following Scorecard: click here for our M&A Scorecard

The Firm makes no warranties or representation in consideration to the information provided above. All communication regarding this business must occur directly with The Firm Advisors, LLC. The Firm is not a real estate brokerage and does not sell real estate. The Firm solely advises on exit strategy.